礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
律藏· 《大品义注》巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Vinayapiṭake · Mahāvagga-aṭṭhakathā
1. 大篇义注
378 段
两部戒本的结集刚刚完成之后,
精通诸犍度的大长老们结集了犍度。
今其注释次第既已至此,
故此即是对其不明显义理的注释。
在《分别》里,那些义理是由哪些人、为哪些人阐明的;
如果我们再继续讲下去,什么时候才是个头呢?
那些本身已浅显明白之义,何须再为作注?
然而,有依意趣与脉络、以及文辞而后明者。
深隐之法若未释,则无能知彼故;
是故此一阐释法,正为彼法而施设。巴利
Ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhānaṃ, saṅgītisamanantaraṃ; Saṅgāyiṃsu mahātherā, khandhakaṃ khandhakovidā. Yaṃ tassa dāni sampatto, yasmā saṃvaṇṇanākkamo; Tasmā hoti ayaṃ tassa, anuttānatthavaṇṇanā. Padabhājaniye atthā, yehi yesaṃ pakāsitā; Te ce puna vadeyyāma, pariyosānaṃ kadā bhave. Uttānā ceva ye atthā, tesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāya kiṃ; Adhippāyānusandhīhi, byañjanena ca ye pana. Anuttānā na te yasmā, sakkā ñātuṃ avaṇṇitā; Tesaṃyeva ayaṃ tasmā, hoti saṃvaṇṇanānayoti.
1 当时,世尊住在优楼频螺,尼连禅河岸边的菩提树下,刚刚证得正觉。此处虽然像“当时,世尊住在毗兰若”等句子那样,并没有使用具格的特殊理由,但到了律藏中,这个说法就固定用具格来表达,所以应当知道,这是从一开始就按照已经确立的说法方式来说的。这个道理也适用于此后其他类似的地方。巴利
1.Tena samayena buddho bhagavā uruvelāyaṃ viharati najjā nerañjarāya tīre bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhisambuddhoti ettha kiñcāpi ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāya’’ntiādīsu viya karaṇavacane visesakāraṇaṃ natthi, vinayaṃ patvā pana karaṇavacaneneva ayamabhilāpo āropitoti ādito paṭṭhāya āruḷhābhilāpavasenevetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Esa nayo aññesupi ito paresu evarūpesu.
那么,说这句话的用意是什么呢?是为了从一开始就说明出家等律仪事务的制立因缘。世尊确实曾这样允许出家与达上:“比丘们,我允许以这三种皈依出家、受达上。”(《大品》34)又在王舍城等地允许了依止师与依止师义务、戒师与戒师义务等。这些都是在成正觉之后,于菩提道场度过七七日,在波罗奈转法轮,按这样的次第走到各个地方,在种种具体事缘中制定下来的。应当知道,说这句话的用意,就是为了从一开始就说明这些出家等律仪事务的制立因缘。巴利
Kiṃ panetassa vacane payojananti? Pabbajjādīnaṃ vinayakammānaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya nidānadassanaṃ. Yā hi bhagavatā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjaṃ upasampada’’nti (mahāva. 34) evaṃ pabbajjā ceva upasampadā ca anuññātā, yāni ca rājagahādīsu upajjhāyaupajjhāyavattaācariyaācariyavattādīni anuññātāni, tāni abhisambodhiṃ patvā sattasattāhaṃ bodhimaṇḍe vītināmetvā bārāṇasiyaṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattetvā iminā anukkamena idañcidañca ṭhānaṃ patvā imasmiñca imasmiñca vatthusmiṃ paññattānīti evametesaṃ pabbajjādīnaṃ vinayakammānaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya nidānadassanaṃ etassa vacane payojananti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,“优楼频螺”是指大沙滩,也就是一大片沙堆。另一种说法是:“优楼”是沙,“频螺”是边界;因为越过边界而运来的沙,所以叫优楼频螺,这里也应该这样理解。据说在过去,诸佛还没有出世的时候,有一万个善男子出家做了苦行者,住在那个地方。有一天他们聚在一起,共同立下一条规矩:“身业和语业别人也能看得到,意业却不显露;所以,如果有人生起欲寻、嗔寻或害寻,没有别人能举发他,他就应当自己举发自己,用钵装沙倒在这个地方,这就是对他的惩罚。”从那时起,谁生起这样的寻,就用钵装沙倒在那里。这样渐渐堆成了大沙堆,后来的人把它围起来,建成了塔庙。针对这件事才说:“优楼频螺是指大沙滩,也就是大沙堆。”也是针对这件事才说:“或者,优楼是沙,频螺是边界;因为越过边界而运来的沙,所以叫优楼频螺,这里也应该这样理解。”巴利
Tattha uruvelāyanti mahāvelāyaṃ; mahante vālikarāsimhīti attho. Atha vā ‘‘urū’’ti vālikā vuccati; ‘‘velā’’ti mariyādā; velātikkamanahetu āhaṭā uru uruvelāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Atīte kira anuppanne buddhe dasasahassakulaputtā tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā tasmiṃ padese viharantā ekadivasaṃ sannipatitvā katikavattaṃ akaṃsu – ‘‘kāyakammavacīkammāni nāma paresampi pākaṭāni honti, manokammaṃ pana apākaṭaṃ; tasmā yo kāmavitakkaṃ vā byāpādavitakkaṃ vā vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vā vitakketi, tassa añño codako nāma natthi, so attanāva attānaṃ codetvā pattapuṭena vālikaṃ āharitvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne ākiratu, idamassa daṇḍakamma’’nti. Tato paṭṭhāya yo tādisaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketi, so tattha pattapuṭena vālikaṃ ākirati. Evaṃ tattha anukkamena mahāvālikarāsi jāto, tato naṃ pacchimā janatā parikkhipitvā cetiyaṭṭhānamakāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘uruvelāyanti mahāvelāyaṃ; mahante vālikarāsimhīti attho’’ti. Tameva sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha vā urūti vālikā vuccati; velāti mariyādā; velātikkamanahetu āhaṭā uru uruvelāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti.
在菩提树下:菩提指的是四道中的智;世尊在这里证得了那个菩提,所以这棵树也就得到了“菩提树”这个名字,它的根部就是“菩提树下”。初成正觉:就是最初、最先成佛;意思是成佛之后最初的那一刻。以一座:指一次也没有起身,就以盘腿而坐的那一座。感受解脱之乐:就是正在感受解脱之乐、果等至之乐。巴利
Bodhirukkhamūleti bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ; taṃ bodhiṃ bhagavā ettha pattoti rukkhopi ‘‘bodhirukkho’’tveva nāmaṃ labhi, tassa bodhirukkhassa mūle bodhirukkhamūle. Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho; abhisambuddho hutvā sabbapaṭhamaṃyevāti attho. Ekapallaṅkenāti sakimpi anuṭṭhahitvā yathāābhujitena ekeneva pallaṅkena. Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedayamāno.
“缘起”就是缘的作用方式。因为缘的作用方式能让彼此互相依赖、共同存在的诸法生起,所以称为“缘起”。这是这里的简要说明。如果想详细了知具备一切方面的抉择,应当从《清净道论》中获取。
“顺和逆”就是顺向和逆向。其中,按照“无明缘行”等这样的方式所说的,从无明开始的缘的作用方式,因为它自己执行应当做的事,所以称为“顺”。按照“无明完全离贪灭尽故行灭”等这样的方式所说的同一种缘的作用方式,因为以不生起的灭尽而灭,不再执行那件事,所以由于它不执行,称为“逆”。或者,按前一种方式说的是流转的顺,另一种是流转的逆,这里应当这样理解其含义。然而,因为并非从头到尾、从尾到头地解说,所以除了上述含义之外,顺逆之性不能成立。巴利
Paṭiccasamuppādanti paccayākāraṃ. Paccayākāro hi aññamaññaṃ paṭicca sahite dhamme uppādetīti ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti vuccati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana sabbākārasampannaṃ vinicchayaṃ icchantena visuddhimaggato gahetabbo. Anulomapaṭilomanti anulomañca paṭilomañca. Tattha ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā nayena vutto avijjādiko paccayākāro attanā kattabbakiccakaraṇato ‘‘anulomo’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādinā nayena vutto sveva anuppādanirodhena nirujjhamāno taṃ kiccaṃ na karotīti tassa akaraṇato ‘‘paṭilomo’’ti vuccati. Purimanayena vā vutto pavattiyā anulomo, itaro tassā paṭilomoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ādito pana paṭṭhāya yāva antaṃ, antato ca paṭṭhāya yāva ādiṃ pāpetvā avuttattā ito aññenatthena anulomapaṭilomatā na yujjati.
“作意”就是(在心中)作意。在这里,为了先说明他是怎样顺着(缘起)作意的,就先说了“无明缘行”等。其中,无明本身就是缘,所以叫“无明缘”。因此,诸行是从无明这个缘生起的。按照这个方法,应当理解一切句子中的含义。这是这里的简要说明。如果想要具备一切行相的详细抉择,就应当从《清净道论》中取来。巴利
Manasākāsīti manasi akāsi. Tattha yathā anulomaṃ manasi akāsi, idaṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo. Tasmā avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana sabbākārasampannaṃ vinicchayaṃ icchantena visuddhimaggatova gahetabbo.
那么,为了说明他是怎样逆向作意的,经中说了“正是由于无明的完全离贪灭尽,所以行灭”等等。其中,“正是由于无明”就是“正是由于无明”。“完全离贪灭尽”是指以被称为离贪的道而完全灭尽。“行灭”就是诸行不再生起而灭。为了说明:如此灭尽的诸行灭了的缘故,识就灭了;而识等灭了的缘故,名色等也就灭了,所以在说了“行灭故识灭”等之后,经中又说“如此,这整个苦蕴就灭尽”。其中,“整个”是指全部的,或者说是纯粹的、没有众生的。“苦蕴”是指苦的聚集。“灭尽”就是不再生起。巴利
Yathā pana paṭilomaṃ manasi akāsi, idaṃ dassetuṃ avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodhotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha avijjāya tvevāti avijjāya tu eva. Asesavirāganirodhāti virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā . Saṅkhāranirodhoti saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti. Evaṃ niruddhānaṃ pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā viññāṇaṃ niruddhaṃ, viññāṇādīnañca nirodhā nāmarūpādīni niruddhāniyeva hontīti dassetuṃ saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodhotiādīni vatvā evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotīti vuttaṃ. Tattha kevalassāti sakalassa; suddhassa vā sattavirahitassāti attho. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkharāsissa. Nirodho hotīti anuppādo hoti.
了知此义,是指对于所说的“以无明等为因,行等苦蕴得以集起;以无明灭等为因,则得灭尽”,以一切方式了知此义。于彼时,即在了知此义的那个时候。发出此优陀那,是指在了知此义时,为了了知因以及因所生之法,而发出彰显其威力的、以“当诸法确实显现时”等为开端的、由伴随喜悦的智慧所生的优陀那,也就是发出悦意之语。巴利
Etamatthaṃviditvāti yvāyaṃ ‘‘avijjādivasena saṅkhārādikassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo ca avijjānirodhādivasena ca nirodho hotī’’ti vutto, sabbākārena etamatthaṃ viditvā. Tāyaṃ velāyanti tāyaṃ tassa atthassa viditavelāyaṃ. Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti imaṃ tasmiṃ vidite atthe hetuno ca hetusamuppannadhammassa ca pajānanāya ānubhāvadīpakaṃ ‘‘yadā have pātubhavantī’’tiādikaṃ somanassayuttañāṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, attamanavācaṃ nicchāresīti vuttaṃ hoti.
这段话的意思是:“当确实”指在某个存在状态、某个时候。“显现”就是生起。“诸法”指能让人通达顺缘起之理、成就证悟的菩提分法。或者,“显现”是说明、显露的意思,因为现观而变得明显、清楚。“诸法”指四圣谛之法。“热忱”是就烧尽烦恼这一含义而说的精进;“具热忱者”就是具有正勤精进的人。“禅修者”指以所缘审察相和特相审察相这两种禅那而修禅的人。“婆罗门”指已除去诸恶的漏尽者。“他的疑惑都消尽”就是说,他这样显现诸法之后,他的疑惑都消尽。“一切”指那些疑惑:比如在缘起方面,以“尊者,是谁在触?世尊说:这个问题不恰当”这样的方式所说的疑惑;又以“尊者,什么是老死?这老死又属于谁?世尊说:这个问题不恰当”这样的方式所说的疑惑;还有因为未能证悟缘起而出现的“我过去世存在吗”等十六种疑惑——这一切都消尽、离去、灭尽。为什么?因为“他了知有因之法”,也就是因为他了知、遍知、证悟:这个以无明等为因、有因的,纯粹只是苦蕴的行等法。巴利
Tassattho – yadā haveti yasmiṃ bhave kāle. Pātubhavantīti uppajjanti. Dhammāti anulomapaccayākārapaṭivedhasādhakā bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Atha vā pātubhavantīti pakāsanti; abhisamayavasena byattā pākaṭā honti. Dhammāti catuariyasaccadhammā. Ātāpo vuccati kilesasantāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ; ātāpinoti sammappadhānavīriyavato. Jhāyatoti ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena ca lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena ca jhānena jhāyantassa. Brāhmaṇassāti bāhitapāpassa khīṇāsavassa. Athassa kaṅkhā vapayantīti athassa evaṃ pātubhūtadhammassa kaṅkhā vapayanti. Sabbāti yā etā ‘‘ko nu kho bhante phusatīti; no kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā, tathā ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho bhante jarāmaraṇaṃ; kassa ca panidaṃ jarāmaraṇanti ; no kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā ca nayena paccayākāre kaṅkhā vuttā, yā ca paccayākārasseva appaṭividdhattā ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādikā soḷasa kaṅkhā āgatā, tā sabbā vapayanti apagacchanti nirujjhanti. Kasmā? Yato pajānāti sahetudhammanti yasmā avijjādikena hetunā sahetukaṃ imaṃ saṅkhārādiṃ kevalaṃ dukkhakkhandhadhammaṃ pajānāti aññāti paṭivijjhatīti.
2 第二品中:“发出此优陀那”,意思是:当他在心中证知那个义理时,为了显示对被称为涅槃的缘灭——也就是“由无明的完全离贪灭尽故,行灭”——所阐明的觉悟之力,而说出如上所说的那种优陀那。这里的简要含义是:因为他已经了知、遍知、证悟了被称为缘灭的涅槃,所以当那位具热忱、修禅的婆罗门,如上所说的诸法显现时,那些由于未了知涅槃而可能生起的一切疑惑,全都消尽。巴利
2. Dutiyavāre – imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti imaṃ tasmiṃ vidite atthe ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’ti evaṃ pakāsitassa nibbānasaṅkhātassa paccayakkhayassa avabodhānubhāvadīpakaṃ vuttappakāraṃ udānaṃ udānesīti attho. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yasmā paccayānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi, tasmā yadāssa ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa vuttappakārā dhammā pātubhavanti, athassa yā nibbānassa aviditattā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā sabbāpi kaṅkhā vapayantīti.
3 第三遍中:“发出此优陀那”,意思是:他以那条道,通过作用与所缘的作用,了知了称为苦蕴之集与灭的义理,为了彰显那条圣道的威力,而发出如上所说的优陀那。这里的简要含义是:当诸法确实显现于热忱修禅的婆罗门时,那位婆罗门就以那些已生起的菩提分法,或者以令四圣谛法显现的圣道,驱散魔军而安住——他驱散、摧毁、粉碎那以“欲是你的第一军”等方式所说的魔军,并如此安住。怎样呢?就像太阳升上虚空,以自己的光芒照亮虚空,驱散黑暗而安住;同样,那位婆罗门也以那些法或那条道证悟诸谛,驱散魔军而安住。巴利
3. Tatiyavāre – imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti imaṃ yena maggena so dukkhakkhandhassa samudayanirodhasaṅkhāto attho kiccavasena ca ārammaṇakiriyāya ca vidito, tassa ariyamaggassa ānubhāvadīpakaṃ vuttappakāraṃ udānaṃ udānesīti attho. Tatrāpāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa, tadā so brāhmaṇo tehi vā uppannehi bodhipakkhiyadhammehi, yassa vā ariyamaggassa catusaccadhammā pātubhūtā, tena ariyamaggena vidhūpayaṃ tiṭṭhati mārasenaṃ ‘‘kāmā te paṭhamā senā’’tiādinā nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenaṃ vidhūpayanto vidhamento viddhaṃsento tiṭṭhati. Kathaṃ? Sūriyova obhāsayamantalikkhaṃ, yathā sūriyo abbhuggato attano pabhāya antalikkhaṃ obhāsentova andhakāraṃ vidhamento tiṭṭhati, evaṃ sopi brāhmaṇo tehi dhammehi tena vā maggena saccāni paṭivijjhantova mārasenaṃ vidhūpayanto tiṭṭhatīti.
应当知道,这里第一首优陀那是因为审察缘起的因缘方式而生起,第二首是因为审察涅槃而生起,第三首是因为审察道而生起。不过,《优陀那》中说“夜里初分顺观缘起,中分逆观,后分顺逆观”,这是针对七天过后,夜里生起“明天我将从座位起身”的作意而说的。因为那时,世尊前两首优陀那偈颂彰显了了知缘起的行相和证得缘灭的威力,依着这个威力,他在初分和中分各作意一个部分;而在这里,他是在波提波陀之夜这样作意的。世尊在毗舍佉月满月之夜,初分随念宿住,中分净化天眼,后分顺逆作意缘起,心想“现在天要亮了”,就证得了一切知智。就在证得一切知智之后,黎明立刻升起。从那以后,他当天就以同一个跏趺坐度过,到了波提波陀之夜,在三个时分中这样作意,而唱出了这些优陀那。如此,他在波提波陀之夜这样作意之后,就在那里度过了所说的“在菩提树下以同一个跏趺坐坐了七天”的时日。巴利
Evamettha paṭhamaṃ udānaṃ paccayākārapaccavekkhaṇavasena, dutiyaṃ nibbānapaccavekkhaṇavasena , tatiyaṃ maggapaccavekkhaṇavasena uppannanti veditabbaṃ. Udāne pana ‘‘rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomaṃ, dutiyaṃ yāmaṃ paṭilomaṃ, tatiyaṃ yāmaṃ anulomapaṭiloma’’nti vuttaṃ; taṃ sattāhassa accayena ‘‘sve āsanā vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti rattiṃ uppāditamanasikāraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tadā hi bhagavā yassa paccayākārapajānanassa ca paccayakkhayādhigamassa ca ānubhāvadīpikā purimā dve udānagāthā, tassa vasena ekekameva koṭṭhāsaṃ paṭhamayāmañca majjhimayāmañca manasākāsi, idha pana pāṭipadarattiyā evaṃ manasākāsi. Bhagavā hi visākhapuṇṇamāya rattiyā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussari, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhesi, pacchimayāme paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘idāni aruṇo uggamissatī’’ti sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇi. Sabbaññutappattisamanantarameva ca aruṇo uggacchi. Tato taṃ divasaṃ teneva pallaṅkena vītināmetvā sampattāya pāṭipadarattiyā tīsu yāmesu evaṃ manasi katvā imāni udānāni udānesi. Iti pāṭipadarattiyā evaṃ manasi katvā taṃ ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisīdī’’ti evaṃ vuttasattāhaṃ tattheva vītināmesi.
4 第四,世尊过了七天之后,从那个定中出来,从菩提树根处前往阿阇波罗榕树。这里并不是说,世尊从那个定中出来后,紧接着就从菩提树根处去了阿阇波罗榕树。就像说“吃过饭后躺下”这句话,并不是说“不放下手、不漱口、不走到床边、不说任何闲话就躺下”,而是说吃过饭之后才躺下,不是不躺下——这里要表达的正是这个意思。同样,这里说的是“不是从那个定中出来后紧接着就离开”,而是出定之后才离开,不是不离开——这里要表达的也正是这个意思。巴利
4.Athakho bhagavā sattāhassa accayena tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā bodhirukkhamūlā yena ajapālanigrodho tenupasaṅkamīti ettha na bhagavā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā anantarameva bodhirukkhamūlā yena ajapālanigrodho tenupasaṅkami. Yathā pana ‘‘bhutvā sayatī’’ti vutte na ‘‘hatthe adhovitvā mukhaṃ avikkhāletvā sayanasamīpaṃ agantvā aññaṃ kiñci ālāpasallāpaṃ akatvā sayati’’cceva vuttaṃ hoti, bhojanato pana pacchā sayati, na nasayatīti idamevattha dīpitaṃ hoti. Evamidhāpi ‘‘na tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā anantarameva pakkāmī’’ti vuttaṃ hoti, vuṭṭhānato ca pana pacchā pakkāmi, na napakkāmīti idamevettha dīpitaṃ hoti.
世尊没有马上离开,那他又做了什么呢?他在菩提树附近又度过了三个七日。关于这件事,有这样的次第叙述:据说,世尊证得佛果之后,以同一个跏趺坐安坐了七日。这时,一些天人生起了疑惑:“世尊没有起身,难道还有别的法能成就佛果吗?”于是世尊在第八天从定中出来,知道天人们的疑惑,为了消除他们的疑惑,便升到空中示现双神变,消除了他们的疑惑。然后,他从跏趺坐处稍微向东北方移开,站在那里,目不转睛地凝视着跏趺座和菩提树——这里是他历经四阿僧祇又十万劫积累巴拉密而达到力量成就的地方——就这样度过了七日。那个地方后来被称为“不瞬塔”。接着,他在跏趺座和站立处之间,一条从东向西延伸的宝石经行道上经行,度过了七日。那个地方后来被称为“宝石经行塔”。之后,天人们在西方化现了一座宝石殿。他在那里跏趺而坐,专门探究阿毗达摩藏,尤其是其中无量理法的“一切处论”,度过了七日。那个地方后来被称为“宝石殿塔”。巴利
Anantaraṃ pana apakkamitvā bhagavā kiṃ akāsīti? Aparānipi tīṇi sattāhāni bodhisamīpeyeva vītināmesi. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – bhagavati kira buddhattaṃ patvā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinne ‘‘na bhagavā vuṭṭhāti; kiṃ nu kho aññepi buddhattakarā dhammā atthī’’ti ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ kaṅkhā udapādi. Atha bhagavā aṭṭhame divase samāpattito vuṭṭhāya devatānaṃ kaṅkhaṃ ñatvā kaṅkhāvidhamanatthaṃ ākāse uppatitvā yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dassetvā tāsaṃ kaṅkhaṃ vidhamitvā pallaṅkato īsakaṃ pācīnanissite uttaradisābhāge ṭhatvā cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca upacitānaṃ pāramīnaṃ balādhigamanaṭṭhānaṃ pallaṅkaṃ bodhirukkhañca animisehi akkhīhi olokayamāno sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ animisacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Atha pallaṅkassa ca ṭhitaṭṭhānassa ca antarā puratthimato ca pacchimato ca āyate ratanacaṅkame caṅkamanto sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanacaṅkamacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Tato pacchimadisābhāge devatā ratanagharaṃ māpayiṃsu. Tattha pallaṅkena nisīditvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ visesato cettha anantanayaṃ samantapaṭṭhānaṃ vicinanto sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ.
在菩提树附近这样过了四个七日之后,到第五个七日,世尊从菩提树根处前往阿阇波罗榕树。据说,牧羊人常到那棵榕树的树荫下坐着,因此这棵树就得名“阿阇波罗榕树”。他在那里也是一边择法,一边感受解脱之乐,就这样坐了七日。这棵树在菩提树的东边。当世尊这样坐着时,有一位婆罗门走来问了一个问题,因此说“那时,有一位”等等。其中,“有哼吭习性者”:据说他名叫“见祥者”,因为慢心和嗔心,常发出“哼!哼!”的声音四处走动,所以称为“有哼吭习性者”。也有人读作“有呼吭习性者”。巴利
Evaṃ bodhisamīpeyeva cattāri sattāhāni vītināmetvā pañcame sattāhe bodhirukkhamūlā yena ajapālanigrodho tenupasaṅkami. Tassa kira nigrodhassa chāyāya ajapālakā gantvā nisīdanti; tenassa ajapālanigrodhotveva nāmaṃ udapādi. Sattāhaṃ vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti tatrāpi dhammaṃ vicinantoyeva vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedento nisīdi. Bodhito puratthimadisābhāge esa rukkho hoti. Evaṃ nisinne ca panettha bhagavati eko brāhmaṇo gantvā pañhaṃ pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho aññataro’’tiādi. Tattha huṃhuṅkajātikoti so kira diṭṭhamaṅgaliko nāma , mānavasena kodhavasena ca ‘‘huṃhu’’nti karonto vicarati, tasmā ‘‘huṃhuṅkajātiko’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Huhukkajātiko’’tipi paṭhanti.
明白了此义之后,也就是明白了那句话的究竟含义之后,他在那时说出了这段优陀那。它的意思是:那位婆罗门,是因为断除了种种恶法而成为婆罗门,并不是靠看吉兆;而如果有人带着哼哼作声之类的恶法,只凭出身就自称具有婆罗门性,那么这样的婆罗门,因为断除了恶法,因为舍弃了哼哼作声,所以不再哼哼作声;因为没有贪等烦恼,所以没有烦恼杂染;因为心致力于修习,所以调伏了自心,或者因为以戒防护而调伏了自心;因为通达了被称为四道智的诸明,或者因为到达了诸明的终极,所以是明达终极者;因为已经安住于道梵行,所以是已住梵行者。他可以如法地说梵论,也就是可以如法地说“我是婆罗门”这句话。对他来说,在整个世间的一切所缘中,任何地方都不存在贪欲增盛、嗔恨增盛、愚痴增盛、我慢增盛、邪见增盛这些增盛。巴利
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ tena vuttassa vacanassa sikhāpattamatthaṃ viditvā tāyaṃ velāyaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Tassattho – yo bāhitapāpadhammatāya brāhmaṇo na diṭṭhamaṅgalikatāya, huṃhuṅkārakabhāvādipāpadhammayutto hutvā kevalaṃ jātimattakena brahmaññaṃ paṭijānāti, so brāhmaṇo bāhitapāpadhammattā huṃhuṅkārappahānena nihuṃhuṅko, rāgādikasāvābhāvena nikkasāvo, bhāvanānuyogayuttacittatāya yatatto, sīlasaṃvarena vā saññatacittatāya yatatto, catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātehi vedehi antaṃ, vedānaṃ vā antaṃ gatattā vedantagū, maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā vusitabrahmacariyo. Dhammena brahmavādaṃ vadeyya, ‘‘brāhmaṇo, aha’’nti etaṃ vādaṃ dhammena vadeyya, yassa sakale lokasannivāse kuhiñci ekārammaṇepi rāgussado dosussado mohussado mānussado diṭṭhussadoti ime ussadā natthīti.
5 非时云:指雨季还没到的时候出现的云。不过,这朵云是在夏季最后一个月升起的。七日大雨:那朵云出现后,连续下了七天不间断的雨。寒风阴天:那场七日大雨,因为夹杂着雨滴的寒风四处吹刮,把日子弄得又冷又坏,所以叫寒风阴天。那时,目恰林达龙王:就是在那棵目恰林达树旁边的莲池里出生的、有大威神力的龙王。用身体盘绕七圈:这样用身体盘绕之后,又在头顶上方撑起巨大的头冠站着。在他盘绕出来的内部空间,有铁殿库房那么大,所以世尊就像坐在无风、门窗紧闭的楼阁里一样。莫让世尊受寒等等:这是说明他那样做并站着的原因。他就是为了不让寒冷恼害世尊,不让炎热恼害,不让虻、蚊等接触恼害,才那样做并站着的。其中,虽然七日大雨期间根本没有炎热,但如果云层偶尔散开,就可能会有炎热,他心里想不要让那炎热也恼害他,这样思惟是合理的。云散:指云升高;因云散去而远离的意思。无云:指云已经离去。天空:指虚空。自己的色身:指他自己的形态。巴利
5.Akālameghoti asampatte vassakāle uppannamegho. Ayaṃ pana gimhānaṃ pacchime māse udapādi. Sattāhavaddalikāti tasmiṃ uppanne sattāhaṃ avicchinnavuṭṭhikā ahosi. Sītavātaduddinīti sā ca pana sattāhavaddalikā udakaphusitasammissena sītavātena samantā paribbhamantena dūsitadivasattā sītavātaduddinī nāma ahosi. Atha kho mucalindo nāgarājāti tasseva mucalindarukkhassa samīpe pokkharaṇiyā nibbatto mahānubhāvo nāgarājā. Sattakkhattuṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvāti evaṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvā uparimuddhani mahantaṃ phaṇaṃ karitvāva ṭhite; tasmiṃ tassa parikkhepabbhantaraṃ lohapāsāde bhaṇḍāgāragabbhappamāṇaṃ ahosi, tasmā bhagavā nivāte pihitadvāravātapāne kūṭāgāre nisinno viya jāto. Mā bhagavantaṃ sītantiādi tassa tathā karitvā ṭhānakāraṇaparidīpanaṃ. So hi ‘‘mā bhagavantaṃ sītaṃ bādhayittha, mā uṇhaṃ, mā ḍaṃsādisamphasso bādhayitthā’’ti tathā karitvā aṭṭhāsi. Tattha kiñcāpi sattāhavaddalikāya uṇhameva natthi, sace pana antarantarā megho vigaccheyya uṇhaṃ bhaveyya , tampi naṃ mā bādhayitthāti evaṃ tassa cintetuṃ yuttaṃ. Viddhanti ubbiddhaṃ; meghavigamena dūrībhūtanti attho. Vigatavalāhakanti apagatameghaṃ. Devanti ākāsaṃ. Sakavaṇṇanti attano rūpaṃ.
以远离为乐,这里的远离指的是涅槃,也就是依着的止息,那是快乐的。满足的人,是指因为四道智的喜悦而满足的人。听过法的人,是指已经听闻了被开示之法的人。看见的人,是指用自己精进力所证得的智慧之眼,看见那种远离,以及任何应当看见的东西。无恼害,是指不动摇的状态;这里显示的是慈心的前行。对众生有节制,是指对众生的节制;不伤害的状态就是乐,这是意思。这里显示的是悲心的前行。世间的离欲是乐,说明离欲也是乐。超越诸欲,是指所谓的超越诸欲;那离欲也是乐,这是意思。这里说的是不来果之道。我慢的调伏,这里说的是阿拉汉果;因为阿拉汉果被称为我慢的止息调伏。从此之后再也没有别的乐了,所以说这确实是最上的乐。巴利
Sukho vivekoti nibbānasaṅkhāto upadhiviveko sukho. Tuṭṭhassāti catumaggañāṇasantosena santuṭṭhassa. Sutadhammassāti pakāsitadhammassa. Passatoti taṃ vivekaṃ yaṃ vā kiñci passitabbaṃ nāma, taṃ sabbaṃ attano vīriyabalādhigatena ñāṇacakkhunā passantassa. Abyāpajjanti akuppanabhāvo; etena mettāpubbabhāgo dassito. Pāṇabhūtesu saṃyamoti sattesu ca saṃyamo; avihiṃsanabhāvo sukhoti attho. Etena karuṇāpubbabhāgo dassito. Sukhā virāgatā loketi vītarāgatāpi sukhāti dīpeti. Kāmānaṃ samatikkamoti yā ‘‘kāmānaṃ samatikkamo’’ti vuccati; sā virāgatāpi sukhāti attho. Etena anāgāmimaggo kathito. Asmimānassa yo vinayoti iminā pana arahattaṃ kathitaṃ; arahattañhi asmimānassa ‘‘passaddhivinayo’’ti vuccati. Ito parañca sukhaṃ nāma natthi, tenāha ‘‘etaṃ ve paramaṃ sukha’’nti.
6 从大菩提树东边的目恰林达树下——也就是位于大菩提树东角的那棵目恰林达树下的意思。王树:他走向位于南边的那棵王树。那时,是指哪个时候呢?据说,世尊在王树下以一座跏趺坐坐了七天,在出定那天黎明时分,知道“该办食事”了,帝释天王便奉上药果诃梨勒。世尊受用后,刚受用完身体就有了需要。帝释天神奉上漱口水。世尊洗了脸,就坐在那棵树下。就这样,在太阳升起时,世尊坐在那里。巴利
6.Mucalindamūlāti mahābodhito pācīnakoṇe ṭhitamucalindarukkhamūlā. Rājāyatananti dakkhiṇadisābhāge ṭhitaṃ rājāyatanarukkhaṃ upasaṅkami . Tena kho pana samayenāti katarena samayena. Bhagavato kira rājāyatanamūle sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinnassa samādhito vuṭṭhānadivase aruṇuggamanavelāyameva ‘‘bhojanakiccena bhavitabba’’nti ñatvā sakko devarājā osadhaharītakaṃ upanesi. Bhagavā taṃ paribhuñji, paribhuttamattasseva sarīrakiccaṃ ahosi. Sakko mukhodakaṃ adāsi. Bhagavā mukhaṃ dhovitvā tasmiṃyeva rukkhamūle nisīdi. Evaṃ uggate aruṇamhi nisinne bhagavati.
那时候,有两位商人兄弟,一个叫德布萨,一个叫跋离咖,他们是商人。郁伽罗,是指从郁伽罗国来的。那里,是指世尊当时住的地方。世尊住在哪里呢?住在中地。所以他们正走在前往中地的长途路上,这就是这里的意思。亲属血亲的天神,是指过去世曾是他们亲属的天神。她说了这话,据说那位天神让他们的所有车辆都走不动了。于是他们想这是怎么回事,就向路神献了祭品。在他们献祭的时候,那位天神以可见的身体说了这番话。用炒面与蜜团,是指用未黏结成团的散炒面和揉合了酥油、蜜、糖浆等而黏结成团的炒面。请你们供奉,是指请你们侍奉。这对于你们,是指那供奉将成为你们长夜的利乐。若我们……,是指若我们得到接受,将是长夜的利乐。世尊这样想,据说他在精勤修行时所用的钵,在善生女前来献乳粥时就消失了。因此他这样想:我没有钵,而过去诸佛也不以手受食,我该用什么来接受炒面和蜜团呢?巴利
Tena kho pana samayena tapussabhallikā vāṇijāti tapusso ca bhalliko cāti dve bhātaro vāṇijā. Ukkalāti ukkalajanapadato. Taṃ desanti yasmiṃ dese bhagavā viharati. Katarasmiñca dese bhagavā viharati? Majjhimadese. Tasmā majjhimadesaṃ gantuṃ addhānamaggappaṭipannā hontīti ayamettha attho. Ñātisālohitā devatāti tesaṃ ñātibhūtapubbā devatā. Etadavocāti sā kira nesaṃ sabbasakaṭāni appavattīni akāsi. Tato te kiṃ idanti maggadevatānaṃ baliṃ akaṃsu. Tesaṃ balikammakāle sā devatā dissamāneneva kāyena etaṃ avoca. Manthena ca madhupiṇḍikāya cāti abaddhasattunā ca sappimadhuphāṇitādīhi yojetvā baddhasattunā ca. Patimānethāti upaṭṭhahatha. Taṃ voti taṃ patimānanaṃ tumhākaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya. Yaṃ amhākanti yaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ amhākaṃ assa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya. Bhagavato etadahosīti yo kirassa padhānānuyogakāle patto ahosi, so sujātāya pāyāsaṃ dātuṃ āgacchantiyā eva antaradhāyi. Tenassa etadahosi – ‘‘patto me natthi, purimakāpi ca na kho tathāgatā hatthesu paṭiggaṇhanti, kimhi nu kho ahaṃ paṭiggaṇheyyaṃ manthañca madhupiṇḍakañcā’’ti.
世尊以自心了知这生起的念头:在这之前,世尊只是依靠善生所施食物的营养延续而住,那段时间里既没有饥饿,也没有口渴,身体也不虚弱。现在,因为想要接受食物,便以“诸如来确实不……”等语句生起了思惟。世尊以自心了知这如此生起的思惟。“四方的”指从四个方向。“石钵”指绿豆色石钵。世尊只接受了这一个,就是针对这个说的。然而,四大天王最初献上的是蓝宝石钵,世尊没有接受。接着,他们又献上绿豆色石钵,世尊接受了四个钵,为了护念他们的净信,并非因为大欲。接受之后,世尊又如此决意,使四个钵成为一个钵,四者的福果也变得完全相同。世尊如此作成一钵并决意后,接受了新净的绿豆色石钵中的炒面和蜜丸。“新净的”指新的、新鲜的;或者指当下生起的,这是其义。“他们以两语成为近事男”,指两语近事男。或者说以两语证得了近事男身份,这是其义。他们如此证得近事男身份后,对世尊说:“尊者,从今天起,我们应当对谁作礼敬、起迎?”于是世尊摩头,头发落在手中。世尊将它们交给他们:“你们供养这些。”他们得到发舍利后,如同以甘露灌顶,欢喜满足,礼敬世尊后离去。巴利
Parivitakkamaññāyāti ito pubbeva bhagavato sujātāya dinnabhojanaṃyeva ojānuppabandhanavasena aṭṭhāsi, ettakaṃ kālaṃ neva jighacchā na pipāsā na kāyadubbalyaṃ ahosi. Idāni panassa āhāraṃ paṭiggahetukāmatāya ‘‘na kho tathāgatā’’tiādinā nayena parivitakko udapādi . Taṃ evaṃ uppannaṃ attano cetasā bhagavato cetoparivitakkamaññāya. Catuddisāti catūhi disāhi. Selamaye patteti muggavaṇṇaselamaye patte. Idaṃyeva bhagavā paṭiggahesi, teyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Cattāro pana mahārājāno paṭhamaṃ indanīlamaṇimaye patte upanāmesuṃ, na te bhagavā aggahesi. Tato ime cattāropi muggavaṇṇasilāmaye patte upanāmesuṃ, bhagavā cattāropi patte aggahesi tesaṃ pasādānurakkhaṇatthāya, no mahicchatāya. Gahetvā ca pana cattāropi yathā ekova patto hoti tathā adhiṭṭhahi, catunnampi ekasadiso puññavipāko ahosi. Evaṃ ekaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhite paṭiggahesi bhagavā paccagghe selamaye patte manthañca madhupiṇḍikañca. Paccaggheti paccagghasmiṃ; pāṭekkaṃ mahagghasminti attho. Atha vā paccaggheti abhinave abbhuṇhe; taṅkhaṇe nibbattasminti attho. Dve vācā etesaṃ ahesunti dvevācikā. Atha vā dvīhi vācāhi upāsakabhāvaṃ pattāti attho . Te evaṃ upāsakabhāvaṃ paṭivedetvā bhagavantaṃ āhaṃsu – ‘‘kassa dāni bhante amhehi ajja paṭṭhāya abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaṃ kātabba’’nti? Atha bhagavā sīsaṃ parāmasi, kesā hatthe laggiṃsu. Te tesaṃ adāsi ‘‘ime tumhe pariharathā’’ti. Te kesadhātuyo labhitvā amateneva abhisittā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā pakkamiṃsu.
梵天劝请故事巴利
Brahmayācanakathā
7 七天过后,世尊从那个定中出来,完成了前面所说的所有事务,又从王树底下前往阿阇波罗榕树那里。他刚坐下,心里就生起了诸佛一向惯行的这个思惟。为什么这个思惟会在诸佛身上生起呢?因为要观察法的伟大、尊贵和重要,也因为梵天劝请之后想要说法。诸佛知道:“这样思惟的时候,梵天神会前来劝请说法,由此众生会对法生起尊重,因为世间以梵天神为尊。”就是由于这两个原因,这个思惟才生起。巴利
7. Atha kho bhagavā sattāhassa accayena tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā vuttappakārametaṃ sabbaṃ kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā rājāyatanamūlā punapi yena ajapālanigrodho tenupasaṅkami. Parivitakko udapādīti tasmiṃ nisinnamattasseva sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo ayaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi. Kasmā panāyaṃ sabbabuddhānaṃ uppajjatīti? Dhammassa mahantabhāvaṃ garubhāvaṃ bhāriyabhāvaṃ paccavekkhaṇāya brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāya ca. Jānanti hi buddhā ‘‘evaṃ parivitakkite brahmā āgantvā dhammadesanaṃ yācissati, tato sattā dhamme gāravaṃ uppādessanti, brahmagaruko hi lokasannivāso’’ti. Iti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi ayaṃ vitakko uppajjatīti.
在这里,“已证得”确实就是“我已证得这个”。“执着所依”是说众生黏着于五种欲乐,所以它们被称为“所依”。他们以那些所依为乐,所以叫“所依乐者”;他们喜爱所依,所以叫“所依爱者”;他们对所依极其欢喜,所以叫“所依极喜者”。“此即”是一个虚词。要结合它的位置来理解:针对缘起说“这就是那”,意思是“这就是这个”。“此缘性和缘起”是说:这些缘就是“此缘”,此缘本身就是“此缘性”,而此缘性就是缘起,所以叫“此缘性和缘起”。“那会成为我的疲劳”是说:为那些不了解的人开示,那就会成为我的疲劳,会成为我的困扰,这就是它的意思。“世尊”指佛陀。“随顺于稀有”就是随顺于稀有。“显现”是说它们成为所谓辩才之智的所行境,达到了可以被思惟的状态。巴利
Tattha adhigato kho myāyanti adhigato kho me ayaṃ. Ālayarāmāti sattā pañca kāmaguṇe allīyanti, tasmā te ‘‘ālayā’’ti vuccanti. Tehi ālayehi ramantīti ālayarāmā. Ālayesu ratāti ālayaratā. Ālayesu suṭṭhumuditāti ālayasammuditā. Yadidanti nipāto. Tassa ṭhānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yaṃ ida’’nti paṭiccasamuppādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo aya’’nti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādoti imesaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayāva idappaccayatā, idappaccayatā ca sā paṭiccasamuppādo cāti idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo. So mamassa kilamathoti yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assa; sā mama vihesā assāti attho. Bhagavantanti bhagavato. Anacchariyāti anu acchariyā. Paṭibhaṃsūti paṭibhānasaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa gocarā ahesuṃ, parivitakkayitabbabhāvaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.
这里“哈拉”中的“哈”只是一个语气词;“阿拉”才是意思。“已开示”就是已教导。“如今我已不必再教导这辛辛苦苦证得的法了”,这就是这句话的意思。“逆流而行”中,逆流指的是涅槃;意思是走向涅槃。“被贪染者”指被欲贪、有贪、见贪所染污。“将不见”指将看不到。“被黑暗蕴覆盖”指被无明之聚淹没。“由于少事务”指因为没有事务的状态,意思是我不想教导。巴利
Halanti ettha hakāro nipātamatto; alanti attho. Pakāsitunti desituṃ. Alaṃ dāni me imaṃ kicchena adhigataṃ dhammaṃ desetunti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭisotagāminti paṭisotaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ; nibbānagāminti attho. Rāgarattāti kāmarāgabhavarāgadiṭṭhirāgena rattā. Na dakkhantīti na passissanti. Tamokhandhena āvuṭāti avijjārāsinā ajjhotthaṭā. Appossukkatāyāti nirussukkabhāvena; adesetukāmatāyāti attho.
8 “确实在何处”是指在哪个世间。“出现在世尊面前”:为了请求说法,他带领一万个世界中的大梵天王们前来,出现在世尊面前。“少尘垢性者”是指在慧眼中,他们的贪嗔痴尘垢极少,具有这样的性质,所以叫少尘垢性者。“将成为法的证悟者”是指将成为通达证悟的人。巴利
8.Yatra hi nāmāti yasmiṃ nāma loke. Bhagavato purato pāturahosīti dhammadesanāyācanatthaṃ dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu mahābrahmāno gahetvā āgamma bhagavato purato pāturahosi . Apparajakkhajātikāti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ rāgadosamoharajaṃ etesaṃ evaṃsabhāvāti apparajakkhajātikā. Bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāroti paṭivijjhitāro.
“出现”就是显现出来。“被有垢者所思惟”:是被贪等垢秽的六师外道所思惟。“请打开”:请把这道门打开。“不死之门”:就是作为不死——也就是涅槃——之门的圣道。“愿他们听闻由无垢者所觉证之法”:愿这些众生听闻由无垢的正自觉者所觉证的四圣谛法——那位正自觉者因为远离了贪等垢秽,所以是无垢的。巴利
Pāturahosīti pātubhavi. Samalehi cintitoti rāgādīhi malehi samalehi chahi satthārehi cintito. Apāpuretanti vivara etaṃ. Amatassa dvāranti amatassa nibbānassa dvārabhūtaṃ ariyamaggaṃ. Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddhanti ime sattā rāgādimalānaṃ abhāvato vimalena sammāsambuddhena anubuddhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ suṇantu.
就像一个人站在整块岩石形成的山顶上,用眼睛环顾四周,能看到周围的人群;善慧者,你也是这样——你以一切知智为遍眼,世尊,请登上法所成、慧所成的殿堂,你自己已经脱离了忧苦,请观察并留意那些沉溺于忧苦、被生和老所制伏的众生。巴利
Sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhitoti selamaye ekagghane pabbatamuddhani yathāṭhitova yathā cakkhumā puriso samantato janataṃ passeyya, tvampi sumedha sundarapañña sabbaññutaññāṇena samantacakkhu bhagavā dhammamayaṃ paññāmayaṃ pāsādamāruyha sayaṃ apetasoko sokāvatiṇṇaṃ jātijarābhibhūtañca janataṃ avekkhassu upadhāraya.
“起来!”这是恳请世尊为了说法而四处游行时说的话。在“勇士”等词中,世尊因为具足精进,所以是勇士;因为战胜了天子魔、死魔、烦恼魔、行蕴魔,所以是战胜者;因为有能力度越生等轮回旷野,所以是商队领袖;因为没有欲贪之债,所以是无债者。巴利
Uṭṭhehīti bhagavato dhammadesanatthaṃ cārikacaraṇaṃ yācanto bhaṇati. Vīrātiādīsu bhagavā vīriyavantatāya vīro. Devaputtamaccukilesābhisaṅkhāramārānaṃ vijitattā vijitasaṅgāmo. Jātikantārādinittharaṇasamatthatāya satthavāho. Kāmacchandaiṇassa abhāvato aṇaṇo.
9 “请求”就是恳求。“以佛眼”:是用根上下智和随眠智来看。这两种智合起来就叫佛眼。“少尘垢者”:是指在慧眼里,贪等尘垢很少的那些众生,就是少尘垢者;尘垢很多的,就是大尘垢者。信等诸根锐利的,是利根者;诸根柔弱的,是钝根者。信等这些表现形态美好的,是善行相者;这些表现形态不美好的,是恶行相者。能领会所说之理、容易教导的,是易教导者。把来世和过失看作可怕之事的,是见他世过患怖畏者。“在莲花池中”:就是在莲花林里。其余几句也是同样的道理。“内沉而生长者”:是指沉在水里生长的;“与水齐平而住者”:是和水面齐平而住的;“超出水面而住者”:是超出水面而住的。巴利
9.Ajjhesananti yācanaṃ. Buddhacakkhunāti indriyaparopariyattañāṇena ca āsayānusayañāṇena ca. Imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ buddhacakkhūti nāmaṃ. Apparajakkhāti paññācakkhumhi rāgādirajaṃ appaṃ yesaṃ, te apparajakkhā. Yesaṃ taṃ mahantaṃ te mahārajakkhā. Yesaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni tikkhāni te tikkhindriyā. Yesaṃ tāni mudūni te mudindriyā. Yesaṃ teyeva saddhādayo ākārā sundarā te svākārā. Yesaṃ teyeva saddhādayo ākārā asundarā te dvākārā. Ye kathitakāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti, sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ te suviññāpayā. Ye paralokañca vajjañca bhayato passanti te paralokavajjabhayadassāvino. Uppaliniyanti uppalavane. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Antonimuggaposīnīti yāni udakassa anto nimuggāneva posayanti. Samodakaṃ ṭhitānīti udakena samaṃ ṭhitāni. Udakaṃ accuggamma ṭhitānīti udakaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitāni.
已打开就是已开启。不死之门指的是圣道。因为它就是被称为不死的涅槃之门。让他们释放信心意思是让所有人都释放自己的信心。最后两句的意思是:这无上殊胜之法,我自己本已精通熟练、能够善巧流畅地宣说;但我因为觉得会使身体和言语疲劳,所以没有向人们、天神以及人宣说。巴利
Apārutāti vivaṭā. Amatassa dvārāti ariyamaggo. So hi amatasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa dvāraṃ. Pamuñcantu saddhanti sabbe attano saddhaṃ pamuñcantu. Pacchimapadadvaye ayamattho , ahañhi attano paguṇaṃ suppavattimpi imaṃ paṇītaṃ uttamaṃ dhammaṃ kāyavācākilamathasaññī hutvā manujesu devamanussesu na bhāsinti.
10 “智者”是指具备智慧的人。“聪敏者”是指具备聪慧才能的人。“慧者”是指具备处非处智慧的人。“少尘垢性者”是指因为禅定的镇伏而成为没有烦恼、清净的众生。“将会了知”是指将会观察、将会证悟。“世尊也生起了智”,是指一切知智生起,他了知:“此人在第七天时命终,投生到无所有处。”“大损失者”是指有大损失,因为本应在七天内证得的道果已经失去,他投生到了非时之处。“多所助益者”是指多所帮助者。“昨晚命终”是指在昨天命终,他也生于非想非非想处,世尊已看见了。“侍奉精勤策励者”是指以奉送洗面水等承事精勤策励者。巴利
10.Paṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato. Byattoti veyyattiyena samannāgato. Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattiyā paññāya samannāgato. Apparajakkhajātikoti samāpattiyā vikkhambhitattā nikkilesajātiko visuddhasatto. Ājānissatīti sallakkhessati paṭivijjhissati. Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uppajji ‘‘ito sattamadivasamatthake kālaṃkatvā ākiñcaññāyatane nibbatto’’ti. Mahājāniyoti sattadivasabbhantare pattabbamaggaphalato parihīnattā mahatī jāni assāti mahājāniyo akkhaṇe nibbattattā. Abhidosakālaṃkatoti hiyyo kālaṃkato, sopi nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nibbattoti addasa. Bahūkārāti bahūpakārā. Padhānapahitattaṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsūti padhānatthāya pesitattabhāvaṃ mukhodakadānādinā upaṭṭhahiṃsu.
11 伍巴咖在菩提座和伽耶之间的地方见到了世尊。“已踏上长途道路”,意思是已经走上了长途旅程。巴利
11.Antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhinti upako bodhimaṇḍassa ca gayāya ca antare bhagavantaṃ addasa. Addhānamaggappaṭipannanti addhānamaggaṃ paṭipannaṃ.
征服了一切,就是征服了一切三界之法而安住。遍知一切,就是了知、通达了一切四界之法。在一切法中无染,就是在一切三界之法中,不被烦恼的污垢所染。舍弃一切,就是舍弃了一切三界之法而安住。在渴爱灭尽中解脱,就是在渴爱灭尽的涅槃中,以涅槃为所缘而解脱。自己证知,就是由自己了知一切四界之法。还能指认谁,就是还能指认别的什么人,说“这是我的老师”呢?巴利
Sabbābhibhūti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Sabbavidūti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ avediṃ aññāsiṃ. Sabbesu dhammesu anūpalittoti sabbesu tebhūmakadhammesu kilesalepena alitto. Sabbañjahoti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ jahitvā ṭhito. Taṇhakkhaye vimuttoti taṇhakkhaye nibbāne ārammaṇato vimutto. Sayaṃ abhiññāyāti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ attanāva jānitvā. Kamuddiseyyanti kaṃ aññaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me ācariyo’’ti uddiseyyaṃ.
“我没有老师”,意思是:在出世间法上,我并没有一个叫“老师”的人。“没有和我同等的人”,意思是:没有能和我相比的人。“成为清凉”,意思是:通过熄灭一切烦恼之火,而成为清凉。“寂灭”,意思是:因为烦恼本身已经止息。巴利
Na me ācariyo atthīti lokuttaradhamme mayhaṃ ācariyo nāma natthi. Natthi me paṭipuggaloti mayhaṃ paṭibhāgapuggalo nāma natthi. Sītibhūtoti sabbakilesagginibbāpanena sītibhūto. Kilesānaṃyeva nibbutattā nibbuto.
迦尸人的城,就是迦尸国的都城。我将敲响不死之鼓,意思是:为了获得法轮,我要敲响不死的大鼓。巴利
Kāsīnaṃpuranti kāsiraṭṭhe nagaraṃ. Āhañchaṃ amatadundubhinti dhammacakkappaṭilābhāya amatabheriṃ paharissāmīti gacchāmi.
你堪能成为无边胜者,也就是说,你适合成为无边胜者。“贤友,或许也会这样吧”,意思是:贤友,也会这样吧。“摇动头”,意思是:摇动头。巴利
Arahasi anantajinoti anantajino bhavituṃ yutto. Hupeyyapāvusoti āvuso evampi nāma bhaveyya. Sīsaṃ okampetvāti sīsaṃ cāletvā.
12 他们商量好了,达成了一致。“多事者”是指为了衣服等种种事务而去做的人。“偏离精勤者”是指从精勤中偏离、堕落、退失的人。“转向多事”是指为了衣服等事务繁多的状态而转过去。“比丘们,倾耳谛听”就是“比丘们,把耳朵凑过来”;意思是,为了听法,让耳根朝向法。“已证得不死”是在显示“我已证得不死,也就是涅槃”。“以威仪”是指以难行的威仪。“以行道”是指以难行的行道。“你们了知我吗”就是你们了知我吗?你们观察我吗?“如此之语已说”意思是,这样的话已经说了。“世尊不能使五群比丘了知”是指世尊不能使他们了知“我是佛陀”。巴利
12.Saṇṭhapesunti katikaṃ akaṃsu. Bāhullikoti cīvarabāhullādīnaṃ atthāya paṭipanno. Padhānavibbhantoti padhānato vibbhanto bhaṭṭho parihīno. Āvatto bāhullāyāti cīvarādibahulabhāvatthāya āvatto. Odahatha bhikkhave sotanti upanetha bhikkhave sotaṃ; sotindriyaṃ dhammasavanatthaṃ abhimukhaṃ karothāti attho. Amatamadhigatanti amataṃ nibbānaṃ mayā adhigatanti dasseti. Iriyāyāti dukkarairiyāya. Paṭipadāyāti dukkarapaṭipadāya. Abhijānātha me noti abhijānātha nu me samanupassatha. Evarūpaṃ bhāsitametanti etaṃ evarūpaṃ vākyaṃ bhāsitanti attho. Asakkhi kho bhagavā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetunti ‘‘ahaṃ buddho’’ti jānāpetuṃ asakkhi.
13 “作眼者”这句话,是就智慧之眼而说的。从这里往后,从词义上看都很浅显易懂。不过,若按意图、前后关联、衔接等分类来说,则应依照《破除迷执》中部注释中所讲的方式来理解。因为从这里开始,为了顾念那些害怕过于繁琐的大众之心,我们不再讲解经藏,而只讲解律藏。巴利
13.Cakkhukaraṇīti paññācakkhuṃ sandhāyāha. Ito paraṃ sabbaṃ padatthato uttānameva. Adhippāyānusandhiyojanādibhedato pana papañcasūdaniyā majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya hi ativitthārabhīrukassa mahājanassa cittaṃ anurakkhantā suttantakathaṃ avaṇṇayitvā vinayakathaṃyeva vaṇṇayissāma.
18 正是那位尊者受达上的情形是这样的:在阿沙荼月满月那天,那位尊者与十八俱胝天众一起安立于入流果,凭借世尊说“来吧,比丘”这句话,那位尊者当下成就了善来比丘达上。巴利
18.Sāva tassa āyasmato upasampadā ahosīti āsāḷhīpuṇṇamāya aṭṭhārasahi devatākoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitassa ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti bhagavato vacanena abhinipphannā sāva tassa āyasmato ehibhikkhūpasampadā ahosi.
19 那时,尊者瓦帕长老在半月第一日生起法眼,跋迪亚长老在第二日,玛哈那玛长老在第三日,阿萨吉长老在第四日。而为了净化这些比丘在业处中生起的垢秽,世尊就留在精舍内。每当业处垢秽生起,世尊就从空中前往,为他们去除垢秽。到了半个月的第五日,他把他们全部召集在一起,用《无我经》加以教诫。因此才说“那时,世尊对五群比丘”等语。巴利
19.Atha kho āyasmato ca vappassāti ādimhi vappattherassa pāṭipadadivase dhammacakkhuṃ udapādi, bhaddiyattherassa dutiyadivase, mahānāmattherassa tatiyadivase, assajittherassa catutthiyanti. Imesañca pana bhikkhūnaṃ kammaṭṭhānesu uppannamalavisodhanatthaṃ bhagavā antovihāreyeva ahosi. Uppanne uppanne kammaṭṭhānamale ākāsena gantvā malaṃ vinodesi. Pakkhassa pana pañcamiyaṃ sabbe te ekato sannipātetvā anattasuttena ovadi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā pañcavaggiye’’tiādi.
24 那时,世间有六位阿拉汉。这句话的意思是:在半个月的第五天,世间有六个人成了阿拉汉。巴利
24.Tenakho pana samayena cha loke arahanto hontīti pañcamiyā pakkhassa lokasmiṃ cha manussā arahanto hontīti attho.
31 31. “前前相续”是指依照传承一代代延续下来的意思。“那时,世间有六十一位阿拉汉”:意思是先前那六位加上这五十五位,也就是在雨安居期间,人间共有六十一位人成为阿拉汉。巴利
31.Pubbānupubbakānanti paveṇivasena porāṇānuporāṇānanti attho. Tena kho pana samayena ekasaṭṭhi loke arahanto hontīti purimā cha ime ca pañcapaññāsāti antovassamhiyeva ekasaṭṭhi manussā arahanto hontīti attho.
在这件事上,亚萨等善男子过去的宿世因缘是这样的:据说在过去,有五十五个人是朋友,他们结伴行善,到处照料那些无人收殓的尸体。有一天,他们看见一个孕妇死了,就说:“我们来把她火化吧。”于是把尸体抬到了坟场。他们留下五个人在坟场,说:“你们来火化。”其余的人就回村里去了。亚萨这个年轻人刺穿并翻动那具尸体,在火化时生起了不净想。他又指给另外四个人看:“诸位请看,这不净、可厌。”那四个人在那里也生起了不净想。这五个人回到村里后,告诉了其余的朋友。亚萨这个年轻人也回到家里,告诉了父母和妻子。他们全都修习不净想。这就是他们过去的宿世因缘。因此,亚萨尊者在优伶伎乐者当中,生起的正是坟场想;也正是凭借这个宿世因缘的具足,所有人都获得了殊胜的证悟。巴利
Tatra yasaādīnaṃ kulaputtānaṃ ayaṃ pubbayogo – atīte kira pañcapaññāsajanā sahāyakā vaggabandhena puññāni karontā anāthasarīrāni paṭijaggantā vicaranti, te ekadivasaṃ gabbhiniṃ itthiṃ kālaṃkataṃ disvā ‘‘jhāpessāmā’’ti susānaṃ nīhariṃsu. Tesu pañca jane ‘‘tumhe jhāpethā’’ti susāne ṭhapetvā sesā gāmaṃ paviṭṭhā. Yaso dārako taṃ sarīraṃ vijjhitvā parivattetvā ca jhāpayamāno asubhasaññaṃ paṭilabhi. So itaresampi catunnaṃ janānaṃ ‘‘passatha bho imaṃ asuciṃ paṭikūla’’nti dassesi. Tepi tattha asubhasaññaṃ paṭilabhiṃsu. Te pañcapi janā gāmaṃ gantvā sesasahāyakānaṃ kathayiṃsu. Yaso pana dārako gehampi gantvā mātāpitūnnañca bhariyāya ca kathesi. Te sabbepi asubhaṃ bhāvayiṃsu. Ayametesaṃ pubbayogo. Tenāyasmato yasassa nāṭakajanesu susānasaññāyeva uppajji, tāyeva ca upanissayasampattiyā sabbesaṃ visesādhigamo nibbattīti.
当时,世尊对比丘们说。世尊在波罗奈一直住到最后一个迦提月满月日,有一天,他向那六十位漏尽比丘说话。巴利
Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesīti bhagavā yāva pacchimakattikapuṇṇamā, tāva bārāṇasiyaṃ viharanto ekadivasaṃ te khīṇāsave saṭṭhi bhikkhū āmantesi.
32 天界所缘中的贪欲罗网,名为“天”。人界所缘中的贪欲罗网,名为“人”。不要两个人走同一条路。由于不听闻,就是由于不听闻。他们退堕,是指未能证得尚未证得的,因此从殊胜的证悟中退堕。巴利
32.Dibbā nāma dibbesu visayesu lobhapāsā. Mānusā nāma mānusakesu visayesu lobhapāsā. Mā ekena dveti ekena maggena dve mā agamittha. Assavanatāti assavanatāya. Parihāyantīti anadhigataṃ nādhigacchantā visesādhigamato parihāyanti.
33 “死魔”是指低劣、下劣的有情。“行于空中者”是就贪欲的罗网而说的。因为他把那贪欲的罗网当成了“行于空中者”,才这样说。巴利
33.Antakāti lāmaka hīnasatta. Antalikkhacaroti rāgapāsaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi so ‘‘antalikkhacaro’’ti mantvā āha.
34 “不同方向、不同国土”:就是从不同方向和不同国土。佛陀说:“比丘们,我现在允许你们到各个方向、各个国土去度人出家。”等等。当一位想出家的人来求出家时,要把后面那些被禁止出家的人排除掉,比如“比丘们,被五种病所缠的人不能度他出家”,一直到“盲人、哑巴、聋人不能度他出家”——这些被禁止的人要排除,然后才能度那些没有出家过失的人出家。而且他还必须得到父母的同意。关于“同意”的具体标准,我们会在“比丘们,没有得到父母同意的儿子不能度他出家;谁度了,就犯恶作罪”这部经里再详细说明。巴利
34.Nānādisā nānājanapadāti nānādisato ca nānājanapadato ca. Anujānāmi bhikkhave tumheva dāni tāsu tāsu disāsu tesu tesu janapadesupabbājethātiādimhi pabbajjāpekkhaṃ kulaputtaṃ pabbājentena ye parato ‘‘na bhikkhave pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭho pabbājetabbo’’tiādiṃ katvā yāva ‘‘na andhamūgabadhiro pabbājetabbo’’ti evaṃ paṭikkhittā puggalā, te vajjetvā pabbajjādosavirahito puggalo pabbājetabbo. Sopi ca mātāpitūhi anuññātoyeva. Tassa anujānanalakkhaṇaṃ ‘‘na bhikkhave ananuññāto mātāpitūhi putto pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti etasmiṃ sutte vaṇṇayissāma.
像这样,在度人出家时,如果对方已经远离出家的过失、也获得了父母的允许,但他还没有剃发,而且同一界内还有其他比丘,那就必须为剃发这件事向僧团请示。请示的方式,我们会在“诸比丘,我允许为剃发之事告知僧团”这一段里说明。如果有空,就应该亲自为他剃度。如果因为诵经、问答等事务忙不过来,没有空,就可以叫一位年轻比丘:“你来给这个人剃度。”即使没有被吩咐,年轻比丘出于对戒师的尊敬而为他剃度,也是可以的。如果没有年轻比丘,也可以吩咐沙弥:“把这个人带到小界场,为他剃度,披上袈裟后再回来。”不过,三皈依必须由他自己宣说。这样,这个人就算是由比丘亲自度化出家了。因为男子只能由比丘来度化出家,其他人不行;女子只能由比丘尼来度化出家,其他人不行。但沙弥或沙弥尼可以受命授予袈裟。至于剃除须发,无论由谁来剃,都算如法。巴利
Evaṃ pabbajjādosavirahitaṃ mātāpitūhi anuññātaṃ pabbājentenāpi ca sace acchinnakeso hoti, ekasīmāya ca aññepi bhikkhū atthi, kesacchedanatthāya bhaṇḍukammaṃ āpucchitabbaṃ. Tassa āpucchanākāraṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, saṅghaṃ apaloketuṃ bhaṇḍukammāyā’’ti ettha vaṇṇayissāma. Sace okāso hoti, sayaṃ pabbājetabbo. Sace uddesaparipucchādīhi byāvaṭo hoti, okāsaṃ na labhati, eko daharabhikkhu vattabbo ‘‘etaṃ pabbājehī’’ti. Avuttopi ce daharabhikkhu upajjhāyaṃ uddissa pabbājeti, vaṭṭati. Sace daharabhikkhu natthi, sāmaṇeropi vattabbo ‘‘etaṃ khaṇḍasīmaṃ netvā pabbājetvā kāsāyāni acchādetvā ehī’’ti. Saraṇāni pana sayaṃ dātabbāni. Evaṃ bhikkhunāva pabbajito hoti. Purisañhi bhikkhuto añño pabbājetuṃ na labhati, mātugāmaṃ bhikkhunito añño. Sāmaṇero pana sāmaṇerī vā āṇattiyā kāsāyāni dātuṃ labhati. Kesoropanaṃ yena kenaci kataṃ sukataṃ.
如果那人是个相貌端正、有善根、出身有名望的良家子,就算自己正忙着,也应该亲自为他剃度。但不能只打发他说“拿一捧泥去洗个澡,把头发弄湿了再回来”。因为想出家的人一开始往往劲头很足,后来一看到袈裟和剃刀就害怕了,甚至就这样跑掉。所以应该亲自带他到洗澡的地方,如果他年纪不太小,就对他说“去洗吧”。头发要让他自己拿泥搓洗。如果是年幼的男孩,就让他自己下水,用牛粪和泥给他擦洗沐浴。如果他身上有疥疮或疖子,也要像母亲不嫌弃自己的孩子那样,毫不厌恶地仔细给他擦洗手、脚和头。为什么要这样?因为凭着这份照顾,良家子会对师父、戒师和教法生起深厚的感情和极大的恭敬,成为不退转的人,能消除生起的不乐,最终达到上座长老的地位,成为知恩报恩的人。巴利
Sace pana bhabbarūpo hoti sahetuko ñāto yasassī kulaputto, okāsaṃ katvāpi sayameva pabbājetabbo. ‘‘Mattikāmuṭṭhiṃ gahetvā nhāyitvā kese temetvā āgacchāhī’’ti ca pana na vissajjetabbo. Pabbajitukāmānañhi paṭhamaṃ balavaussāho hoti, pacchā pana kāsāyāni ca kesaharaṇasatthakañca disvā utrasanti, ettoyeva palāyanti, tasmā sayameva nahānatitthaṃ netvā sace nātidaharo hoti, ‘‘nahāhī’’ti vattabbo. Kesā panassa sayameva mattikaṃ gahetvā dhovitabbā. Daharakumārako pana sayaṃ udakaṃ otaritvā gomayamattikāhi ghaṃsitvā nahāpetabbo. Sacepissa kacchu vā piḷakā vā honti, yathā mātā puttaṃ na jigucchati , evameva ajigucchantena sādhukaṃ hatthapādasīsāni ghaṃsitvā nahāpetabbo. Kasmā? Ettakena hi upakārena kulaputtā ācariyupajjhāyesu ca sāsane ca balavasinehā tibbagāravā anivattidhammā honti, uppannaṃ anabhiratiṃ vinodetvā therabhāvaṃ pāpuṇanti, kataññū katavedino honti.
为他沐浴或剃除须发时,不该对他说:“你出身名门、有声望,以后我们就靠你,不会缺衣少食了。”也不该说其他对解脱没有帮助的话。而应该对他说:“贤友,好好留心,把正念提起来。”然后给他讲“皮等五法”的业处。讲的时候,要从颜色、形状、气味、住处、方位这些方面,把身体不净、可厌、令人反感的性质,或者没有生命、没有众生的真相说清楚。如果他过去已经修过行、积累了修行功夫,那就像熟透的脓包只等一刺就破,又像成熟的莲花只等太阳升起就绽放——业处作意才刚上手,他的智慧就会像雷霆劈碎山岩一样,摧毁烦恼之山,就在剃刀底下证得阿拉汉果。凡是能在剃刀底下证得阿拉汉果的人,全都是听到了这样的说法,依靠善知识导师所传授的方法而成就的,绝不是没有依靠。所以,从一开始就该对他说这样的话。巴利
Evaṃ nahāpanakāle pana kesamassuṃ oropanakāle vā ‘‘tvaṃ ñāto yasassī, idāni mayaṃ taṃ nissāya paccayehi na kilamissāmā’’ti na vattabbo, aññāpi aniyyānikakathā na kathetabbā. Atha khvassa ‘‘āvuso, suṭṭhu upadhārehi satiṃ upaṭṭhāpehī’’ti vatvā tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ, ācikkhantena ca vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena asucijegucchapaṭikūlabhāvaṃ nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ vā pākaṭaṃ karontena ācikkhitabbaṃ. Sace hi so pubbe madditasaṅkhāro hoti bhāvitabhāvano, kaṇṭakavedhāpekkho viya paripakkagaṇḍo, sūriyuggamanāpekkhaṃ viya ca pariṇatapadumaṃ, athassa āraddhamatte kammaṭṭhānamanasikāre indāsani viya pabbate kilesapabbate cuṇṇayamānaṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pavattati, khuraggeyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ye hi keci khuragge arahattaṃ pattā, sabbe te evarūpaṃ savanaṃ labhitvā kalyāṇamittena ācariyena dinnanayaṃ nissāya no anissāya. Tasmāssa āditova evarūpī kathā kathetabbāti.
把头发剃掉之后,要用姜黄粉或香粉涂抹他的头和身体,去掉在家人身上的气味,然后让他接受袈裟——可以分三次、两次或一次给他。这时候,即使导师或戒师不把袈裟递到他手上,而是亲自给他披上,也是可以的。如果导师吩咐别的年轻比丘、沙弥或居士说:“贤友,拿这些袈裟去给他披上。”或者直接吩咐他说:“拿这些袈裟穿上。”这些都可以。这些都算是由那位比丘(亲自)给的。巴利
Kesesu pana oropitesu haliddicuṇṇena vā gandhacuṇṇena vā sīsañca sarīrañca ubbaṭṭetvā gihigandhaṃ apanetvā kāsāyāni tikkhattuṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā sakiṃ vā paṭiggāhetabbo. Athāpissa hatthe adatvā ācariyo vā upajjhāyo vā sayameva acchādeti, vaṭṭati. Sacepi aññaṃ daharaṃ vā sāmaṇeraṃ vā upāsakaṃ vā āṇāpeti ‘‘āvuso, etāni kāsāyāni gahetvā etaṃ acchādehī’’ti taṃyeva vā āṇāpeti ‘‘etāni gahetvā acchādehī’’ti sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. Sabbaṃ tena bhikkhunāva dinnaṃ hoti.
如果他在没有被吩咐的情况下,自己穿上或披上下裙、上衣,那就应当先脱下来,再重新授予。因为只有比丘亲手给予,或者通过吩咐而给予的袈裟,才如法;没有给予的,就不如法。即使那本来就是属于他自己的东西,也一样;更何况是依止戒师身边的资具,更不用说了!这就是对“先剃除须发,让他穿上袈裟衣,再让他偏袒上衣”这一句的判断。巴利
Yaṃ pana nivāsanaṃ vā pārupanaṃ vā anāṇattiyā nivāseti vā pārupati vā, taṃ apanetvā puna dātabbaṃ. Bhikkhunā hi sahatthena vā āṇattiyā vā dinnameva kāsāvaṃ vaṭṭati, adinnaṃ na vaṭṭati, sacepi tasseva santakaṃ hoti, ko pana vādo upajjhāyamūlake! Ayaṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādāpetvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ kārāpetvā’’ti ettha vinicchayo.
让他顶礼比丘们的脚,意思是:让他顶礼那些当时聚集在那里的比丘们的脚。然后,为了让他受持三皈依,让他蹲坐、合掌,应当对他说:“请这样说。”应当告诉他:“我念什么,你就跟着念。”接着,由他的戒师或导师,按照“我皈依佛”等顺序,依次而非颠倒地为他授三皈依。如果颠倒顺序,哪怕只是一个词、一个音节,或者先把“皈依佛”念三遍,然后再把其余每一项各念三遍,那么所受的三皈依都不成立。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃpāde vandāpetvāti ye tattha sannipatitā bhikkhū, tesaṃ pāde vandāpetvā; atha saraṇaggahaṇatthaṃ ukkuṭikaṃ nisīdāpetvā añjaliṃ paggaṇhāpetvā evaṃ vadehīti vattabbo. ‘‘Yamahaṃ vadāmi, taṃ vadehī’’ti vattabbo. Athassa upajjhāyena vā ācariyena vā ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’tiādinā nayena saraṇāni dātabbāni yathāvuttapaṭipāṭiyāva na uppaṭipāṭiyā. Sace hi ekapadampi ekakkharampi uppaṭipāṭiyā deti, buddhaṃ saraṇaṃyeva vā tikkhattuṃ datvā puna itaresu ekekaṃ tikkhattuṃ deti, adinnāni honti saraṇāni.
不过,如果抛开这种通过皈依受达上的方式,那么后来开许的达上,只要单方面清净就可以成立。但沙弥出家必须双方都清净才能成立,单方面清净不行。所以,受达上时,如果导师避免了白文和甘马语的过失来作甘马,甘马就算合格。而出家时,这三皈依必须由导师和弟子双方诵出,不能缺少“布”“达”等字母的发音部位和发音方法。如果导师能诵而弟子不能,或弟子能诵而导师不能,或双方都不能,就不成立。如果双方都能诵,就成立。巴利
Imañca pana saraṇagamanūpasampadaṃ paṭikkhipitvā anuññātaupasampadā ekato suddhiyā vaṭṭati. Sāmaṇerapabbajjā pana ubhatosuddhiyāva vaṭṭati, no ekato suddhiyā. Tasmā upasampadāya sace ācariyo ñattidosañceva kammavācādosañca vajjetvā kammaṃ karoti, sukataṃ hoti. Pabbajjāya pana imāni tīṇi saraṇāni bukāradhakārādīnaṃ byañjanānaṃ ṭhānakaraṇasampadaṃ ahāpenteneva ācariyenapi antevāsikenapi vattabbāni. Sace ācariyo vattuṃ sakkoti, antevāsiko na sakkoti; antevāsiko vā sakkoti, ācariyo na sakkoti; ubhopi vā na sakkonti, na vaṭṭati. Sace pana ubhopi sakkonti, vaṭṭati.
另外,授予这些皈依时,可以这样连起来念,比如“buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī”,让它们连成一个语流,并以鼻音结尾;也可以这样断开念,比如“buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī”,让它们各自以“ṃ”音结尾。在《暗夜注》里,先报出名字,然后说“尊者,我是佛护,尽形寿皈依佛”,但这样的说法在任何一部注释书里都没有,巴利圣典里也没有说过,那只是他们自己的喜好,所以不应采纳。因为即使不那样说,皈依也不会失效。巴利
Imāni ca pana dadamānena ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti evaṃ ekasambandhāni anunāsikantāni vā katvā dātabbāni, ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti evaṃ vicchinditvā makārantāni vā katvā dātabbāni. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ nāmaṃ sāvetvā ‘‘ahaṃ bhante buddharakkhito yāvajīvaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ekaaṭṭhakathāyampi natthi, pāḷiyampi na vuttaṃ, tesaṃ rucimattameva, tasmā na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi tathā avadantassa saraṇaṃ kuppatīti.
比丘们,我允许用这三皈依来出家并受达上。意思是说:我允许通过这三遍由双方清净诵出的“我皈依佛”等三皈依,来出家并受达上。其中,因为达上在后面被禁止了,所以现在单靠皈依不能成就达上。但出家在后面已经被允许了,也就是“比丘们,我允许用这三皈依来作沙弥出家”,所以现在单靠皈依仍然可以成就出家。到这一步,他就已经立足于沙弥的阶段了。巴利
Anujānāmi bhikkhaveimehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjaṃ upasampadanti imehi buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmītiādīhi evaṃ tikkhattuṃ ubhatosuddhiyā vuttehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjañceva upasampadañca anujānāmīti attho. Tattha yasmā upasampadā parato paṭikkhittā, tasmā sā etarahi saraṇamatteneva na ruhati. Pabbajjā pana yasmā parato ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi sāmaṇerapabbajja’’nti anuññātā eva, tasmā sā etarahipi saraṇamatteneva ruhati. Ettāvatā hi sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhito hoti.
如果这个人有智慧,属于聪明人的类型,那就应该当场为他诵出学处。怎么诵呢?按照世尊所诵出的方式。因为确实有这样的说法:巴利
Sace panesa matimā hoti paṇḍitajātiko, athassa tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne sikkhāpadāni uddisitabbāni. Kathaṃ? Yathā bhagavatā uddiṭṭhāni. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,我允许沙弥受持十条学处,沙弥们应当在这些学处上修学:远离杀生,远离不与取,远离非梵行,远离妄语,远离饮酒放逸之因,远离非时食,远离观看舞蹈、歌唱、音乐、表演等娱乐,远离佩戴花鬘、涂香、装饰、打扮之因,远离高广大床,远离接受金银。巴利
‘‘Anujānāmi , bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadāni, tesu ca sāmaṇerehi sikkhituṃ. Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, abrahmacariyā veramaṇī, musāvādā veramaṇī, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇī, vikālabhojanā veramaṇī, naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā veramaṇī, mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā veramaṇī, uccāsayanamahāsayanā veramaṇī, jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā veramaṇī’’ti (mahāva. 106).
不过在《暗夜注疏》里说:“尊者,我某某名,尽形寿受持远离杀生的学处。巴利
Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, itthannāmo yāvajīvaṃ pāṇātipātā veramaṇisikkhāpadaṃ
“我受持”——如此,犹如授予皈依一般,也说了授予学处,但这话在巴利圣典中没有,在注疏中也没有,因此应当完全按照巴利圣典来诵。因为出家仅以皈依便已成立,而学处只是为了圆满修学才需要了知。因此,对那些无法按圣典中来的方式记住这些学处的人,用任何语言从意思上为他讲说,也是可以的。然而,只要他还不了解自己应当修学的学处,在穿桑喀帝、持钵、着衣、站立、坐下等事上,以及喝水进食等规矩上还不熟练,就不应派他去食堂、分发筹签之处,或其他类似的地方,而应把他留在身边,像照顾幼童一样照顾他,应当为他讲说一切可行与不可行之事,在穿、披等威仪学处上教导他。因此,对于后面所说的“诸比丘,我允许摈除具足十种条件的沙弥”,他应远远避开这十种摈除条件,在圆满威仪学处的同时,好好修学十种戒。巴利
Samādiyāmī’’ti evaṃ saraṇadānaṃ viya sikkhāpadadānampi vuttaṃ, taṃ neva pāḷiyaṃ na aṭṭhakathāsu atthi, tasmā yathāpāḷiyāva uddisitabbāni. Pabbajjā hi saraṇagamaneheva siddhā, sikkhāpadāni pana kevalaṃ sikkhāparipūraṇatthaṃ jānitabbāni. Tasmā tāni pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena uggahetuṃ asakkontassa yāya kāyaci bhāsāya atthavasenapi ācikkhituṃ vaṭṭati. Yāva pana attanā sikkhitabbasikkhāpadāni na jānāti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇaṭṭhānanisajjādīsu pānabhojanādividhimhi ca na kusalo hoti, tāva bhojanasālaṃ vā salākabhājanaṭṭhānaṃ vā aññaṃ vā tathārūpaṭṭhānaṃ na pesetabbo, santikāvacaroyeva kātabbo, bāladārako viya paṭijaggitabbo, sabbamassa kappiyākappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ, nivāsanapārupanādīsu ābhisamācārikesu vinetabbo. Tenāpi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dasahaṅgehi samannāgataṃ sāmaṇeraṃ nāsetu’’nti (mahāva. 108) evaṃ parato vuttāni dasa nāsanaṅgāni ārakā parivajjetvā ābhisamācārikaṃ paripūrentena dasavidhe sīle sādhukaṃ sikkhitabbanti.
35 我的,诸比丘这句话的意思是由我。或者,我的如理作意,以那个为因。再者,再次获得这里要变换语格,应当说成由我。巴利
35.Mayhaṃ kho bhikkhaveti mayā khoti attho. Atha vā yo mayhaṃ yoniso manasikāro, tena hetunāti attho. Puna anuppattāti ettha vibhattiṃ pariṇāmetvā mayāti vattabbaṃ.
贤众的故事巴利
Bhaddavaggiyakathā
36 “贤众”说的是:那些王子容貌端正、心地善良,又结伴同行,所以被称为“贤众”。“那么,你们”里的“vo”只是个虚词。“法眼生起”:有的人证得了入流道,有的人证得了一来道,有的人证得了不来道。这三种道也都叫“法眼”。据说他们过去在敦地拉本生故事里是三十个赌徒,听了敦地拉的教导后守持五戒;这是他们过去世的业。巴利
36.Bhaddavaggiyāti te kira rājakumārā rūpena ca cittena ca bhaddakā vaggabandhena ca vicaranti, tasmā ‘‘bhaddavaggiyā’’ti vuccanti. Tena hi voti ettha vokāro nipātamatto. Dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti kesañci sotāpattimaggo, kesañci sakadāgāmimaggo, kesañci anāgāmimaggo udapādi. Tayopi hi ete maggā ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti vuccanti. Te kira tuṇḍilajātake tiṃsadhuttā ahesuṃ, atha tuṇḍilovādaṃ sutvā pañcasīlāni rakkhiṃsu; idaṃ nesaṃ pubbakammaṃ.
优楼频螺的神通故事巴利
Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathā
37 “为首”就是走在前面的意思。“最胜”就是最上的,也就是智慧清净的人。巴利
37.Pamukhoti pubbaṅgamo. Pāmokkhoti uttamo visuddhapañño.
38 不伤害:就是不破坏。以火力对抗火力:就是用自己的火力去对抗龙王的神通威力。若能制伏:就是能压倒或摧毁。忿:就是愤怒。但阿拉汉绝不会这样想“我是阿拉汉”而说这种话。巴利
38.Anupahaccāti avināsetvā. Tejasā tejanti attano tejena nāgassa tejaṃ. Pariyādiyeyyanti abhibhaveyyaṃ, vināseyyaṃ vāti. Makkhanti kodhaṃ. Natveva ca kho arahā yathā ahanti attānaṃ ‘‘arahā aha’’nti maññamāno vadati.
39 “世尊在尼连禅河边”等偈颂是后来加进去的。巴利
39.Nerañjarāyaṃ bhagavātiādikā gāthāyo pacchā pakkhittā.
44-9 “应伸展”是为了晒干,展开后放置的意思。“像在说‘尊者,请把手伸过来’那样弯腰的人”,就是指伸手的人。“打发走”即让离开。“小火盆”指的是火盆。巴利
44-9.Vissajjeyyanti sukkhāpanatthāya pasāretvā ṭhapeyyanti attho. ‘‘Bhante āhara hattha’’nti evaṃ vadanto viya oṇatoti āharahattho. Uyyojetvāti vissajjetvā. Mandāmukhiyoti aggibhājanāni vuccanti.
51 “久已”是指从很久以前开始。巴利
51.Cirapaṭikāti cirakālato paṭṭhāya.
52 在“夹杂头发”等说法里,“头发”就是指夹杂的头发。这个道理在一切地方都一样。“担”是指肩上的重担。巴利
52.Kesamissantiādīsu kesā eva kesamissaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Khārikājanti khāribhāro.
频婆娑罗王会面的事巴利
Bimbisārasamāgamakathā
55 拉提瓦那意思是棕榈园。善建立塔是指某一棵榕树;据说这就是它的名字。以十二那胡塔,此处一那胡塔就是一万。说,是指为了断除他们的疑惑而宣说。巴利
55.Laṭṭhivaneti tāluyyāne. Suppatiṭṭhe cetiyeti aññatarasmiṃ vaṭarukkhe; tassa kiretaṃ nāmaṃ. Dvādasanahutehīti ettha ekaṃ nahutaṃ dasasahassāni. Ajjhabhāsīti tesaṃ kaṅkhācchedanatthaṃ abhāsi.
“瘦者之教诫”是指:那些因为修苦行而身体消瘦、因此得到“瘦者”这个名字的苦行者们的教诫者、训导者。或者也可以理解为:他自己就是瘦弱的苦行者,同时又在教诫、训导别人。“如何舍断”是指:因为什么原因而舍断。这里要表达的是:“你身为优楼频螺侍火苦行者们的亲教师和教导者,是看到了什么才舍离的?我问你这件事:你的火供是因为什么原因而舍断的。”巴利
Kisakovadānoti tāpasacariyāya kisasarīrattā ‘‘kisako’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ tāpasānaṃ ovādako anusāsako samānoti attho. Atha vā sayaṃ kisako tāpaso samāno vadāno ca aññe ovadanto anusāsantotipi attho. Kathaṃ pahīnanti kena kāraṇena pahīnaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘tvaṃ uruvelavāsiaggiparicārakānaṃ tāpasānaṃ sayaṃ ovādācariyo samāno kiṃ disvā pahāsi, pucchāmi taṃ etamatthaṃ kena kāraṇena tava aggihuttaṃ pahīna’’nti.
第二首偈颂的意思是:这些色欲之类的种种欲望,以及女人们,都是那些祭祀者所称赞的。而我了知:这一切色欲之类的种种欲望,在诸蕴和诸依处中都是垢秽。既然这些供奉和祭祀类的祭祀被说成只是垢秽,因此我不乐于供奉,也不乐于祭祀——对于供奉或祭祀,我都不感到欣悦。巴利
Dutiyagāthāya ayamattho – ete rūpādike kāme itthiyo ca yaññā abhivadanti, svāhaṃ etaṃ sabbampi rūpādikaṃ kāmappabhedaṃ khandhupadhīsu malanti ñatvā yasmā ime yiṭṭhahutappabhedā yaññā malameva vadanti, tasmā na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiṃ; yiṭṭhe vā hute vā nābhiraminti attho.
第三偈颂中,“atha kocarahī”就是“atha kvacarahi”(何时行)。剩下的部分意思很明白。巴利
Tatiyagāthāya – atha kocarahīti atha kvacarahi. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
第四偈颂中,“句”指涅槃句。因为它的本性是寂静的,所以叫寂静;因为没有诸依处,所以叫无依处;因为没有贪等杂染,所以叫无杂染;因为在三有中不执著,所以对人们以祭祀所称说的欲有也不执著;因为没有生老死,所以叫不变异;只能通过自己修成的道而证得,不是别人能使自己证得,所以叫非他引导。因为我见到了这样的句,所以我不乐于供奉,也不乐于祭祀。这是在说明什么?我对于能成就天界和人间福报的供奉与祭祀尚且不喜乐,又怎么会说“我的心乐于此处所谓的天界和人间”呢?巴利
Catutthagāthāya – padanti nibbānapadaṃ. Santasabhāvatāya santaṃ. Upadhīnaṃ abhāvena anupadhikaṃ. Rāgakiñcanādīnaṃ abhāvena akiñcanaṃ. Tīsu bhavesu alaggatāya yaṃ kāmabhavaṃ yaññā vadanti, tasmimpi kāmabhave asattaṃ. Jātijarāmaraṇānaṃ abhāvena anaññathābhāviṃ. Attanā bhāvitena maggeneva adhigantabbaṃ, na aññena kenaci adhigametabbanti anaññaneyyaṃ. Yasmā īdisaṃ padamaddasaṃ, tasmā na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiṃ. Tena kiṃ dasseti? Yo ahaṃ devamanussalokasampattisādhake na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiṃ, so kiṃ vakkhāmi ‘‘ettha nāma me devamanussaloke rato mano’’ti.
56 这样把在一切世间没有欢喜的状态显示出来之后,具寿伍卢韦拉·咖沙巴就在空中示现种种神通,并这样表明自己作为世尊弟子的身份:“我是弟子。”法眼,就是入流道智。巴利
56. Evaṃ sabbaloke anabhiratibhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha kho āyasmā uruvelakassapo ‘‘sāvakohamasmī’’ti evaṃ bhagavato sāvakabhāvaṃ pakāsesi. Tañca kho ākāse vividhāni pāṭihāriyāni dassetvā. Dhammacakkhunti sotāpattimaggañāṇaṃ.
57 “Assāsakā”的意思是希求、渴望。不过在“Esāhaṃ bhante”这一句里,虽然通过证悟圣道,他的皈依已经成就,但在这里他走的是决定性皈依的路,现在更用言语把自己完全奉献出去。他是靠道的力量才达到这种决定性的皈依,为了让别人知道,就用言语表明,同时一边行礼一边这样说。巴利
57.Assāsakāti āsīsanā; patthanāti attho. Esāhaṃ bhanteti ettha pana kiñcāpi maggappaṭivedhenevassa siddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ, tattha pana nicchayagamanameva gato, idāni vācāya attasanniyyātanaṃ karoti. Maggavasenevāyaṃ niyatasaraṇataṃ patto, taṃ paresaṃ vācāya pākaṭaṃ karonto paṇipātagamanañca gacchanto evaṃ vadati.
58 颜色像纯金金币那样,和纯金金币同色。Dasavāsa 的意思是住在十种圣者的住处。Dasadhammavidū 的意思是透彻了解十善业道。Dasabhi cupeta 的意思是具备十种无学之支。Sabbadhidanta 的意思是在一切方面都已调御;因为对世尊来说,在眼等诸根当中,确实没有任何一部分是没有调御的。巴利
58.Siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇoti siṅgīsuvaṇṇanikkhena samānavaṇṇo. Dasavāsoti dasasu ariyavāsesu vutthavāso. Dasadhammavidūti dasakammapathavidū. Dasabhi cupetoti dasahi asekkhehi aṅgehi upeto. Sabbadhidantoti sabbesu danto; bhagavato hi cakkhuādīsu kiñci adantaṃ nāma natthi.
59 世尊吃完饭、手从钵上移开后,他坐在一边。这句话的意思是:他观察到世尊已经吃完饭,手也从钵上移开了,就坐在一个地方。“Atthikānaṃ”是指那些为了礼敬佛陀和听闻正法而有需求的人。“Abhikkamanīyaṃ”是指能够前往。“Appākiṇṇaṃ”是指不杂乱。“Appasaddaṃ”是指言语声稀少。“Appanigghosaṃ”是指都城喧闹声稀少。“Vijanavātaṃ”是指没有往来行人的身体所带的风。也有读作“Vijanavāda”的,意思是内部没有人的谈论声;也有读作“Vijanapāta”的,意思是没有人往来。“Manussarāhaseyyakaṃ”是指适合人做隐秘之事的地方。“Paṭisallānasāruppaṃ”是指适合独处静修。巴利
59.Bhagavantaṃ bhuttāviṃ onītapattapāṇiṃ ekamantaṃ nisīdīti bhagavantaṃ bhuttavantaṃ pattato ca apanītapāṇiṃ sallakkhetvā ekasmiṃ padese nisīdīti attho. Atthikānanti buddhābhivādanagamanena ca dhammasavanena ca atthikānaṃ. Abhikkamanīyanti abhigantuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Appākiṇṇanti anākiṇṇaṃ. Appasaddanti vacanasaddena appasaddaṃ. Appanigghosanti nagaranigghosasaddena appanigghosaṃ. Vijanavātanti anusañcaraṇajanassa sarīravātena virahitaṃ. ‘‘Vijanavāda’’ntipi pāṭho; anto janavādena rahitanti attho. ‘‘Vijanapāta’’ntipi pāṭho; janasañcāravirahitanti attho. Manussarāhaseyyakanti manussānaṃ rahassakiriyaṭṭhāniyaṃ. Paṭisallānasāruppanti vivekānurūpaṃ.
舍利弗与目犍连出家的事巴利
Sāriputtamoggallānapabbajjākathā
60 舍利弗与目犍连,就是指舍利弗和目犍连。他们两人曾立下约定:“谁先证得不死,就要告诉另一个人。”据说,他们俩在俗家时,名字分别叫伍巴帝萨和拘律陀,各有二百五十名青年随从,一起去参加山顶集会。在那里,他们看到大众之后,心里这样想:“这么多人,不到一百年就都要落入死亡之口。”于是,两人在人群散去后互相询问,因为志趣相投,死想现前,便商量说:“朋友,既然有死亡,就应该有不死。来吧,我们去寻找不死。”为了寻找不死,他们带着随从,在着衣游行者桑恰亚那里出家。没过多久,他们就穷尽了自己老师的智慧领域,却仍然没有见到不死,于是问道:“老师,这里还有别的精髓吗?”听到“朋友,没有了,就只有这些”之后,他们说:“朋友,这是空洞的,没有精髓。从现在起,我们两人中谁先证得不死,就要告诉另一个人。”于是立下了约定。因此说:“他们曾立下约定”等等。巴利
60.Sāriputtamoggallānāti sāriputto ca moggallāno ca. Tehi katikā katā hoti‘‘yo paṭhamaṃ amataṃ adhigacchati, so ārocetū’’ti te kira ubhopi gihikāle upatisso kolitoti evaṃ paññāyamānanāmā aḍḍhateyyasatamāṇavakaparivārā giraggasamajjaṃ agamaṃsu. Tatra nesaṃ mahājanaṃ disvā etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ nāma evaṃ mahāsattanikāyo appatte vassasate maraṇamukhe patissatī’’ti. Atha ubhopi uṭṭhitāya parisāya aññamaññaṃ pucchitvā ekajjhāsayā paccupaṭṭhitamaraṇasaññā sammantayiṃsu ‘‘samma maraṇe sati amatenāpi bhavitabbaṃ, handa mayaṃ amataṃ pariyesāmā’’ti amatapariyesanatthaṃ sañcayassa channaparibbājakassa santike saparisā pabbajitvā katipāheneva tassa ñāṇavisaye pāraṃ gantvā amataṃ apassantā pucchiṃsu ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, ācariya, aññopettha sāro atthī’’ti? ‘‘Natthāvuso, ettakameva ida’’nti ca sutvā ‘‘tucchaṃ idaṃ āvuso nissāraṃ, yo dāni amhesu paṭhamaṃ amataṃ adhigacchati, so itarassa ārocetū’’ti katikaṃ akaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tehi katikā katā hotī’’tiādi.
在“以庄严的威仪前行”等语句中,应当知道这里的工具格是用来表示状态特征的。“由有需求者所了知的道路”这句话,则是说明跟随的原因。这里说的是:“我何不跟随在这位比丘身后呢?为什么呢?因为这种跟随在身后,正是有需求者所了知、所认知并已践行的道路。”或者也可以这样理解:我们这些有需求者,以“既然有死亡,就应当也有不死”的方式,仅仅推知有涅槃存在,并正在寻求、探索它。巴利
Pāsādikena abhikkantenātiādīsu itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Atthikehi upaññātaṃ magganti etaṃ anubandhanassa kāraṇavacanaṃ; idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ imaṃ bhikkhuṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandheyyaṃ, kasmā ? Yasmā idaṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhanaṃ nāma atthikehi upaññātaṃ maggaṃ ñāto ceva upagato ca maggo’’ti attho. Atha vā atthikehi amhehi ‘‘maraṇe sati amatenāpi bhavitabba’’nti evaṃ kevalaṃ atthīti upaññātaṃ nibbānaṃ nāma, taṃ magganto pariyesantoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
拿了钵食之后返回,说的是:他按《苏丁那品》里讲的那样,走到一处墙根前坐下。舍利弗心想:“现在还不是提问的时候”,就站在一边等时机。为了尽到该做的礼数,等长老吃完饭,他从自己的水壶里倒水给长老洗手洗脚;长老洗净手脚后,他和长老互相问候,然后才提问。所以说:“那时,游行者舍利弗”等等。“Na tāhaṃ sakkomi”就是“我没法为你解说”。这里,已经证得无碍解的长老并不是连这么点都讲不了,而是想让对方对法生起恭敬,才从各方面说明佛陀的境界不是自己所能企及,这样说的。巴利
Piṇḍapātaṃ ādāya paṭikkamīti sudinnakaṇḍe vuttappakāraṃ aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlaṃ upasaṅkamitvā nisīdi. Sāriputtopi kho ‘‘akālo kho tāva pañhaṃ pucchitu’’nti kālaṃ āgamayamāno ekamantaṃ ṭhatvā vattapaṭipattipūraṇatthaṃ katabhattakiccassa therassa attano kamaṇḍaluto udakaṃ datvā dhotahatthapādena therena saddhiṃ paṭisanthāraṃ katvā pañhaṃ pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sāriputto paribbājako’’tiādi. Na tāhaṃ sakkomīti na te ahaṃ sakkomi. Ettha ca paṭisambhidāppatto thero na ettakaṃ na sakkoti. Atha kho imassa dhammagāravaṃ uppādessāmīti sabbākārena buddhavisaye avisayabhāvaṃ gahetvā evamāha.
“诸法因缘生”中的“因缘生”,指的是五蕴;这就显示了他的苦谛。“如来宣说它们的因”——它们的因就是集谛,如来宣说了它,这就显示了集谛。“以及它们的灭”——是指这两谛的止息、不再生起;如来也宣说了它,这就是意思所在。这就显示了他的灭谛。而这里的道谛,虽然没有直接以自身的形式显示出来,却已经通过理路显示出来了,因为一旦说到灭,能证得灭的道也就等于说到了。或者,在“以及它们的灭”这一句里,通过“它们的灭以及灭的方法”,也就显示了两谛。现在,为了阐明这个意思,他说:“如此说的伟大沙门”。巴利
Ye dhammā hetuppabhavāti hetuppabhavā nāma pañcakkhandhā; tenassa dukkhasaccaṃ dasseti. Tesaṃ hetuṃ tathāgato āhāti tesaṃ hetu nāma samudayasaccaṃ; tañca tathāgato āhāti dasseti. Tesañca yo nirodhoti tesaṃ ubhinnampi saccānaṃ yo appavattinirodho; tañca tathāgato āhāti attho. Tenassa nirodhasaccaṃ dasseti. Maggasaccaṃ panettha sarūpato adassitampi nayato dassitaṃ hoti, nirodhe hi vutte tassa sampāpako maggo vuttova hoti. Atha vā tesañca yo nirodhoti ettha tesaṃ yo nirodho ca nirodhupāyo cāti evaṃ dvepi saccāni dassitāni hontīti. Idāni tamevatthaṃ paṭipādento āha – ‘‘evaṃvādī mahāsamaṇo’’ti.
正是这个法,如果仅此而已:即使除此之外再无其他,仅仅这个程度,仅仅这个入流果就应当证得,即便如此,也正是这个法。意思是如此。“你们已证悟了无忧之句”:我们四处寻求的那个无忧之句,你们已经彻证;那已由你们证得。意思是如此。“于众多百千劫中未见而已过去”:我们在众多百千劫中,确实未曾见到这个句子,它就那样过去了;如此,以这个句子未曾被我们见到这一点,说明了自己长久以来的伟大智慧。巴利
Eseva dhammo yadi tāvadevāti sacepi ito uttari natthi, ettakameva idaṃ sotāpattiphalamattameva pattabbaṃ, tathāpi eso eva dhammoti attho. Paccabyattha padamasokanti yaṃ mayaṃ pariyesamānā vicarāma, taṃ padamasokaṃ paṭividdhāttha tumhe; pattaṃ taṃ tumhehīti attho. Adiṭṭhaṃ abbhatītaṃ bahukehi kappanahutehīti amhehi nāma idaṃ padaṃ bahukehi kappanahutehi adiṭṭhameva abbhatītaṃ; iti tassa padassa adiṭṭhabhāvena dīgharattaṃ attano mahājānibhāvaṃ dīpeti.
62 “于甚深智所行境”,是指它既甚深,又是甚深智慧的所缘境。“于无上依止灭尽”,是指涅槃。“于解脱”,是指以彼为所缘的解脱而解脱。“授记”,是说“这二位将成为我声闻弟子中的上首,双贤”,这样以声闻巴拉密智作了授记。“他们的达上便是如此”,是指那“善来比丘”的达上就是他们的达上。他们如此受达上后,大目犍连尊者于七日内证得阿拉汉果,舍利弗尊者于半月内。巴利
62.Gambhīre ñāṇavisayeti gambhīre ceva gambhīrassa ca ñāṇassa visayabhūte. Anuttare upadhisaṅkhayeti nibbāne. Vimutteti tadārammaṇāya vimuttiyā vimutte. Byākāsīti ‘‘etaṃ me sāvakayugaṃ bhavissati aggaṃ bhaddayuga’’nti vadanto sāvakapāramiññāṇe byākāsi. Sāva tesaṃ āyasmantānaṃ upasampadā ahosīti sā ehibhikkhūpasampadāyeva tesaṃ upasampadā ahosi. Evaṃ upasampannesu ca tesu mahāmoggallānatthero sattahi divasehi arahatte patiṭṭhito, sāriputtatthero aḍḍhamāsena.
据说在过去世,有一位名叫无比见的佛出现在世间。那时,有个叫沙罗陀的苦行者在自己的草庵里,用各种花搭了一座花亭,请世尊坐在花座上,又照样为比丘僧团搭了花亭、摆好花座,然后发愿要成为上首弟子。发愿之后,他派人去给一位名叫增吉祥的长者传话:“我已经发愿要得上首弟子的位置,你也来发一个愿吧。”那位长者搭了一座青莲花亭,以佛陀为首的比丘僧团在那里应供之后,他发愿要成为第二弟子。他们两人当中,沙罗陀苦行者后来就是舍利弗尊者,增吉祥长者就是大目犍连尊者,这就是他们过去的业。巴利
Atīte kira anomadassī nāma buddho loke udapādi. Tassa sarado nāma tāpaso sake assame nānāpupphehi maṇḍapaṃ katvā pupphāsaneyeva bhagavantaṃ nisīdāpetvā bhikkhusaṅghassāpi tatheva maṇḍapaṃ katvā pupphāsanāni paññapetvā aggasāvakabhāvaṃ patthesi. Patthayitvā ca sirīvaḍḍhassa nāma seṭṭhino pesesi ‘‘mayā aggasāvakaṭṭhānaṃ patthitaṃ, tvampi āgantvā ekaṃ ṭhānaṃ patthehī’’ti. Seṭṭhi nīluppalamaṇḍapaṃ katvā buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ, tattha bhojetvā dutiyasāvakabhāvaṃ patthesi. Tesu saradatāpaso sāriputtatthero jāto, sirīvaḍḍho mahāmoggallānattheroti idaṃ nesaṃ pubbakammaṃ.
63 在“无子”等说法中:有些人是因为儿子们出家,所以成了没有儿子的人;有些人是因为丈夫出家,所以成了寡妇,也就是失去了丈夫。这两种情况都会导致家族断绝。“属于桑恰亚的”是指桑恰亚的弟子们。“摩揭陀的山围城”是指摩揭陀国地区的山围城(王舍城)。“大雄”是指具有大精进的人。“正在被引导”是指在正被引导的人们当中,这里属格用作位格,或者用作宾格。“知者有什么可嫉妒的”是指:对于这样了知“他们依法引导”的人们,有什么可嫉妒的呢?巴利
63.Aputtakatāyātiādīsu yesaṃ puttā pabbajanti, tesaṃ aputtakatāya. Yāsaṃ patī pabbajanti, tāsaṃ vedhabyāya vidhavābhāvāya. Ubhayenāpi kulupacchedāya. Sañcayānīti sañcayassa antevāsikāni. Magadhānaṃ giribbajanti magadhānaṃ janapadassa giribbajaṃ nagaraṃ. Mahāvīrāti mahāvīriyavanto. Nayamānānanti nayamānesu. Bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ, upayogatthe vā. Kā usūyā vijānatanti dhammena nayantīti evaṃ vijānantānaṃ kā issā.
关于依止师的义务巴利
Upajjhāyavattakathā
64-5 “没有依止师”是指缺少一位能审察是非对错、可以依靠的导师。“威仪不具足”是指仪表举止不圆满,也就是缺乏与沙门身份相符的行为。“在食物上面”是指在食物之上。“起钵”是指用来乞食的钵。因为人们对那个钵有“这是吃剩的”的想法,所以叫它“起钵”。另一种理解是:站起来把钵递上去,这里应当这样理解其含义。“诸比丘,我允许依止师”的意思是:我允许接受依止师。“应当生起儿子想”是指生起“这是我的儿子”这样基于在家亲情的想法。第二句也是这样。“恭敬尊重”是指怀着恭敬和尊重长辈的心态。“同分生活”是指共同的生活方式。“萨度”等五个词是接受依止师身份的表示用语。“以身表示”是指:共住弟子这样说三遍“尊者,请您做我的依止师”之后,如果依止师以“萨度”等五个词中任何一个词,通过身体、或通过言语、或通过身体和言语表示“你已经接受了依止师”,那么依止师就算被接受了。这里所谓的接受依止师,就是依止师对这五个词中的任何一个,通过言语让对方听到,或通过身体让对方明白意思。不过有些人说“萨度”是指同意,这不足为凭。因为仅仅以请求与给予就已经算接受了依止师,同意在这里并不是必要条件。共住弟子也不应该只凭“我用这个词接受了依止师”就算知道,还应该知道:从今天起,长老是我的责任,我也是长老的责任。巴利
64-5.Anupajjhāyakāti vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyakena garunā virahitā. Anākappasampannāti na ākappena sampannā; samaṇasāruppācāravirahitāti attho . Uparibhojaneti bhojanassa upari. Uttiṭṭhapattanti piṇḍāya caraṇakapattaṃ. Tasmiñhi manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino, tasmā uttiṭṭhapattanti vuttaṃ. Atha vā uṭṭhahitvā pattaṃ upanāmentīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Anujānāmi bhikkhave upajjhāyanti upajjhāyaṃ gahetuṃ anujānāmīti attho. Puttacittaṃ upaṭṭhapessatīti putto me ayanti evaṃ gehassitapemavasena cittaṃ upaṭṭhapessati. Esa nayo dutiyapadepi. Sagāravā sappatissāti garubhāvañceva jeṭṭhakabhāvañca upaṭṭhapetvā. Sabhāgavuttinoti sabhāgajīvikā. Sāhūti vātiādīni pañca padāni upajjhāyabhāvasampaṭicchanavevacanāni. Kāyena viññāpetīti evaṃ saddhivihārikena ‘‘upajjhāyo me bhante hohī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vutte sace upajjhāyo ‘‘sāhū’’tiādīsu pañcasu padesu yassa kassaci padassa vasena kāyena vā vācāya vā kāyavācāhi vā ‘‘gahito tayā upajjhāyo’’ti upajjhāyaggahaṇaṃ viññāpeti, gahito hoti upajjhāyo. Idameva hi ettha upajjhāyaggahaṇaṃ, yadidaṃ upajjhāyassa imesu pañcasu padesu yassa kassaci padassa vācāya vā sāvanaṃ kāyena vā atthaviññāpananti. Keci pana sādhūti sampaṭicchanaṃ sandhāya vadanti. Na taṃ pamāṇaṃ, āyācanadānamattena hi gahito hoti upajjhāyo, na ettha sampaṭicchanaṃ aṅgaṃ. Saddhivihārikenāpi na kevalaṃ iminā me padena upajjhāyo gahitoti ñātuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Ajjatagge dāni thero mayhaṃ bhāro, ahampi therassa bhāro’’ti idampi ñātuṃ vaṭṭati.
66 这里说的“这是正行”,是指前面所说的“应当正确地行持”,在这里就是这样的正行。清晨起床后脱掉鞋子,意思是:如果他在天快亮时,为了经行或为了保护洗过的脚而穿着鞋子,那些鞋子正穿在脚上,他就应该在清晨起床后把它们脱掉。应当给齿木,是指拿大、中、小三种齿木来,从中他拿的那一种能用三天,从第四天起,就应该给同样的齿木。如果他不作限定,随便拿到哪根就用哪根,那么得到什么样的齿木,就应该给什么样的。巴利
66.Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanāti yaṃ vuttaṃ sammā vattitabbanti, tatra ayaṃ sammāvattanā. Kālasseva uṭṭhāya upāhanā omuñcitvāti sacassa paccūsakāle caṅkamanatthāya vā dhotapādapariharaṇatthāya vā paṭimukkā upāhanā pādagatā honti, tā kālasseva uṭṭhāya apanetvā. Dantakaṭṭhaṃ dātabbanti mahantaṃ majjhimaṃ khuddakanti tīṇi dantakaṭṭhāni upanetvā tato yaṃ tīṇi divasāni gaṇhāti, catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya tādisameva dātabbaṃ. Sace aniyamaṃ katvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā gaṇhāti, atha yādisaṃ labhati tādisaṃ dātabbaṃ.
应供给洗脸水:准备好冷水和热水。如果他连续三天都用同一种水,从第四天开始,就应供给同样的洗脸水。如果没有事先约定而随便取用,那么得到什么样的水就供给什么样的水。如果两种都用,就应把两种都准备好。把洗脸水放在洗脸的地方后,应从厕所开始清扫。长老进厕所时,应清扫庭院,这样庭院就不会空着。应在长老还没从厕所出来时就把座位铺好。他做完身体的事回来坐下后,应按照“如果有粥”等所说的规矩来做。“污秽”是指被任何垃圾弄脏;但如果没有别的垃圾,只有水滴,也应用手擦掉。巴利
Mukhodakaṃ dātabbanti sītañca uṇhañca udakaṃ upanetvā tato yaṃ tīṇi divasāni vaḷañjeti, catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya tādisameva mukhadhovanodakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sace aniyamaṃ katvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā gaṇhāti, atha yādisaṃ labhati tādisaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sace duvidhampi vaḷañjeti, duvidhampi upanetabbaṃ. Udakaṃ mukhadhovanaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā vaccakuṭito paṭṭhāya sammajjitabbaṃ. There vaccakuṭiṃ gate pariveṇaṃ sammajjitabbaṃ; evaṃ pariveṇaṃ asuññaṃ hoti. There vaccakuṭito anikkhanteyeva āsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ. Sarīrakiccaṃ katvā āgantvā tasmiṃ nisinnassa ‘‘sace yāgu hotī’’tiādinā nayena vuttavattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Uklāpoti kenaci kacavarena saṅkiṇṇo, sace pana añño kacavaro natthi, udakaphusitāneva honti, hatthenapi pamajjitabbo.
把两件衣叠在一起做成双层:也就是把两件衣合在一起,这两件合在一起的桑喀帝也都应当作为桑喀帝交出。因为一切衣都由于缝合而被称为“桑喀帝”,所以说“应交出桑喀帝”。“不应走得太远,也不应太近”:这里,如果回头看望戒师时,一步或两步就能走到,那就应当知道,这就算是走得不太远也不太近。“应接过属于钵的东西”:如果戒师在乞食时得到粥或饭,钵变热了或太重了,就把自己的钵给他,然后接过那个钵,这就是意思。“戒师说话时不应在中间插话”:在俗家或别处说话时,他的话尚未说完,不应另起别的谈话。而且从这以下,凡是以“不”字作遮止的地方,一切处都应知道是恶作罪。这确实是犍度的法性。“说近于罪的话”:以语法、粗语等方式说近于罪过的话。“应劝阻”:应当像这样问着劝阻:“尊者,这样说合适吗?没有罪吗?”然而不应先想“我要劝阻”,然后说“长老,不要这样说”。巴利
Saguṇaṃ katvāti dve cīvarāni ekato katvā, tā ekato katā dvepi saṅghāṭiyo dātabbā. Sabbañhi cīvaraṃ saṅghaṭitattā ‘‘saṅghāṭī’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saṅghāṭiyo dātabbā’’ti. Nātidūre gantabbaṃ nāccāsanneti ettha sace upajjhāyaṃ nivattitvā olokentaṃ ekena vā dvīhi vā padavītihārehi sampāpuṇāti, ettāvatā nātidūre nāccāsanne gato hotīti veditabbaṃ. Pattapariyāpannaṃ paṭiggahetabbanti sace upajjhāyena bhikkhācāre yāguyā vā bhatte vā laddhe patto uṇho vā bhāriko vā hoti, attano pattaṃ tassa datvā so patto gahetabboti attho. Na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassa antarantarā kathā opātetabbāti antaraghare vā aññatra vā bhaṇamānassa aniṭṭhite tassa vacane aññā kathā na samuṭṭhāpetabbā. Ito paṭṭhāya ca pana yattha yattha nakārena paṭisedho kariyati, sabbattha dukkaṭāpatti veditabbā. Ayañhi khandhakadhammatā. Āpattisāmantā bhaṇamānoti padasodhammaduṭṭhullādivasena āpattiyā āsannavācaṃ bhaṇamāno. Nivāretabboti ‘‘kiṃ bhante īdisaṃ nāma vattuṃ vaṭṭati, āpatti na hotī’’ti evaṃ pucchantena viya vāretabbo. Vāressāmīti pana katvā ‘‘mahallaka, mā evaṃ bhaṇā’’ti na vattabbo.
先回来:如果村庄很近,或者精舍里有生病的比丘,就应该从村庄先回来。如果村庄很远,又没有人和戒师一起前来,那就和戒师一起从村庄出发,用衣把钵包好,从半路上先回来。这样返回时,先回来之后,应该把铺设座位等一切事务都做好。有汗湿:指被汗浸透、沾了汗气。把衣耳推出四指:把衣耳超出四指的长度来叠衣。什么原因?为了让中间不出现折痕。因为叠得平整的衣,中间会有折痕,因此经常破损而变得脆弱,这是为了防止这一点才说的。所以,应该每天把衣耳推出四指来叠,使今天折痕的地方明天不会破裂。把腰带放在衣褶里:应该把腰带折好,放进衣褶中安放。巴利
Paṭhamataraṃ āgantvāti sace āsanne gāmo hoti, vihāre vā gilāno bhikkhu hoti, gāmato paṭhamataraṃ āgantabbaṃ. Sace dūre gāmo hoti, upajjhāyena saddhiṃ āgacchanto natthi, teneva saddhiṃ gāmato nikkhamitvā cīvarena pattaṃ veṭhetvā antarāmaggato paṭhamataraṃ āgantabbaṃ . Evaṃ nivattantena paṭhamataraṃ āgantvā āsanapaññāpanādi sabbaṃ kiccaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sinnaṃ hotīti tintaṃ sedaggahitaṃ. Caturaṅgulaṃ kaṇṇaṃ ussāretvāti kaṇṇaṃ caturaṅgulappamāṇaṃ atirekaṃ katvā evaṃ cīvaraṃ saṃharitabbaṃ. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Mā majjhe bhaṅgo ahosīti. Samaṃ katvā saṃharitassa hi majjhe bhaṅgo hoti, tato niccaṃ bhijjamānaṃ dubbalaṃ hoti taṃ nivāraṇatthametaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā yathā ajja bhaṅgaṭṭhāneyeva sve na bhijjati, tathā divase divase caturaṅgulaṃ ussāretvā saṃharitabbaṃ. Obhoge kāyabandhanaṃ kātabbanti kāyabandhanaṃ saṃharitvā cīvarabhoge pakkhipitvā ṭhapetabbaṃ.
如果钵食已经有了,这里的意思是:有人在村里、在别人家里,或者在返回的路上吃过之后才回来,或者没有拿到钵食,那他就没有钵食;但如果他在村里还没吃而拿到了比丘的食物,那就有钵食。所以说“如果钵食已经有了”等等。如果他没有钵食但又想吃,就应该先给他水,然后把自己得到的钵食也递给他。应该用饮用水询问:正在吃的时候,应该三次用饮用水询问:“尊者,请把饮用水拿来。”如果时间还够,应该等戒师吃完之后自己再吃。如果时间快到了,就把饮用水放在戒师旁边,然后自己也吃。巴利
Sacepiṇḍapāto hotīti ettha yo gāmeyeva vā antaraghare vā paṭikkamane vā bhuñjitvā āgacchati, piṇḍaṃ vā na labhati, tassa piṇḍapāto na hoti, gāme abhuttassa pana laddhabhikkhassa vā hoti; tasmā ‘‘sace piṇḍapāto hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sacepi tassa na hoti, bhuñjitukāmo ca hoti, udakaṃ datvā attanā laddhatopi piṇḍapāto upanetabbo. Pānīyena pucchitabboti bhuñjamāno tikkhattuṃ ‘‘pānīyaṃ bhante āhariyatū’’ti pānīyena pucchitabbo. Sace kālo atthi, upajjhāye bhutte sayaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ. Sace upakaṭṭho kālo, pānīyaṃ upajjhāyassa santike ṭhapetvā sayampi bhuñjitabbaṃ.
所谓“没有间隔的地面”,意思是:在草席、布片之类的东西上,不管是什么,只要没有隔层,地面又混着尘土和沙砾,就不该把钵放在那里。但如果地面是黑色的,或者用石灰处理过,没有尘土,那就可以放在那样的地面上。在洗干净的沙地上也可以放。在尘土、尘垢、沙砾等上面就不可以。在这些地方,应该先放一片树叶或一块垫板,然后把钵放在上面。“从远端取边,从近端取褶”,这是为了说明:把手伸到衣架等的下方,用朝向自己这边的手轻轻放下。如果抓住边,把褶搭在衣架等上面,褶会碰到墙壁,所以不应该那样做。巴利
Anantarahitāyāti taṭṭikadhammakhaṇḍādīsu yena kenaci anatthatāya paṃsusakkharamissāya bhūmiyā pattho na ṭhapetabboti attho. Sace pana kāḷavaṇṇakatā vā sudhābaddhā vā hoti nirajamattikā, tathārūpāya bhūmiyā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Dhotavālikāyapi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Paṃsurajasakkharādīsu na vaṭṭati. Tatra pana paṇṇaṃ vā ādhārakaṃ vā ṭhapetvā tatra nikkhipitabbo. Pārato antaṃ orato bhoganti idaṃ cīvaravaṃsādīnaṃ heṭṭhā hatthaṃ pavesetvā abhimukhena hatthena saṇikaṃ nikkhipanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ante pana gahetvā bhogena cīvaravaṃsādīnaṃ upari nikkhipantassa bhittiyaṃ bhogo paṭihaññati, tasmā tathā na kātabbaṃ.
要把沐浴粉用水浸湿,揉成一团。要放在一边:就是放在没有烟的地方。在浴室里做的准备工作,包括提供炭火、黏土、热水等,这一切事务都要做。在水里做的准备工作,包括搓揉身体各个大小肢节等,这一切事务都要做。要用饮用水询问:在浴室里,因为受热之苦会口渴,所以应当询问。巴利
Cuṇṇaṃ sannetabbanti nhānacuṇṇaṃ udakena temetvā piṇḍi kātabbā. Ekamantaṃ nikkhipitabbanti ekasmiṃ niddhūme ṭhāne ṭhapetabbaṃ. Jantāghare parikammaṃ nāma aṅgāramattikauṇhodakadānādikaṃ sabbaṃ kiccaṃ. Udakepi parikammanti aṅgapaccaṅgaghaṃsanādikaṃ sabbaṃ kiccaṃ. Pānīyena pucchitabboti jantāghare uṇhasantāpena pipāsā hoti, tasmā pucchitabbo.
如果能够,意思是如果有能力;没有被任何疾病压倒。因为无病的共住弟子,哪怕已经六十岁,也应当履行对戒师的一切义务;如果他不恭敬地不做,在义务项目上有缺失,就犯恶作。但在涉及“不”字的规定处,即使是病人,做了被禁止的行为,也同样犯恶作。不摩擦者,意思是不在地面上摩擦。门板和门柱,意思是不碰触门板和门框。虫巢等物,指任何虫窝、蜘蛛网之类。应先从天花板取下,意思是从天花板开始,先取下天花板。光隙与角落部分,意思是光照缝隙、角落、内外窗板以及内室四角皆应擦拭。巴利
Sace ussahatīti sace pahoti; na kenaci gelaññena abhibhūto hoti; agilānena hi saddhivihārikena saṭṭhivassenāpi sabbaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ kātabbaṃ, anādarena akarontassa vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ. Nakārapaṭisaṃyuttesu pana padesu gilānassāpi paṭikkhittakiriyaṃ karontassa dukkaṭameva. Appaṭighaṃsantenāti bhūmiyaṃ appaṭighaṃsantena. Kavāṭapiṭṭhanti kavāṭañca piṭṭhasaṅghātañca acchupantena. Santānakanti yaṃkiñci kīṭakulāvakamakkaṭakasuttādi. Ullokā paṭhamaṃ ohāretabbanti ullokato paṭhamaṃ ullokaṃ ādiṃkatvā avaharitabbanti attho. Ālokasandhikaṇṇabhāgāti ālokasandhibhāgā ca kaṇṇabhāgā ca antarabāhiravātapānakavāṭakāni ca gabbhassa ca cattāro koṇā pamajjitabbāti attho.
应该按照最初铺设的样子来铺设。正是为此目的,前面才规定了应当记住最初铺设的样子并搬到一旁放好。如果最初是由不知情的人铺设的,就要从墙壁四周留出两指或三指宽的距离,再重新铺设。这就是铺设的规矩。如果草编床垫太大,就剪开,把边折回来绑好,再铺设。如果不会把边折回来绑好,就不要剪。东边的窗户应当关上,意思是东边的窗户要关闭。同样,其余窗户也都要关上。巴利
Yathāpaññattaṃpaññapetabbanti yathā paṭhamaṃ paññattaṃ ahosi, tatheva paññapetabbaṃ. Etadatthameva hi yathāpaññattaṃ sallakkhetvā nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipitabbanti purimavattaṃ paññattaṃ. Sace pana paṭhamaṃ ajānantena kenaci paññattaṃ ahosi, samantato bhittiṃ dvaṅgulamattena vā tivaṅgulamattena vā mocetvā paññapetabbaṃ. Idañhi paññāpanavattaṃ. Sace kaṭasārako hoti atimahanto ca, chinditvā koṭiṃ nivattetvā bandhitvā paññapetabbo. Sace koṭiṃ nivattetvā bandhituṃ na jānāti, na chinditabbo. Puratthimā vātapānā thaketabbāti puratthimāya vātapānā thaketabbā. Evaṃ sesāpi vātapānā thaketabbā.
“应当让他离开”意思是应当把他带到别处。“应当让人使他离开”意思是应当叫另一位比丘:“带着长老到别处去”,把他隔开,也就是要让人把他遣散。“应当让人使他远离”意思是应当叫另一个人:“请让长老舍弃邪见。”
“应当努力奔走”意思是,为了给予别住,应当一个一个地去拜访比丘并请求。如果自己有能力,就自己给;如果没有能力,就请别人给。
“到底用什么办法呢”意思是用什么方法呢。这个道理在一切处都适用。
“或者从轻处理,改为……”意思是:不作驱摈甘马,而作呵责甘马或依止甘马。
因此,知道“僧团想对戒师作驱摈甘马”之后,应当一个一个地去拜访比丘,请求说:“诸位尊者,请不要对我们的戒师作甘马。”如果他们还是要作,就应当请求:“请作呵责甘马或依止甘马吧。”如果他们仍旧要作,那就应当请求戒师:“尊者,请如法行持。”这样使戒师如法行持之后,再请求比丘们:“诸位尊者,请撤销甘马。”巴利
Vūpakāsetabboti aññattha netabbo. Vūpakāsāpetabboti añño bhikkhu vattabbo ‘‘theraṃ gahetvā aññattha gacchā’’ti vivecetabbanti vissajjāpetabbaṃ. Vivecāpetabbanti añño vattabbo ‘‘theraṃ diṭṭhigataṃ vissajjāpehī’’ti. Ussukkaṃ kātabbanti parivāsadānatthaṃ so so bhikkhu upasaṅkamitvā yācitabbo. Sace attanā paṭibalo hoti, attanāva dātabbo. No ce paṭibalo hoti, aññena dāpetabbo. Kinti nu khoti kena nu kho upāyena. Esa nayo sabbattha. Lahukāya vāpariṇāmeyyāti ukkhepanīyaṃ akatvā tajjanīyaṃ vā niyassaṃ vā kareyyāti attho. Tena hi ‘‘upajjhāyassa ukkhepanīyakammaṃ kattukāmo saṅgho’’ti ñatvā ekamekaṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘mā bhante amhākaṃ upajjhāyassa kammaṃ karitthā’’ti yācitabbā. Sace karontiyeva, ‘‘tajjanīyaṃ vā niyassaṃ vā karothā’’ti yācitabbā. Sace karontiyeva, atha upajjhāyo ‘‘sammā vattatha bhante’’ti yācitabbo. Iti taṃ sammā vattāpetvā ‘‘paṭippassambhetha bhante kamma’’nti bhikkhū yācitabbā.
“反复翻转、反复翻转”是指一次又一次地翻动。“只要染料还没滴尽,就不该离开。”如果哪怕还有一点点染料在滴,就不能走。“不经戒师同意,不得把钵给某个人”等等,这些都是针对与戒师不相应的人而说的。“不经戒师同意,不得进入村落”,意思是:想为了乞食或其他事务进村的人,必须先禀告戒师才能进去。如果戒师一大早就起身,打算去远处乞食,那就应该说一声“年轻比丘们去乞食吧”,然后才走。如果没这样说就走了,弟子回到住处看不到戒师,那就可以进村。如果在进村时见到了戒师,那么从见到他的那一刻起,就必须禀告。巴利
Samparivattakaṃ samparivattakanti samparivattetvā samparivattetvā. Na ca acchinne theve pakkamitabbanti yadi appamattakampi rajanaṃ gaḷati, na tāva pakkamitabbaṃ. Na upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchā ekaccassa patto dātabbotiādi sabbaṃ upajjhāyassa visabhāgapuggalavasena kathitaṃ. Na upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchā gāmo pavisitabboti piṇḍāya vā aññena vā karaṇīyena pavisitukāmena āpucchitvāva pavisitabbo. Sace upajjhāyo kālasseva vuṭṭhāya dūraṃ bhikkhācāraṃ gantukāmo hoti, ‘‘daharā piṇḍāya pavisantū’’ti vatvā gantabbaṃ. Avatvā gate pariveṇaṃ gantvā upajjhāyaṃ apassantena gāmaṃ pavisituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace gāmaṃ pavisantopi passati, diṭṭhaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya āpucchituṃyeva vaṭṭati.
不应去坟场,意思是:不论是为了居住还是为了观看,都不应前往。关于“不应朝其他方向离去”:在这里,想离开的人应当先说明事由,然后请求许可,最多请求三次。如果对方允许,那很好;如果不允许,而依止他居住时,自己的诵习、问法或修行法门都无法成就,戒师又愚笨、不精明,只是出于想把人留在自己身边才不让走,在这种情况下,即使他阻拦,也可以离开。“应等待他康复”:意思是应当等他病好,不应去任何地方。如果另有比丘作为看护者,就应当寻找药物,交到他手中,说“尊者,这位会照顾您”,然后离开。巴利
Na susānaṃ gantabbanti vāsatthāya vā dassanatthāya vā na gantabbaṃ. Na disā pakkamitabbāti ettha pakkamitukāmena kammaṃ ācikkhitvā yāvatatiyaṃ yācitabbo. Sace anujānāti, sādhu; no ce anujānāti, taṃ nissāya vasato cassa uddeso vā paripucchā vā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā na sampajjati, upajjhāyo bālo hoti abyatto, kevalaṃ attano santike vasāpetukāmatāya eva gantuṃ na deti, evarūpe nivārentepi gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Vuṭṭhānamassa āgametabbanti gelaññato vuṭṭhānaṃ assa āgametabbaṃ; na katthaci gantabbaṃ. Sace añño bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko atthi, bhesajjaṃ pariyesitvā tassa hatthe datvā ‘‘bhante ayaṃ upaṭṭhahissatī’’ti vatvā gantabbaṃ.
16. 同住弟子义务之论巴利
Saddhivihārikavattakathā
67 67. 和尚对共住弟子履行正当义务时,应当摄受他、扶持他,也就是说,要通过诵经等事项来摄受和扶持他。其中,诵经是指诵读巴利经文;问义是指对巴利经文作义理的解释。教诫是指在事情还没发生时说“这个该做,这个不该做”;教导是指在事情已经发生时说的。另外,不论事情已发生还是未发生,第一次说的叫教诫,反复说的叫教导。如果和尚有钵,是指和尚有多余的钵,这个道理在所有类似情况中都适用。资具是指其他沙门资具。“努力”是指以如法的方式寻求生起之方便。从此以后,从给齿木开始,到以洗水罐浇水为终,这些义务只应对患病的共住弟子履行。而不乐住等的对治等,则即使对未患病的弟子也应当履行。“染衣时”是指听取戒师“应这样染”的指导后方行染衣。其余内容应依前述方式理解。巴利
67. Upajjhāyena saddhivihārikamhi sammāvattanāyaṃ – saṅgahetabbo anuggahetabboti uddesādīhissa saṅgaho ca anuggaho ca kattabbo. Tattha uddesoti pāḷivācanaṃ. Paripucchāti pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanā. Ovādoti anotiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ ‘‘idaṃ karohi, idaṃ mā karitthā’’ti vacanaṃ. Anusāsanīti otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ. Api ca otiṇṇe vā anotiṇṇe vā paṭhamaṃ vacanaṃ ovādo; punappunaṃ vacanaṃ anusāsanīti. Sace upajjhāyassa patto hotīti sace atirekapatto hoti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Parikkhāroti aññopi samaṇaparikkhāro. Idha ussukkaṃ nāma dhammikena nayena uppajjamānaupāyapariyesanaṃ. Ito paraṃ dantakaṭṭhadānaṃ ādiṃ katvā ācamanakumbhiyā udakāsiñcanapariyosānaṃ vattaṃ gilānasseva saddhivihārikassa kātabbaṃ. Anabhirativūpakāsanādi pana agilānassāpi kattabbameva. Cīvaraṃ rajantenāti ‘‘evaṃ rajeyyāsī’’ti upajjhāyato upāyaṃ sutvā rajantena. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
不依正行等论巴利
Nasammāvattanādikathā
68 不依正行:就是没有按照规定,圆满履行对和尚的义务。如果有人不依正行:就是没有圆满履行所规定的义务,那个人就犯恶作。应当驱离:就是应当摈弃。没有强烈的喜爱:就是对和尚没有强烈的世俗情爱。没有强烈的修习:就是没有强烈的慈心修习;按照前面所说的相反方式,应当了知善的那一面。足以驱离:就是适合驱离。巴利
68.Na sammā vattantīti yathāpaññattaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ na pūrenti. Yo na sammā vatteyyāti yo yathāpaññattaṃ vattaṃ na pūreyya; so dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti attho. Paṇāmetabboti apasādetabbo. Na adhimattaṃ pemaṃ hotīti upajjhāyamhi adhimattaṃ gehassitapemaṃ na hoti. Nādhimattābhāvanā hotīti adhimattā mettābhāvanā na hoti; vuttapaṭipakkhanayena sukkapakkho veditabbo. Alaṃ paṇāmetunti yutto paṇāmetuṃ.
和尚如果不驱离,就有过失,也就是有罪,犯戒;所以,不依正行的人就应该被驱离。而且,在不行正行的情况下,只要连染衣等义务都还没做,和尚就有损失。因此,对不履行这些义务的人,不论他已脱离依止还是未脱离依止,都一样有罪。对某个人来说,从交还钵时起,只有尚未解除依止的人才有罪。巴利
Appaṇāmento upajjhāyo sātisāro hotīti sadoso hoti, āpattiṃ āpajjati; tasmā na sammā vattanto paṇāmetabbova. Na sammāvattanāya ca yāva cīvararajanaṃ tāva vatte akariyamāne upajjhāyassa parihāni hoti. Tasmā taṃ akarontassa nissayamuttakassāpi amuttakassāpi āpattiyeva. Ekaccassa pattadānato paṭṭhāya amuttakanissayasseva āpatti.
同住弟子们如法侍奉,而和尚不如法对待,那是和尚犯戒。和尚如法对待,而同住弟子们不如法侍奉,那是他们犯戒。当和尚接受侍奉时,即使同住弟子人数众多,所有人也都犯戒。如果和尚说:“我有侍者了,你们自己去诵习、作意等事上用功吧”,那么同住弟子们无犯。如果和尚愚钝,不知道自己是在接受还是没在接受侍奉,而同住弟子人数众多,其中有一位具足行仪的比丘说:“和尚的事务由我来做,你们安心住着吧”,这样把担子揽到自己身上,让其他人脱身,那么从他承担起这个担子的时候起,其他人无犯。巴利
Saddhivihārikā sammā vattanti, upajjhāyo sammā na vattati, upajjhāyassa āpatti. Upajjhāyo sammā vattati, saddhivihārikā sammā na vattanti, tesaṃ āpatti. Upajjhāye vattaṃ sādiyante saddhivihārikā bahukāpi honti, sabbesaṃ āpatti. Sace upajjhāyo ‘‘mayhaṃ upaṭṭhāko atthi, tumhe attano sajjhāyamanasikārādīsu yogaṃ karothā’’ti vadati, saddhivihārikānaṃ anāpatti. Sace upajjhāyo sādiyanaṃ vā asādiyanaṃ vā na jānāti, bālo hoti, saddhivihārikā bahukā. Tesu eko vattasampanno bhikkhu ‘‘upajjhāyassa kiccaṃ ahaṃ karissāmi, tumhe appossukkā viharathā’’ti evañce attano bhāraṃ katvā itare vissajjeti, tassa bhārakaraṇato paṭṭhāya tesaṃ anāpatti.
拉特婆罗门的故事巴利
Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthukathā
69 在《拉特婆罗门本缘》中:世尊在波罗奈曾以三皈依开许出家与达上,这一点具寿舍利弗是知道的;但世尊想否定那种简便的达上,先以白四甘马把它定为重法,然后才开许达上。长老看出世尊的心意,便说道:“尊者,我该怎样让那位婆罗门出家、受达上呢?”诸佛的众会本就善于了知心意,而这位长老又是佛陀众会中最上首的。巴利
69.Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthusmiṃ – kiñcāpi āyasmā sāriputto bhagavatā bārāṇasiyaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi anuññātaṃ pabbajjañceva upasampadañca jānāti, bhagavā pana taṃ lahukaṃ upasampadaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ñatticatutthakammena garukaṃ katvā upasampadaṃ anuññātukāmo. Athassa thero ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā ‘‘kathāhaṃ bhante taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ pabbājemi upasampādemī’’ti āha. Buddhānañhi parisā ajjhāsayakusalā honti, ayañca buddhaparisāya aggo.
“由贤能、有能力的比丘”这句话里,所谓“贤能”,是指能把连同义注的律藏都熟记成诵、流利背出来的人;如果没有这样的人,那么至少能把这篇白四甘马的文句好好记住、能够熟练背出来,这样的人在这层意义上也算“贤能”。如果有人因为咳嗽、气喘、痰多等疾病,或者因为嘴唇、牙齿、舌头等有缺陷,或者因为对经教没有熟悉,而不能用完整圆满的字句宣读甘马文,或者漏掉字母或词句,或者该这样说却那样说,这个人就是“没有能力”。与此相反的人,在这层意义上应当知道就是“有能力”。“应告知僧团”:就是应当让僧团知道。接下来,为了显示应当让僧团知道的内容,便说了“尊者们,请听我说”等话。巴利
Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalenāti ettha byatto nāma yassa sāṭṭhakathaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ vācuggataṃ pavattati, tasmiṃ asati yassa antamaso idaṃ ñatticatutthakammavācāmattampi suggahitaṃ hoti, vācuggataṃ pavattati, ayampi imasmiṃ atthe byatto. Yo pana kāsasosasemhādinā vā gelaññena oṭṭhadantajivhādīnaṃ vā asampattiyā pariyattiyaṃ vā akataparicayattā na sakkoti parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehi kammavācaṃ sāvetuṃ, byañjanaṃ vā padaṃ vā hāpeti, aññathā vā vattabbaṃ aññathā vadati, ayaṃ appaṭibalo. Tabbiparīto imasmiṃ atthe ‘‘paṭibalo’’ti veditabbo. Saṅgho ñāpetabboti saṅgho jānāpetabbo. Tato paraṃ yaṃ saṅgho jānāpetabbo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘suṇātu me bhante’’tiādimāha.
71 71. “受具足戒之后随即”:就是成为具足戒比丘之后紧接着。“行非行”:就是做出违犯戒条的行为。“请拔济我”:就是请把我拉拔出来,让我从不善中脱离,安立在善法上;或者说,把我从沙弥的身份中拉拔出来,安立在比丘的身份上。“出于悲愍”:就是基于怜悯;意思是对我生起悲愍。巴利
71.Upasampannasamanantarāti upasampanno hutvā samanantarā. Anācāraṃ ācaratīti paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karoti. Ullumpatu manti uddharatu maṃ, akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhapetu; sāmaṇerabhāvā vā uddharitvā bhikkhubhāve patiṭṭhāpetūti. Anukampaṃ upādāyāti anuddayaṃ paṭicca; mayi anukappaṃ katvāti attho.
73 “是不间断的”:就是一直持续不断地运转。“四依止”:就是四种资具。因为存在依靠这四种资具才能维持运转,所以它们被称为“依止”。巴利
73.Aṭṭhitā hotīti niccappavattinī hoti. Cattāro nissayeti cattāro paccaye. Yasmā cattāro paccaye nissāya attabhāvo pavattati, tasmā te nissayāti vuccanti.
《老师职责的讲述》巴利
Ācariyavattakathā
75 你是这位比丘的什么人?意思是:这位比丘是你的什么人?应受他人教导和教诫,意思是:应当由其他人来教导和教诫。趋向于多事,也就是结党:结党就是这种多事的本质,所以叫结党性,也就是多事。为了这种叫做结党性的多事,你已经极轻率地陷入其中。巴利
75.Kintāyaṃ bhikkhu hotīti kiṃ te ayaṃ bhikkhu hoti. Aññehi ovadiyo anusāsiyoti aññehi ovaditabbo ceva anusāsitabbo ca. Bāhullāya āvatto yadidaṃ gaṇabandhikanti gaṇabandho etassa bāhullassa atthīti gaṇabandhikaṃ, bāhullaṃ. Yaṃ idaṃ gaṇabandhikaṃ nāma bāhullaṃ, tadatthāya atilahuṃ tvaṃ āpannoti vuttaṃ hoti.
76 不聪慧是指缺少慧的明辨。某个先前是外道者,即巴苏拉游方僧。据说他为了“盗取法义”而在伍达义长老座下出家,当长老以如法之言对他说时,他却对长老提出诘难。“诸比丘,允许聪慧的比丘……”等句中,“聪慧”就是先前在比丘尼教诫者注疏中所说的那个特征。而这里所说的“有能力”,是指能够为弟子、共住者或病人做侍奉等事的人。这也是曾经说过的——巴利
76.Abyattāti paññāveyyattiyena virahitā. Aññattaropi aññatitthiyapubboti pasūro paribbājako. So kira ‘‘dhammaṃ thenessāmī’’ti udāyittherassa santike pabbajitvā tena sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāno tassa vādaṃ āropesi. Anujānāmi bhikkhave byattena bhikkhunātiādimhi byatto pubbe bhikkhunovādakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttalakkhaṇoyeva. Yo pana antevāsino vā saddhivihārikassa vā gilānassa sakkoti upaṭṭhānādīni kātuṃ, ayaṃ idha paṭibaloti adhippeto. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
优波离,具备五种条件的比丘,才可以给人授具足戒、给予依止、让沙弥随侍。是哪五种?他有能力亲自照料或安排别人照料弟子、共住者或病人;有能力亲自劝离或安排别人劝离心生不满的人;有能力依佛法消除已生起的悔恨;有能力教导阿毗达摩;有能力教导阿毗律。巴利
‘‘Pañcahupāli , aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā upasampādetabbaṃ, nissayo dātabbo, sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabbo. Katamehi pañcahi? Paṭibalo hoti antevāsiṃ vā saddhivihāriṃ vā gilānaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṃ vā, anabhirataṃ vūpakāsetuṃ vā vūpakāsāpetuṃ vā, uppannaṃ kukkuccaṃ dhammato vinodetuṃ, abhidhamme vinetuṃ, abhivinaye vinetū’’nti (pari. 418).
77 “转入外道部众时”,意思是转入外道团体的时候。“诸比丘,我允许有导师”,就是我允许有教导行仪与正行的导师。“诸比丘,导师对于弟子……”等等这一切,都应该按照“诸比丘,戒师对于共住者……”等所说的方式来理解。因为这里确实只是名称不同而已。巴利
77.Pakkhasaṅkantesūti titthiyapakkhasaṅkantesu. Anujānāmi bhikkhave ācariyanti ācārasamācārasikkhāpanakaṃ ācariyaṃ anujānāmi. Ācariyo bhikkhave antevāsikamhītiādi sabbaṃ ‘‘upajjhāyo bhikkhave saddhivihārikamhī’’tiādinā nayena vuttavaseneva veditabbaṃ. Nāmamattameva hi ettha nānaṃ.
关于遣散与宽恕的讨论巴利
Paṇāmanākhamanākathā
80 80. “弟子们对导师不依正行。”在这里,前面所说的“由于不依正行,乃至在染衣期间,如果不履行义务,戒师就会有退失;所以不履行的人,无论已脱离依止还是未脱离依止,都有罪”,以及“对某些人来说,从接受钵开始,就是未脱离依止而有罪”——不应只凭这种判定标准来认定依止弟子的罪。因为依止弟子只要依止导师而住,就必须履行对导师的一切义务。但出家弟子、达上弟子和教法弟子,即使已经脱离依止,从最初直到染衣期间,也应当履行义务;不过他们如果没有请假就给予钵等,则无犯。在这其中,出家弟子和达上弟子是导师终身的责任;依止弟子和教法弟子则只在亲近同住期间才有责任。因此,导师也应当对他们依正行。因为在导师与弟子之间,凡是不依正行的人,都有罪。巴利
80.Antevāsikā ācariyesu na sammā vattantīti ettha pana yaṃ pubbe ‘‘nasammāvattanāya ca yāva cīvararajanaṃ, tāva vatte akariyamāne upajjhāyassa parihāni hoti, tasmā taṃ akarontassa nissayamuttakassāpi amuttakassāpi āpattiyevā’’ti ca, ‘‘ekaccassa pattadānato paṭṭhāya amuttakanissayasseva āpattī’’ti ca lakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, na teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā. Nissayantevāsikena hi yāva ācariyaṃ nissāya vasati, tāva sabbaṃ ācariyavattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Pabbajjāupasampadādhammantevāsikehi pana nissayamuttakehipi ādito paṭṭhāya yāva cīvararajanaṃ, tāva vattaṃ kātabbaṃ; anāpucchitvā pattadānādimhi pana etesaṃ anāpatti. Etesu ca pabbajjantevāsiko ca upasampadantevāsiko ca ācariyassa yāvajīvaṃ bhāro. Nissayantevāsiko ca dhammantevāsiko ca yāva samīpe vasanti, tāvadeva. Tasmā ācariyenāpi tesu sammā vattitabbaṃ. Ācariyantevāsikesu hi yo yo na sammā vattati, tassa tassa āpatti.
依止止息论巴利
Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathā
83 83. 关于从戒师那里获得依止的中止情形——在“戒师已离去”等情况下,判断标准如下:所谓“离去”,是指想要离开那个住处,已经动身前往别的地方。当他这样离去之后,如果那座精舍里有能给予依止的人——无论是以前曾从他那里受过依止的,还是和他共住共食的——就应该从他那里接受依止,一天也不能缺。如果没有这样的人,但有其他有惭耻心、品行端正的比丘,知道他有惭耻心、品行端正,当天就应该向他请求依止。如果他给了,那就很好。如果对方问:“你们的戒师不久就会回来吧?”而戒师确实这样说过,就应该回答:“是的,尊者。”如果他说:“那就等着戒师回来吧。”这样做是可以的。如果不知道他平时是否品行端正,就应该观察那位比丘四五天,跟他相处了解之后,再求得许可而接受依止。巴利
83. Upajjhāyamhā nissayapaṭippassaddhīsu – upajjhāyo pakkanto vātiādīsu ayaṃ vinicchayo – pakkantoti tamhā āvāsā vippavasitukāmo pakkanto disaṃ gato. Evaṃ gate ca pana tasmiṃ sace vihāre nissayadāyako atthi, yassa santike aññadāpi nissayo vā gahitapubbo hoti, yo vā ekasambhogaparibhogo, tassa santike nissayo gahetabbo, ekadivasampi parihāro natthi. Sace tādiso natthi, añño lajjī pesalo atthi, tassa lajjīpesalabhāvaṃ jānantena tadaheva nissayo yācitabbo. Sace deti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. Atha pana ‘‘tumhākaṃ upajjhāyo lahuṃ āgamissatī’’ti pucchati, upajjhāyena ca tathā vuttaṃ, ‘‘āma, bhante’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace vadati ‘‘tena hi upajjhāyassa āgamanaṃ āgamethā’’ti vaṭṭati. Atha panassa pakatiyā pesalabhāvaṃ na jānāti, cattāri pañca divasāni tassa bhikkhuno sabhāgataṃ oloketvā okāsaṃ kāretvā nissayo gahetabbo.
如果精舍里没有能给予依止的人,而戒师说了“我过几天就回来,你们不要不耐烦”之后就走了,那么在他回来之前,可以免依止。如果那里的人过了约定的时间之后,又留他多住五天或十天,那就应该派人送消息到精舍去:“年轻比丘们不要不耐烦,我将在某一天回来。”这样也还是可以免依止。如果他在回来的路上遇到河水暴涨或盗贼等灾障,长老为了等水退或找同伴而耽搁了,年轻比丘们听到这个消息后,在他回来之前仍然可以免依止。但是,如果他传信来说“我就住在这里了”,那就不能免依止了。凡是能得到依止的地方,就应该到那里去。巴利
Sace pana vihāre nissayadāyako natthi, upajjhāyo ca ‘‘ahaṃ katipāhena āgamissāmi, mā ukkaṇṭhitthā’’ti vatvā gato, yāva āgamanā parihāro labbhati. Athāpi naṃ tattha manussā paricchinnakālato uttaripi pañca vā dasa vā divasāni vāsentiyeva, tena vihāraṃ pavatti pesetabbā ‘‘daharā mā ukkaṇṭhantu, ahaṃ asukadivasaṃ nāma āgamissāmī’’ti. Evampi parihāro labbhati. Atha āgacchato antarāmagge nadīpūrena vā corādīhi vā upaddavo hoti, thero udakosakkanaṃ vā āgameti, sahāye vā pariyesati, tañce pavattiṃ daharā suṇanti, yāva āgamanā parihāro labbhati. Sace pana so ‘‘idhevāhaṃ vasissāmī’’ti pahiṇati, parihāro natthi. Yattha nissayo labbhati, tattha gantabbaṃ.
如果戒师还俗、去世,或者转投其他部派,那么连一天都不能没有依止,应当去能获得依止的地方。所谓“命令”,指的就是遣离依止。因此,如果有人通过“我遣离你”“不要再回到这里”“把你的钵和衣拿走”“我不需要你来侍奉”这类巴利经典中的说法,或者通过“不要向我请假进村”这类经典以外的说法,被遣离了依止,他就应当向戒师请求原谅。巴利
Vibbhante pana kālaṅkate pakkhasaṅkante vā ekadivasampi parihāro natthi. Yattha nissayo labbhati, tattha gantabbaṃ. Āṇattīti pana nissayapaṇāmanā vuccati. Tasmā ‘‘paṇāmemi ta’’nti vā ‘‘mā idha paṭikkamī’’ti vā ‘‘nīhara te pattacīvara’’nti vā ‘‘nāhaṃ tayā upaṭṭhātabbo’’ti vāti iminā pāḷinayena ‘‘mā maṃ gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchī’’tiādinā pāḷimuttakanayena vā yo nissayapaṇāmanāya paṇāmito hoti, tena upajjhāyo khamāpetabbo.
如果对方从一开始就不肯原谅,那就先自己接受罚甘马,然后自己先三次请求他原谅。如果他还是不原谅,就请那座精舍里的上座比丘们出面,请他原谅。如果他还是不原谅,就请附近精舍的比丘们出面,请他原谅。如果这样他还是不原谅,就去别的地方,住在与戒师志趣相投的人身边,心想:“也许他知道我住在志趣相投的人身边,就会原谅了。”如果这样他还是不原谅,那就住在那里。如果那里因为闹饥荒等过患而住不下去,就回到原来的精舍,在别人那里受依止而住。这是关于命令的判释。巴利
Sace āditova na khamati, daṇḍakammaṃ āharitvā tikkhattuṃ tāva sayameva khamāpetabbo. No ce khamati, tasmiṃ vihāre mahāthere gahetvā khamāpetabbo. No ce khamati, sāmantavihāre bhikkhū gahetvā khamāpetabbo. Sace evampi na khamati, aññattha gantvā upajjhāyassa sabhāgānaṃ santike vasitabbaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma sabhāgānaṃ me santike vasatīti ñatvāpi khameyyā’’ti. Sace evampi na khamati, tatreva vasitabbaṃ. Tatra ce dubbhikkhādidosena na sakkā hoti vasituṃ, taṃyeva vihāraṃ āgantvā aññassa santike nissayaṃ gahetvā vasituṃ vaṭṭati. Ayamāṇattiyaṃ vinicchayo.
在“从老师那里依止止息”的情形中,说到“老师已经离开或走了”。这里,有些老师是请假后离开的,有些是不请假就离开的。弟子也是一样。其中,如果弟子向老师请假说:“尊者,我因为某件事想去某个地方。”老师问:“你什么时候去?”弟子回答:“傍晚或夜里起身后就去。”老师也同意说:“好。”就在那一刻,依止就止息了。巴利
Ācariyamhā nissayapaṭippassaddhīsu ācariyo pakkanto vāhotīti ettha koci ācariyo āpucchitvā pakkamati, koci anāpucchitvā. Antevāsikopi evameva. Tatra sace antevāsiko ācariyaṃ āpucchati ‘‘asukaṃ nāma bhante ṭhānaṃ gantuṃ icchāmi kenacideva karaṇīyenā’’ti, ācariyena ca ‘‘kadā gamissasī’’ti vutto ‘‘sāyanhe vā rattiṃ vā uṭṭhahitvā gamissāmī’’ti vadati, ācariyopi ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchati, taṅkhaṇaññeva nissayo paṭippassambhati.
如果弟子说“尊者,我想去某个地方”,老师就说“你先去某个村子托钵乞食,之后我再决定”,弟子答应说“萨度”,然后他去了,那就是善去。如果他不去,依止就没有解除。又或者,弟子说“我去”之后,老师对他说“你先别去,我们晚上商量之后再决定”,他商量之后去了,那就是善去;如果不去,依止就没有解除。但如果弟子不向老师告假就离开,当他越过近行界时,依止就解除了。如果他从近行界内折返回来,依止就没有解除。巴利
Sace pana ‘‘bhante asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ gantukāmomhī’’ti vutte ācariyo ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma gāme piṇḍāya caritvā pacchā jānissasī’’ti vadati, so ca ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchati, tato ce gato, sugato. Sace pana na gacchati, nissayo na paṭippassambhati. Athāpi ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti vutte ācariyena ‘‘mā tāva gaccha, rattiṃ mantetvā jānissāmā’’ti vutto mantetvā gacchati, sugato. No ce gacchati, nissayo na paṭippassambhati. Ācariyaṃ anāpucchā pakkamantassa pana upacārasīmātikkame nissayo paṭippassambhati. Antoupacārasīmato paṭinivattantassa na paṭippassambhati.
如果老师向弟子请假说:“贤友,我要去某个地方。”弟子问:“什么时候?”老师回答:“傍晚或者夜里。”弟子答应说:“萨度。”那么依止就在那一刻立即解除。巴利
Sace pana ācariyo antevāsikaṃ āpucchati ‘‘āvuso asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ gamissāmī’’ti, antevāsikena ca ‘‘kadā’’ti vutte ‘‘sāyanhe vā rattibhāge vā’’ti vadati, antevāsikopi ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchati, taṅkhaṇaññeva nissayo paṭippassambhati.
如果阿阇梨说“我明天托钵乞食后再走”,对方回答说“好”表示接受,那么依止在当天暂时不消失,到第二天才消失。如果他说“我到某个村子托钵乞食后,再决定去还是不去”,说了之后却没去,依止不消失。又或者,他说了“我去”之后,弟子对他说“您先别去,晚上商量之后再决定”,他商量之后仍然没去,依止也不消失。巴利
Sace pana ācariyo ‘‘sve piṇḍāya caritvā gamissāmī’’ti vadati, itaro ca ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchati, ekadivasaṃ tāva nissayo na paṭippassambhati, punadivase paṭippassaddho hoti. ‘‘Asukasmiṃ nāma gāme piṇḍāya caritvā jānissāmi mama gamanaṃ vā agamanaṃ vā’’ti vatvā sace na gacchati, nissayo na paṭippassambhati. Athāpi ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti vutte antevāsikena ‘‘mā tāva gacchatha, rattiṃ mantetvā jānissathā’’ti vutto mantetvāpi na gacchati, nissayo na paṭippassambhati.
如果老师和弟子两人因为某件事要一起走出界外,后来老师生起了想走的心,没有请假就离开了,但只在两个掷土块的范围内就返回,依止关系不会中断。如果他越过两个掷土块的距离之后才返回,依止关系就中断了。如果老师和戒师越过两个掷土块的距离,住到别的精舍去,依止关系也中断。巴利
Sace ubhopi ācariyantevāsikā kenaci karaṇīyena bahisīmaṃ gacchanti, tato ce ācariyo gamiyacitte uppanne anāpucchāva gantvā dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ antoyeva nivattati, nissayo na paṭippassambhati. Sace dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā nivattati, paṭippassaddho hoti. Ācariyupajjhāyā dve leḍḍupāte atikkamma aññasmiṃ vihāre vasanti, nissayo paṭippassambhati.
阿阇梨还俗、命终或转投其他部派时,依止就在那一刻立即消失。但如果是通过遣离的方式,即使阿阇梨有心要舍弃弟子,以遣离依止的方式将他逐出,而弟子心想“虽然阿阇梨逐出我,但他心肠柔软”,依然怀有依恋,依止就不会消失。即使阿阇梨怀有依恋,弟子没有依恋,弟子心想“我从今以后不再依止他而住”便放下责任,这样依止也不会消失。如果双方都怀有依恋,依止同样不会消失。只有双方都放下责任,依止才会消失。被逐出的弟子应当执行处罚,并三次请求宽恕。如果得不到宽恕,就应当按照前面关于和尚所说的方式来处理。巴利
Ācariye vibbhante kālaṅkate pakkhasaṅkante ca taṅkhaṇaññeva paṭippassambhati. Āṇattiyaṃ pana sacepi ācariyo muñcitukāmova hutvā nissayapaṇāmanāya paṇāmeti, antevāsiko ca ‘‘kiñcāpi maṃ ācariyo paṇāmeti, atha kho hadayena muduko’’ti sālayova hoti, nissayo na paṭippassambhatiyeva. Sacepi ācariyo sālayo, antevāsiko nirālayo, ‘‘na dāni imaṃ nissāya vasissāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, evampi na paṭippassambhati. Ubhinnaṃ sālayabhāve pana na paṭippassambhatiyeva. Ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepena paṭippassambhati. Paṇāmitena daṇḍakammaṃ āharitvā tikkhattuṃ khamāpetabbo. No ce khamati, upajjhāye vuttanayena paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
“与和尚会合”这一条,这里的“会合”要理解为通过看见或听到而发生的会合。如果依止阿阇梨而住的共住弟子,在同一座寺院里看见和尚在礼佛塔,或在同一个村子里看见和尚在托钵乞食,依止就失效了。如果是和尚看见了弟子,而弟子没有看见和尚,依止不失效。如果弟子看见和尚走在路上或从空中经过,因为距离太远,只知道那是个比丘,不知道那是自己的和尚,依止不失效。如果认出来了,依止就失效。如果和尚住在楼上,共住弟子住在楼下,弟子没看见和尚就喝了粥离开;或者在斋堂里,没看见坐着的和尚,就在旁边吃完饭离开;或者在听法堂里,没看见坐着的和尚,听完法就离开,依止都不失效。以上就是通过“见”来理解会合的方式。巴利
Upajjhāyena vā samodhānagatoti ettha dassanasavanavasena samodhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sace hi ācariyaṃ nissāya vasanto saddhivihāriko ekavihāre cetiyaṃ vā vandantaṃ ekagāme piṇḍāya vā carantaṃ upajjhāyaṃ passati, nissayo paṭippassambhati. Upajjhāyo passati, saddhivihāriko pana na passati, na paṭippassambhati. Maggappaṭipannaṃ vā ākāsena vā gacchantaṃ upajjhāyaṃ disvā dūrattā bhikkhūti jānāti, upajjhāyoti na jānāti, na paṭippassambhati. Sace jānāti, paṭippassambhati. Uparipāsāde upajjhāyo vasati, heṭṭhā saddhivihāriko, taṃ adisvāva yāguṃ pivitvā pakkamati, āsanasālāya vā nisinnaṃ adisvāva ekamante bhuñjitvā pakkamati, dhammassavanamaṇḍape vā nisinnampi taṃ adisvāva dhammaṃ sutvā pakkamati, nissayo na paṭippassambhati. Evaṃ tāva dassanavasena samodhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
接着按听到声音的方式来说:如果弟子听到戒师在精舍里或村子里说法、或者在做随喜时的声音,认出“这是我的戒师的声音”,依止就解除。如果认不出来,依止就不解除。这是关于会合的判定。巴利
Savanavasena pana sace upajjhāyassa vihāre vā antaraghare vā dhammaṃ kathentassa anumodanaṃ vā karontassa saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘upajjhāyassa me saddo’’ti sañjānāti, nissayo paṭippassambhati. Asañjānantassa na paṭippassambhatīti ayaṃ samodhāne vinicchayo.
关于应当授予具足戒的五种情况的讨论巴利
Upasampādetabbapañcakakathā
84 84. 现在,前面曾简略地说过:“比丘们,我允许有能力、堪能的比丘,戒腊满十夏或超过十夏,为人授具足戒,给予依止。”这是简略地说明和尚与阿阇梨的条件。为了详细说明这一点,世尊又说:“比丘们,具备五支者……”等等。其中,“五支”指五种支分(条件)。他正是因为不具足戒蕴等功德,才具备这些过失支。“不应授具足戒”意思是:不应作为和尚为人授具足戒。“不应给予依止”意思是:不应作为阿阇梨给予依止。在这里,“不以无学戒蕴”“不以自己(具足无学)”“不信”等三组五法中,是从不合格的角度加以禁止的,不是从犯戒构成要素的角度。因为如果有人不具足无学戒蕴等功德,又不能劝导他人也具备这些功德,自身又带着不信等过失来摄受徒众,那么他的徒众在戒等功德上只会退失,不会增长。因此,“不应由他授具足戒”等话,是从不合格的角度说的,不是从犯戒构成要素的角度说的。因为世尊并没有允许只有漏尽者才能担任和尚与阿阇梨。如果只允许漏尽者担任,世尊就不会说“如果和尚生起不喜乐……”等话。然而,正因为漏尽者的徒众在戒等功德上不会退失,所以世尊才说:“比丘们,具备五支的比丘应授具足戒……”等等。巴利
84. Idāni yaṃ pubbe ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena dasavassena vā atirekadasavassena vā upasampādetuṃ, nissayaṃ dātu’’nti saṅkhepato upajjhāyācariyānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha pañcahi aṅgehīti pañcahi aguṇaṅgehi. So hi sīlakkhandhādīhi asamannāgatattāva aguṇaṅgehi samannāgato hoti. Na upasampādetabbanti upajjhāyena hutvā na upasampādetabbaṃ. Na nissayo dātabboti ācariyena hutvā nissayo na dātabbo. Ettha ca na asekkhena sīlakkhandhenāti ca attanā na asekkhenāti ca assaddhoti ca ādīsu tīsu pañcakesu ayuttavasena paṭikkhepo kato, na āpattiaṅgavasena. Yo hi asekkhehi sīlakkhandhādīhi asamannāgato pare ca tattha samādapetuṃ asakkonto assaddhiyādidosayuttova hutvā parisaṃ pariharati, tassa parisā sīlādīhi parihāyatiyeva, na vaḍḍhati. Tasmā tena na upasampādetabbantiādi ayuttavasena vuttaṃ, na āpattiaṅgavasena. Na hi khīṇāsavasseva upajjhāyācariyabhāvo bhagavatā anuññāto. Yadi tasseva anuññāto abhavissa, ‘‘sace upajjhāyassa anabhirati uppannā hotī’’tiādiṃ na vadeyya. Yasmā pana khīṇāsavassa parisā sīlādīhi na parihāyati, tasmā ‘‘pañcahi bhikkhave aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā upasampādetabba’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
在“增上戒上戒坏”等说法中,犯了巴拉基格和桑喀地谢思的人,就叫增上戒上戒坏。犯了其余五种罪聚的人,就叫行仪上行为坏。舍弃正见、具有边执见的人,就叫增上见上见坏。在护持徒众时,本该具备多少所闻,因为缺少这些所闻,所以是少闻。对于他应该知道的犯戒等事,因为不知道,所以是劣慧。在这五法中,前三句是就“不适当”这一点说的,后两句是就“犯戒的构成要素”这一点说的。巴利
Adhisīle sīlavipannotiādīsu pārājikañca saṅghādisesañca āpanno adhisīle sīlavipanno nāma. Itare pañcāpattikkhandhe āpanno ajjhācāre ācāravipanno nāma. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ pahāya antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato atidiṭṭhiyā diṭṭhivipanno nāma. Yattakaṃ sutaṃ parisaṃ pariharantassa icchitabbaṃ, tena virahitattā appassuto. Yaṃ tena jānitabbaṃ āpattādi, tassa ajānanato duppañño. Imasmiṃ pañcake purimāni tīṇi padāni ayuttavasena vuttāni, pacchimāni dve āpattiaṅgavasena.
不知道犯戒:当有人说“这是我做的”时,他不知道“这个人犯了这条戒”。不知道出罪:他不知道从导向出罪或导向说罪的角度,从此犯戒中这样出罪。在这五法中,前两句是就不相符的情况说的,后三句是就犯戒的构成要素说的。巴利
Āpattiṃna jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ nāma mayā kata’’nti vutte ‘‘imaṃ nāma āpattiṃ ayaṃ āpanno’’ti na jānāti. Vuṭṭhānaṃ na jānātīti vuṭṭhānagāminito vā desanāgāminito vā āpattito evaṃ nāma vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti na jānāti. Imasmiṃ pañcake purimāni dve padāni ayuttavasena vuttāni, pacchimāni tīṇi āpattiaṅgavasena.
“于增上行仪学处”:意思是在犍度仪轨方面没有能力教导。“于增上梵行学处”:意思是在针对有学众所制定的学处方面没有能力教导。“于阿毗达摩”:意思是在名色分别方面没有能力教导。“于阿毗律”:意思是在整个律藏方面没有能力教导。而“没有能力教导”,在所有这些地方都是指没有能力教授。“依法决断”:指如法地、以正当理由让对方解答。在这组五法中,所有句子都构成犯戒。在“不知犯戒”等这组五法中,所有句子也都构成犯戒。在“不满十夏”等结尾的那组五法中,道理也一样。这样,最初三组五法、第四组五法中的三句、第五组五法中的两句——这四组五法,都是依不适当的情况来说的。第四组五法中的两句、第五组五法中的三句,以及第六、第七、第八这三组五法——这四组五法,都是依犯戒的构成要素来说的。在善的方面,八种情况都无犯。巴利
Ābhisamācārikāya sikkhāyāti khandhakavatte vinetuṃ na paṭibalo hotīti attho. Ādibrahmacariyakāyāti sekkhapaṇṇattiyaṃ vinetuṃ na paṭibaloti attho. Abhidhammeti nāmarūpaparicchede vinetuṃ na paṭibaloti attho. Abhivinayeti sakale vinayapiṭake vinetuṃ na paṭibaloti attho. Vinetuṃ na paṭibaloti ca sabbattha sikkhāpetuṃ na sakkotīti attho. Dhammato vivecetunti dhammena kāraṇena vissajjāpetuṃ. Imasmi pañcake sabbapadesu āpatti. Āpattiṃ na jānātītiādipañcakasmimpi sabbapadesu āpatti. Ūnadasavassapariyosānapañcakepi eseva nayo. Iti ādito tayo pañcakā, catutthe tīṇi padāni, pañcame dve padānīti sabbepi cattāro pañcakā ayuttavasena vuttā. Catutthapañcake dve padāni, pañcame tīṇi, chaṭṭhasattamaaṭṭhamā tayo pañcakāti sabbepi cattāro pañcakā āpattiaṅgavasena vuttā; sukkapakkhe aṭṭhasu anāpattiyevāti.
应受具足戒者之六法讨论巴利
Upasampādetabbachakkakathā
85 在六法当中,“不满十夏”这一条是特别之处,它在任何情况下都构成犯戒。其余的应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。其中,“他的两部巴帝摩卡没有善巧地传来”,是指没有依两部(比丘、比丘尼)分别而善巧地传来。“没有善分别”,是指没有依论母与分别而善巧分别。“没有善流转”,是指没有依背诵而善巧流转。“对于经与随文没有善决断”,是指没有从论母和分别两方面善加决断。巴利
85. Chakkesu ūnadasavassapadaṃ viseso, taṃ sabbattha āpattikaraṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tattha ubhayāni kho panassa pātimokkhāni vitthārena na svāgatāni hontīti ubhatovibhaṅgavasena na svāgatāni. Na suvibhattānīti mātikāvibhaṅgavasena. Na suppavattīnīti vācuggatavasena. Na suvinicchitāni suttaso anubyañjanasoti mātikāto ca vibhaṅgato ca na suṭṭhu vinicchitāni.
曾经是外道的人的故事巴利
Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathā
86 86. 在“曾为外道者”这件事中:首先,这个巴苏拉因为是叛投外道者,所以不该给他授具足戒。但如果还有别的、以前没在这里出过家的人来,为了说明对他该怎么做,就说了“诸比丘,如果有别的……”等等。其中,“应该给他四个月的别住”,这叫做外道别住,也叫未覆藏别住。但这只应该给裸形外道、邪命外道或裸体者。如果他穿着布衣或熊皮毯之类任何一种外道标志的衣服来,就不该给他别住。对其他苦行者、般荼兰伽之类的人,则根本不该给。巴利
86. Aññatitthiyapubbavatthusmiṃ – yo tāva ayaṃ pasūro, so titthiyapakkantakattā na upasampādetabbo. Yo pana aññopi nayidha pabbajitapubbo āgacchati, tasmiṃ yaṃ kattabbaṃ taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yo so bhikkhave aññopī’’tiādimāha. Tattha tassa cattāro māse parivāso dātabboti ayaṃ titthiyaparivāso nāma; appaṭicchannaparivāsotipi vuccati. Ayaṃ pana naggaparibbājakasseva ājīvakassa vā acelakassa vā dātabbo . Sace sopi sāṭakaṃ vā vāḷakambalādīnaṃ aññataraṃ titthiyaddhajaṃ vā nivāsetvā āgacchati, nāssa parivāso dātabbo. Aññassa pana tāpasapaṇḍaraṅgādikassa na dātabbova.
最初,通过“剃除须发”等语句,说明他从一开始就接受了沙弥出家。不过,在这样给人剃度出家时,当他正坐在僧众中间,就不应对长老比丘们说:“你来给他剃度,你来当他的老师,你来当他的戒和尚。”因为如果这样说了,万一他们嫌弃做他的老师或戒和尚而不肯接受,那人就可能生气地想“这些比丘不信任我”,然后一走了之。所以,应该把他带到一边,再为他寻找老师和戒和尚。巴利
Paṭhamaṃ kesamassuntiādinā tassa āditova sāmaṇerapabbajjaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ pabbājentehi pana tasmiṃ saṅghamajjhe nisinneyeva ‘‘tvaṃ pabbājehi, tvaṃ ācariyo hohi, tvaṃ upajjhāyo hohī’’ti therā bhikkhū na vattabbā. Evaṃ vuttā hi sace tassa ācariyupajjhāyabhāvena jigucchantā na sampaṭicchanti, atha so ‘‘nayime mayhaṃ saddahantī’’ti kujjhitvāpi gaccheyya. Tasmā taṃ ekamantaṃ netvā tassa ācariyupajjhāyā pariyesitabbā.
87 比丘们,曾为外道的人这样才算成就,这样就是不成就——这是显示别住义务的纲目。“比丘们,如何……”等则是它的分别解释。其中,“太早入村”是指在比丘们正当履行义务的时间就进村乞食。“过了正午才回来”是指在俗人家里跟女人、男人、男孩、女孩等聊些家常闲话,就在那里吃完饭,等比丘们收拾好衣钵、正在诵经或问法,或者已经各自静修时,他才回来;他对和尚的义务、对阿阇梨的义务一概不做,只管钻进住处睡觉。比丘们,曾为外道的人这样也是不成就——意思是,这样做的人,并不能完成、圆满别住的义务。巴利
87.Evaṃ kho bhikkhave aññatitthiyapubbo ārādhako hoti, evaṃ anārādhakoti ayamassa parivāsavattadassanatthaṃ mātikā. Kathañca bhikkhavetiādi tasseva vibhaṅgo. Tattha atikālena gāmaṃ pavisatīti bhikkhūnaṃ vattakaraṇavelāyameva gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati. Atidivā paṭikkamatīti kulagharesu itthipurisadārakadārikādīhi saddhiṃ gehassitakathaṃ kathento tattheva bhuñjitvā bhikkhūsu pattacīvaraṃ paṭisāmetvā uddesaparipucchādīni vā karontesu paṭisallīnesu vā āgacchati; na upajjhāyavattaṃ nācariyavattaṃ karoti, aññadatthu vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā niddāyati. Evampi bhikkhave aññatitthiyapubbo anārādhako hotīti evampi karonto parivāsavattassa sampādako pūrako na hoti.
在“以妓女为行处”等说法中,“妓女”指的是以财物酬劳等为条件、容易发生邪行、靠姿色谋生的女人。“寡妇”指的是丈夫已死或丈夫离家在外的女人;她们想和任何人结成朋友关系。“成年少女”指的是已到青春期的少女,或已过青春期的少女;她们怀着对男人的心思到处走动,想和任何人结成朋友关系。“黄门”指的是烦恼炽盛、热恼尚未止息的非男之人;他们被热恼的势力压倒,想和任何人结成朋友关系。“比丘尼”指的是同样出家的女性;和她们很快就会产生亲密感,由此戒律就被毁坏。巴利
Vesiyāgocaro vātiādīsu vesiyāti āmisakiñcikkhasampadānādinā sulabhajjhācārā rūpūpajīvikā itthiyo. Vidhavāti matapatikā vā pavutthapatikā vā itthiyo; tā yena kenaci saddhiṃ mittabhāvaṃ patthenti. Thullakumārikāti yobbannappattā yobbannātītā vā kumāriyo; tā purisādhippāyāva vicaranti, yena kenaci saddhiṃ mittabhāvaṃ patthenti. Paṇḍakāti ussannakilesā avūpasantapariḷāhā napuṃsakā; te pariḷāhavegābhibhūtā yena kenaci saddhiṃ mittabhāvaṃ patthenti . Bhikkhuniyoti samānapabbajjā itthiyo; tāhi saddhiṃ khippameva vissāso hoti, tato sīlaṃ bhijjati.
在这里,如果有人成了妓女家的常客,或者借口托钵乞食等事,怀着因亲密交往而生的贪爱之心,因为想频繁见面交谈而前往她们那里,就被称为“以妓女为行处者”。他不久就会被人说成“和某个妓女一起去了”。这个道理适用于所有情况。不过,如果妓女等人提供筹签食等,与其他比丘一起去、一起吃了再回来,或者拿了再回来,这是可以的。比丘们去教诫生病的比丘尼、说法,或者给予诵经、提问等时,与那些前去的比丘们一起去也是可以的。但如果有人这样去了之后,又因为朋友交情而去,这个人就是不能取悦者。巴利
Tattha vesiyānaṃ kulesu kulupako hutvā piṇḍapātacariyādīhi vā apadisitvā sinehasanthavajātena hadayena abhiṇhadassanasallāpakāmatāya tāsaṃ santikaṃ upasaṅkamanto ‘‘vesiyāgocaro’’ti vuccati, so nacirasseva ‘‘asukavesiyā saddhiṃ gato’’ti vattabbataṃ pāpuṇāti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Sace pana vesiyādayo salākabhattādīni denti, bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ gantvā saddhiṃyeva bhuñjitvā vā gahetvā vā āgantuṃ vaṭṭati. Gilānā bhikkhuniyo ovadituṃ vā dhammaṃ vā desetuṃ uddesaparipucchādīni vā dātuṃ gacchantehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Yo pana tathā āgantvā mittasanthavavasena gacchati, ayaṃ anārādhako hoti.
“大小事务”就是指大事和小事。其中,敲钟之后,由和合的僧团集合起来应该做的事,比如修缮佛塔、大讲堂等,这些叫作大事。洗衣服、染衣等属于篇章所收的内容,以及火堂义务等威仪方面的事,这些叫作小事。其中,“不擅长”是指对这些事务不熟练、没有好好受过训练。“并非不勤勉”是指不具备精进勤勉的素质;听到“僧团有事”之后,早早吃完饭就进内室,尽情睡到傍晚才出来。“于其方法”是指对这些事务的善巧方法。“以考察”是指依因缘而起的考察。他不具备“这件事应该这样做,这件事不应该这样做”这样当下生起的智慧。“不能做,不能安排”是指他既不能亲手做,也不能这样激发热情并安排、让别人互相去做:“尊者,请拿;年轻人,请拿;沙弥,请拿。如果你们不做,我们也不做,那现在谁来做了?”比丘们说“我们要做事”时,他就推说有什么病,只在做事的比丘们附近走来走去,只是露个面而已,这个人也是不合格的。巴利
Uccāvacāni karaṇīyānīti mahantakhuddakāni kammāni. Tattha ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā samaggena saṅghena sannipatitvā kattabbāni cetiyamahāpāsādapaṭisaṅkharaṇādīni kammāni uccāni nāma. Cīvaradhovanarajanādīni khandhakapariyāpannāni ca aggisālavattādīni ābhisamācārikāni avacāni nāma. Tattha na dakkho hotīti tesu kammesu cheko susikkhito na hoti. Na analasoti uṭṭhānavīriyasampanno na hoti; ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa kammaṃ atthī’’ti sutvā pageva bhattakiccaṃ katvā gabbhantaraṃ pavisitvā yāvadatthaṃ supitvā sāyaṃ nikkhamati. Tatrupāyāyāti tesu kammesu upāyabhūtāya. Vīmaṃsāyāti ṭhānuppattikavīmaṃsāya. ‘‘Idamevaṃ kattabbaṃ, idamevaṃ na kattabba’’nti tasmiṃyeva khaṇe uppannapaññāya samannāgato na hoti. Na alaṃ kātuṃ na alaṃ saṃvidhātunti sahatthāpi kātuṃ samattho na hoti; ‘‘gaṇhatha bhante, gaṇha dahara, gaṇha sāmaṇera, sace tumhe vā na karissatha, amhe vā na karissāma, ko dāni imaṃ karissatī’’ti evaṃ ussāhaṃ janetvā saṃvidhātuṃ aññamaññaṃ kāretumpi samattho na hoti. Bhikkhūhi ‘‘kammaṃ karissāmā’’ti vutte kiñci rogaṃ apadisati, bhikkhūnaṃ kammaṃ karontānaṃ samīpeneva vicarati, sīsameva dasseti, ayampi anārādhako hoti.
没有强烈的意欲,就是说没有很强的意愿。诵习,是指学习巴利经典。提问,是指听闻义理。增上戒,是指巴帝摩卡戒。增上心,是指世间定的修习。增上慧,是指出世间道的修习。巴利
Na tibbacchando hotīti balavacchando na hoti. Uddeseti pāḷipariyāpuṇane. Paripucchāyāti atthasavane. Adhisīleti pātimokkhasīle. Adhicitteti lokiyasamādhibhāvanāya. Adhipaññāyāti lokuttaramaggabhāvanāya.
已转入,是指已经来到这里。他的导师,是指那位外道导师。他的见,是指他自己所执持的主张。现在,因为那位外道导师既认可、又喜欢这种主张,还以“只有这才是真实的”作坚固执取而抓住它,所以说这叫作取他的认可、取他的喜好、取他所取的。因此说:“取他的认可、取他的喜好、取他所取的。”在宣说毁责时,就是在说批评的话。不欣喜,是指内心不满足,心不振奋。昂扬,是指身心高举。比丘们,这就是曾为外道者不合格的关联法。比丘们,在宣说那位导师及其主张的毁责时,会生起不悦,表现为身语的变化,心想:“这些人为什么要毁谤他人呢?”在宣说佛等的毁责时,则生起悦意;在宣说那位导师及其主张的称赞时,生起悦意;在宣说佛等的称赞时,生起不悦——这就是曾为外道者在不合格事上的关联法。这是说:对于不合格者,在未完成别住义务的业上,这是相状,这是特征,这是不可动摇的标准。如此,比丘们,曾为外道者前来,若不合格就不应授具足戒。即使只具备其中一分,也不应授具足戒。在善的方面,一切都应依所说的反过来理解。巴利
Saṅkantohotīti idhāgato hoti. Tassa satthunoti tassa titthāyatanasāmikassa. Tassa diṭṭhiyāti tassa santakāya laddhiyā. Idāni sāyeva laddhi yasmā tassa titthakarassa khamati ceva ruccati ca ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti ca daḷhaggāhena gahitā; tasmā tassa khanti ruci ādāyoti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tassa khantiyā tassa ruciyā tassa ādāyassā’’ti. Avaṇṇe bhaññamāneti garahāya bhaññamānāya. Anabhiraddhoti aparipuṇṇasaṅkappo; no paggahitacitto. Udaggoti abbhunnatakāyacitto. Idaṃ bhikkhave saṅghātanikaṃ aññatitthiyapubbassa anārādhanīyasminti bhikkhave yamidaṃ tassa satthuno tasseva ca laddhiyā avaṇṇe bhaññamāne ‘‘kiṃ ime paraṃ garahantī’’ti kāyavacīvikāranibbattakaṃ anattamanattaṃ, buddhādīnañca avaṇṇe bhaññamāne attamanattaṃ, yañca tasseva satthuno tasseva ca laddhiyā vaṇṇe bhaññamāne attamanattaṃ, buddhādīnañca vaṇṇabhaṇane anattamanattaṃ, idaṃ aññatitthiyapubbassa anārādhanīyasmiṃ saṅghātanikaṃ, anārādhake parivāsavattaṃ apūrake kamme idaṃ liṅgaṃ, idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ, idamacalappamāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ anārādhako kho bhikkhave aññatitthiyapubbo āgato na upasampādetabboti ito ekenapi aṅgena samannāgato na upasampādetabbo. Sukkapakkhe sabbaṃ vuttavipallāsena veditabbaṃ.
“比丘们,像这样能令比丘们满意、欢喜的人”是指:不太早进村,也不太晚回来;不把妓女等地方当作常去之处;对同梵行者的事务能干、熟练等等;对诵经等有强烈的意愿;听到别人说外道的坏话时心里高兴;听到别人说佛等的坏话时心里不高兴;听到别人说外道的称赞时心里不高兴;听到别人说佛等的称赞时心里高兴。具足这八种外道义务,就是能令比丘们满意、欢喜的人。曾经是外道的人来了,应当给他授具足戒。巴利
Evaṃ ārādhako kho bhikkhaveti evaṃ nātikālena gāmappavesanā nātidivā paṭikkamanaṃ, na vesiyādigocaratā, sabrahmacārīnaṃ kiccesu dakkhatādi, uddesādīsu tibbacchandatā, titthiyānaṃ avaṇṇabhaṇane attamanatā, buddhādīnaṃ avaṇṇabhaṇane anattamanatā, titthiyānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇane anattamanatā, buddhādīnaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇane attamanatāti imesaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ titthiyavattānaṃ paripūraṇena ārādhako paritosako bhikkhūnaṃ aññatitthiyapubbo āgato upasampādetabbo.
如果在授达上的戒场内,他犯了一条义务,就要再别住四个月。不过,就像已破戒的在学尼可以重新受学处和学戒认可一样,对这个人来说,并没有什么需要重新授予的。因为他之前已给的别住就是他的别住。所以,应当再别住四个月。如果在别住期间,他中途证得八等至,这属于世间法,本性是会变坏的,就不应给他授达上。只有圆满了四个月义务的人,才可以授达上。如果在别住期间,他把握四大、界定所造色、确定名色、以三相导入而开始修观,这属于世间法,本性是会变坏的,仍然不应授达上。但如果他增进修观而证得入流道,义务就算圆满了。一切邪见已被断除,疑刺已被拔除,就在当天应当给他授达上。即使他还穿着外道的标志而成为入流者,也没有别住的事,就在当天让他出家并授达上。巴利
Sace pana upasampadamāḷakepi ekaṃ vattaṃ bhindati, puna cattāro māse parivasitabbaṃ. Yathā pana bhinnasikkhāya sikkhamānāya puna sikkhāpadāni ca sikkhāsammuti ca diyyati, evaṃ nayimassa kiñci puna dātabbamatthi. Pubbe dinnaparivāsoyeva hi tassa parivāso. Tasmā puna cattāro māse parivasitabbaṃ. Sace parivasanto antarā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbatteti, lokiyadhammo nāma kuppanasabhāvo, na upasampādetabbo. Cattāro māse pūritavattova upasampādetabbo. Sace pana parivasanto cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggaṇhati, upādārūpāni paricchindati, nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapeti, tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ ārabhati, lokiyadhammo nāma kuppanasabhāvo, neva upasampādetabbo. Sace pana vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilabhati, paripuṇṇaṃyeva hoti vattaṃ. Samūhatāni sabbadiṭṭhigatāni abbuḷhaṃ vicikicchāsallaṃ taṃdivasameva upasampādetabbo. Sacepi titthiyaliṅge ṭhito sotāpanno hoti, parivāsakiccaṃ natthi, tadaheva pabbājetvā upasampādetabbo.
以戒师为根本来寻求衣,意思是把戒师当作主人,为他寻求衣。钵也是一样。所以,如果戒师有钵和衣,就应该说:“请给这个人。”如果没有,而别人愿意布施,也应该交给戒师,说:“这个算作您的,请再给这个人。”为什么呢?因为外道生性乖违,他们可能会说:“僧团已经把衣钵给了我,我跟你们有什么关系?”然后就不肯接受教诫。但依靠戒师而生活的人,会听从戒师的话。因此说“应以戒师为根本来寻求衣”。“为剃发业”,是指为了剃除头发。关于剃发业的解说,后面会讲到。巴利
Upajjhāyamūlakaṃ cīvaraṃ pariyesitabbanti upajjhāyaṃ issaraṃ katvā tassa cīvaraṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Pattampi tatheva. Tasmā yadi upajjhāyassa pattacīvaraṃ atthi, ‘‘imassa dehī’’ti vattabbo. Atha natthi, aññe dātukāmā honti, tehipi upajjhāyasseva dātabbaṃ ‘‘idaṃ tumhākaṃ katvā imassa dethā’’ti. Kasmā? Titthiyā nāma vilomā honti ‘‘saṅghena me pattacīvaraṃ dinnaṃ, kiṃ mayhaṃ tumhesu āyatta’’nti vatvā ovādānusāsaniṃ na kareyyuṃ, upajjhāyena pana āyattajīvikattā tassa vacanakaro bhavissati. Tenassa ‘‘upajjhāyamūlakaṃ cīvaraṃ pariyesitabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhaṇḍukammāyāti kesoropanatthaṃ. Bhaṇḍukammakathā parato āgamissati.
“事火者”就是侍奉火的人。“结发者”就是苦行者。比丘们,这些人是“主张有业”的人,也就是说,他们不否定业,持有“有业,有业果报”这样的见解。因为一切诸佛在圆满出离巴拉密时,都是靠这种出家方式出家并圆满的,我也是同样靠这种方式圆满的;对他们而言,在教法中出家并不相违,所以应当给他们授具足戒,不应当让他们别住。比丘们,我给予亲族们这份特别的优待,就是说,我给予他们这份单独的、专门针对他们的优待。为什么这样说呢?因为他们即使曾在外道处出家,也不会想诽谤佛教,反而会赞叹说:“这是我们亲族中尊者的教法。”所以这样说。巴利
Aggikāti aggiparicaraṇakā. Jaṭilakāti tāpasā. Ete bhikkhave kiriyavādinoti ete kiriyaṃ na paṭibāhanti, ‘‘atthi kammaṃ, atthi kammavipāko’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā. Sabbabuddhā hi nekkhammapāramiṃ pūrayamānā etadeva pabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā pūresuṃ, mayāpi tatheva pūritā, na etesaṃ sāsane pabbajjā vilomā, tasmā upasampādetabbā, na tesaṃ parivāso dātabboti. Imāhaṃ bhikkhave ñātīnaṃ āveṇikaṃ parihāraṃ dammīti imaṃ ahaṃ tesaṃ pāṭekkaṃ odissakaṃ parihāraṃ dadāmi. Kasmā evamāha? Te hi titthāyatane pabbajitāpi sāsanassa avaṇṇakāmā na honti, amhākaṃ ñātiseṭṭhassa sāsananti vaṇṇavādinova honti, tasmā evamāhāti.
五种病的事解说巴利
Pañcābādhavatthukathā
88 在摩揭陀国,有五种病流行。也就是说,在名为摩揭陀的地方,人类和非人类当中,五种疾病流行、增长、蔓延。吉瓦咖童子的故事将在衣犍度中说明。比丘们,被五种病所侵扰的人不应被允许出家。那些流行的麻风等五种病,被它们侵扰、压制的人,不应被允许出家。巴利
88.Magadhesupañca ābādhā ussannā hontīti magadhanāmake janapade manussānañca amanussānañca pañca rogā ussannā vuḍḍhippattā phātippattā honti. Jīvakakomārabhaccakathā cīvarakkhandhake āvibhavissati. Na bhikkhave pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭho pabbājetabboti ye te kuṭṭhādayo pañca ābādhā ussannā, tehi phuṭṭho abhibhūto na pabbājetabbo.
这里说的“麻风”,不管是红麻风还是黑麻风,还是癣、疥、疮等任何种类,全都归为麻风。如果它还在增长阶段,哪怕只有指甲盖那么大,也不能给他出家。但如果它不在增长阶段,又长在下衣和上衣自然遮住的地方,有指甲盖那么大,那就可以。可是长在脸上、手背上、脚背上这些地方,即使不在增长阶段,而且比指甲盖还小,也绝对不可以,这是《库伦德》里说的。就算先给他治好再让他出家,也必须等肤色恢复正常后才能出家。身体像蜥蜴背一样,撒满皮屑的人,也不可以给他出家。巴利
Tattha kuṭṭhanti rattakuṭṭhaṃ vā hotu kāḷakuṭṭhaṃ vā, yaṃkiñci kiṭibhadaddukacchuādippabhedampi sabbaṃ kuṭṭhamevāti vuttaṃ. Tañce nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampi vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ hoti, na pabbājetabbo. Sace pana nivāsanapārupanehi pakatipaṭicchanne ṭhāne nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ hoti, vaṭṭati. Mukhe pana hatthapādapiṭṭhesu vā sacepi avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ nakhapiṭṭhito ca khuddakatarampi, na vaṭṭatiyevāti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tikicchāpetvā pabbājentenāpi pakativaṇṇe jāteyeva pabbājetabbo. Godhāpiṭṭhisadisacuṇṇaokiraṇakasarīrampi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
所谓肿物,不管是脂肪瘤还是别的什么,只要它处在还在变大的阶段,哪怕只有枣核那么大,也不该给他出家。但如果长在衣服遮得住的地方,只有枣核大小,又不再变大,那就可以出家。要是长在脸上等遮不住的地方,就算不再变大,也不行。就算先让他治好再出家,也得等身体皮肤长平整了才能给他出家。还有一种叫毛囊肿的,像牛乳头或者像手指头那样,东一块西一块垂挂着,这些也属于肿物。有这些东西在,就不能给他出家。小时候长的乳疮,到了青年时期脸上长的硬疹子,到了老年会消失,这些不算在肿物里面,有这些的话可以出家。另外,身上还有别的硬疹子,叫莲花蕊疹;还有一种叫芥子疹,像芥子那么小,遍满全身,这些全都属于麻风一类。有这些在,就不能给他出家。巴利
Gaṇḍoti medagaṇḍo vā hotu añño vā yo koci kolaṭṭhimattakopi ce vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhito gaṇḍo hoti, na pabbājetabbo. Paṭicchannaṭṭhāne pana kolaṭṭhimatte avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhito vaṭṭati. Mukhādike appaṭicchannaṭṭhāne avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitopi na vaṭṭati. Tikicchāpetvā pabbājentenāpi sarīraṃ sañchaviṃ kāretvāva pabbājetabbo. Uṇṇigaṇḍā nāma honti gothanā viya aṅgulikā viya ca tattha tattha lambanti, etepi gaṇḍāyeva. Tesu sati pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Daharakāle khīrapiḷakā yobbannakāle ca mukhe kharapiḷakā nāma honti, mahallakakāle nassanti, na tā gaṇḍasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti, tāsu sati pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Aññe pana sarīre kharapiḷakā nāma aparā padumakaṇṇikā nāma honti, aññā sāsapabījakā nāma sāsapamattā eva sakalasarīraṃ pharanti, tā sabbā kuṭṭhajātikā eva. Tāsu sati na pabbājetabbo.
麻风病是指不会溃烂、不会流脓、颜色像白莲花瓣的那种癞病,得了这种病,身体就像牛一样斑斑驳驳。对这种麻风病,应当按照前面所说的方式来判断。痨病就是消耗性疾病;有这种病的人,不能让他出家。癫痫就是胆汁引起的癫狂,或者鬼神引起的癫狂;其中,被怀有宿怨的非人附身的那种,很难治好。哪怕只是很轻微的癫痫,也不能让他出家。巴利
Kilāsoti na bhijjanakaṃ na paggharaṇakaṃ padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇaṃ kuṭṭhaṃ, yena gunnaṃ viya sabalaṃ sarīraṃ hoti, tasmiṃ kuṭṭhe vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabbo. Sosoti sosabyādhi; tasmiṃ sati na pabbājetabbo. Apamāroti pittummāro vā yakkhummāro vā; tattha pubbaverikena amanussena gahito duttikiccho hoti. Appamattakepi pana apamāre sati na pabbājetabbo.
国王差役的故事巴利
Rājabhaṭavatthukathā
90 关于国王差役这件事,“你们去肃清边境”意思是你们去开发边境。把盗贼赶跑之后,让那些因为害怕盗贼而逃离的村庄重新住人,给予保护,再让他们从事农耕等事务——这就是这句话的意思。不过,国王因为已经证得入流果,不会下令说“杀盗贼,打盗贼”。“陛下,应该砍掉戒师的头”等等这些话,是考虑到“在出家这件事上,戒师最尊贵,其次是阿阇梨,再其次是僧团”,才说这是世间诉讼裁决中的说法。比丘们,国王的差役不应出家:在这里,不管是大臣、高官还是仆役,不管有没有得到某个职位,只要是从国王那里领取食物和薪俸的差役,都算作国王的差役,这个人不可出家。但他的儿子、孙子、兄弟等亲属,如果不从国王那里领取食物和薪俸,就可以出家。如果有人把从国王那里得到的固定俸禄或按月按年的开销交还给国王,或者让儿子、兄弟接替那个职位后,向国王禀告“我现在不再是陛下的差役了”;或者为了某项差事领取了薪俸,而那项差事已经完成;或者国王已经允许他说“你出家吧”——这样的人也可以出家。巴利
90. Rājabhaṭavatthusmiṃ – paccantaṃ uccinathāti paccantaṃ vaḍḍhetha. Core palāpetvā corabhayena vuṭṭhite gāme āvāsāpetvā ārakkhaṃ datvā kasikammādīni pavattāpethāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rājā pana sotāpannattā ‘‘core ghātetha, hanathā’’ti na āṇāpeti. Upajjhāyassa deva sīsaṃchinditabbantiādi sabbaṃ ‘‘pabbajjāya upajjhāyo seṭṭho, tato ācariyo, tato gaṇo’’ti cintetvā idaṃ vohāre aḍḍavinicchaye āgatanti āhaṃsu. Na bhikkhave rājabhaṭo pabbājetabboti ettha amacco vā hotu mahāmatto vā sevako vā kiñci ṭhānantaraṃ patto vā appatto vā, yo koci rañño bhattavetanabhaṭo, sabbo rājabhaṭoti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, so na pabbājetabbo. Tassa pana puttanattabhātukā ye rājato bhattavetanaṃ na gaṇhanti, te pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Yo pana rājato laddhaṃ nibaddhabhogaṃ vā māsasaṃvaccharaparibbayaṃ vā raññoyeva niyyāteti, puttabhātuke vā taṃ ṭhānaṃ sampaṭicchāpetvā rājānaṃ ‘‘na dānāhaṃ devassa bhaṭo’’ti āpucchati, yena vā yaṃ kammakāraṇā vetanaṃ gahitaṃ, taṃ kammaṃ kataṃ hoti, yo vā pabbajassūti raññā anuññāto hoti, tampi pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.
91 91. 关于盗贼的事:那些在家人时期曾经见过他的人,以及听别人说“就是这个人”的人,一看见他就感到害怕……乃至把门关上。但对于不认识他的人,他在他们家中仍能得到食物。“诸比丘,不应……”:世尊自己是法主,因此为了将来不再发生这种事,为比丘们制定学处时这样说。其中,“像绑了旗子一样到处走动”就是“绑旗者”。意思是说,像根本盗贼那样在世间广为人知。因此,凡是四处走动,进行屠村、劫路,或在城中干破墙盗窃等勾当,并且被人们知道“某某人在干这些事”的人,不应让他出家。但如果是一位王子为了谋求王位而做屠村等事,则可以让他出家。因为国王们对这样的人出家会感到满意;如果他们不满意,就不应让他出家。以前在大众中出了名的盗贼,后来放弃盗贼行为,受持五戒等,如果人们知道这件事,可以让他出家。但那些像偷芒果等破墙盗窃的贼,或者暗中行窃、不露行迹,事后人们也不知道“这件事是这个人干的”,这些人也可以让他出家。巴利
91. Coravatthūsu – manussā passitvāti yehi gihikāle diṭṭhapubbo ye ca ‘‘ayaṃ so’’ti aññesaṃ suṇanti, te passitvā ubbijjantipi…pe… dvārampi thakenti. Ye pana na jānanti, tesaṃ gharesu bhikkhaṃ labhati. Na bhikkhaveti bhagavā sayaṃ dhammassāmī, tasmā āyatiṃ akaraṇatthāya bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento evamāha. Tattha dhajaṃ bandhitvā viya vicaratīti dhajabandho. Mūladevādayo viya loke pākaṭoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā yo gāmaghātaṃ vā panthaduhanaṃ vā nagare sandhicchedādikammaṃ vā karonto vicarati, paññāyati ca ‘‘asuko nāma idaṃ idaṃ karotī’’ti, so na pabbājetabbo. Yo pana rājaputto rajjaṃ patthento gāmaghātādīni karoti, so pabbājetabbo. Rājāno hi tasmiṃ pabbajite tussanti, sace pana na tussanti, na pabbājetabbo. Pubbe mahājane pākaṭo coro pacchā corakammaṃ pahāya pañcasīlādīni samādiyati, tañce manussā evaṃ jānanti, pabbājetabbo. Ye pana ambalabujādicorakā sandhicchedādicorā eva vā adissamānā theyyaṃ karonti, pacchāpi iminā nāma idaṃ katanti na paññāyanti, tepi pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.
92 破坏监狱,是指破坏八种束缚等。无畏住者:在这里,因为恐惧而停止作恶的人叫畏住者,但这些人因为已经获得无畏,所以不是畏住者,而是无畏住者;应当知道这里字母v是由字母p转变而来的。诸比丘,不应让破坏监狱的人出家:监狱是指束缚之处。在这里,无论是脚镣束缚、锁链束缚、绳索束缚、村缚、镇缚、城缚、人看守或国缚、岛缚,凡是破坏、切断、解开或以任何方式打开其中任何一种束缚而逃走的人,无论有人在看或没人在看,都算作破坏监狱者。因此,这样的破坏监狱的盗贼,即使破坏岛缚逃到别的岛屿,也不应让他出家。然而,如果不是盗贼,只是因为不干活,被国王的官员等绑起来,心想这样他就不会逃跑了,这样的人即使破坏监狱逃走,也可以让他出家。再者,如果有人通过契约取得村庄、小镇、港口等,因为没能履行契约而被关进监狱,他逃出来以后,不应让他出家。又,如果有人靠农耕等谋生积财,被人以此人得了宝藏的谗言陷害,因而被某人绑起来,不应就在原地让他出家;但如果他逃到别处,就可以在他所到之处让他出家。巴利
92.Kāraṃ bhinditvāti aṭṭabandhanādiṃ bhinditvā. Abhayūvarāti ettha bhayena uparamantīti bhayūvarā, ete pana laddhābhayattā na bhayūvarāti abhayūvarā; pakārassa cettha vakāro katoti veditabbo. Na bhikkhave kārabhedako pabbājetabboti kāro vuccati bandhanāgāraṃ. Idha pana andubandhanaṃ vā hotu saṅkhalikabandhanaṃ vā rajjubandhanaṃ vā gāmabandhanaṃ vā nigamabandhanaṃ vā nagarabandhanaṃ vā purisagutti vā janapadabandhanaṃ vā dīpabandhanaṃ vā, yo etesu yaṃkiñci bandhanaṃ bhinditvā vā chinditvā vā muñcitvā vā vivaritvā vā passamānānaṃ vā apassamānānaṃ vā palāyati, so kārabhedakoti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tasmā īdiso kārabhedako coro dīpabandhanaṃ bhinditvā dīpantaraṃ gatopi na pabbājetabbo. Yo pana na coro, kevalaṃ hatthakammaṃ akaronto ‘‘evaṃ no apalāyanto karissatī’’ti rājayuttādīhi baddho, so kāraṃ bhinditvā palātopi pabbājetabbo. Yo pana gāmanigamapaṭṭanādīni keṇiyā gahetvā taṃ asampādento bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito hoti, so palāyitvā āgato na pabbājetabbo. Yopi kasikammādīhi dhanaṃ sampādetvā jīvanto ‘‘nidhānaṃ iminā laddha’’nti pesuññaṃ upasaṃharitvā kenaci bandhāpito hoti, taṃ tattheva pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati, palāyitvā gataṃ pana gataṭṭhāne pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.
93 93. 诸比丘,关于“通缉犯”这一说法:这里所谓的“通缉犯”,并不只是指“在哪里看到就在哪里杀掉”的那种人。而是说,如果有人因为偷盗或者其他严重的冒犯国王的罪行而逃亡,国王在文书或册子上写道:“这个人在哪里被发现,就在哪里抓住杀掉”,或者“应该砍掉他的手和脚”,或者“应该让他缴纳如此这般的刑罚”——这样的人就叫作“通缉犯”,他不应该被允许出家。巴利
93.Nabhikkhave likhitakoti ettha likhitako nāma na kevalaṃ ‘‘yattha passati tattha hantabbo’’ti, atha kho yo koci corikaṃ vā aññaṃ vā garuṃ rājāparādhaṃ katvā palāto, rājā ca naṃ paṇṇe vā potthake vā ‘‘itthannāmo yattha dissati, tattha gahetvā māretabbo’’ti vā ‘‘hatthapādānissa chinditabbānī’’ti vā ‘‘ettakaṃ nāma daṇḍaṃ āharāpetabbo’’ti vā likhāpeti, ayaṃ likhitako nāma, so na pabbājetabbo.
94 被鞭打而受过刑罚的人:这里,如果有人因为不肯做传话、跑腿这类差事而挨打,那他不算受过刑罚的人。但如果有人从别人那里借了东西,不管是订了契约还是用别的方式,拿来用掉之后还不上,于是挨了鞭子,还被人说“这就是对你的刑罚”,那他就是被鞭打而受过刑罚的人。这种人不管是被鞭子打的,还是被半杖之类别的刑具打的,只要伤口还没好,就不能给他出家。要等伤口恢复正常了,才能让他出家。不过,如果是被人用膝盖、手肘或者椰子、石头之类的东西打到放出来,身上还能看出肿块的,也不能让他出家。必须等肿块消了、身体好了,才能让他出家。巴利
94.Kasāhato katadaṇḍakammoti ettha yo vacanapesanādīni akaronto haññati, na so katadaṇḍakammo. Yo pana keṇiyā vā aññathā vā kiñci gahetvā khāditvā puna dātuṃ asakkonto ‘‘ayameva te daṇḍo hotū’’ti kasāhi haññati, ayaṃ kasāhato katadaṇḍakammo. So ca kasāhi vā hato hotu addhadaṇḍakādīnaṃ vā aññatarena, yāva allavaṇo hoti, tāva na pabbājetabbo. Vaṇe pana pākatike katvā pabbājetabbo. Sace pana jāṇūhi vā kapparehi vā nāḷikerapāsāṇādīhi vā ghātetvā mutto hoti, sarīre cassa gaṇṭhiyo paññāyanti, na pabbājetabbo. Phāsukaṃ katvā eva gaṇṭhīsu sannisinnāsu pabbājetabbo.
95 被烙印者、已受刑罚者:这里,“已受刑罚者”的含义应按照前面同样的方式来理解。如果有人额头或大腿等处被烧热的铁烙上印记,而他是自由人,那么只要伤口还没愈合,就不可以让他出家。即使他的伤口已经愈合,皮肤平整,印记已经看不出来,如果这个印记位于三衣中郁多罗僧覆盖的地方,就可以让他出家;如果位于没有被覆盖的地方,就不可以。巴利
95.Lakkhaṇāhato katadaṇḍakammoti ettha katadaṇḍakammabhāvo purimanayeneva veditabbo. Yassa pana nalāṭe vā ūruādīsu vā tattena lohena lakkhaṇaṃ āhataṃ hoti, so sace bhujisso yāva allavaṇo hoti, tāva na pabbājetabbo. Sacepissa vaṇā ruḷhā honti, chaviyā samaparicchedā, lakkhaṇaṃ na paññāyati, timaṇḍalavatthassa uttarāsaṅge kate paṭicchannokāse ce hoti, pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati, appaṭicchannokāse ce na vaṭṭati.
负债者这件事的解说巴利
Iṇāyikavatthukathā
96 比丘们,关于“负债者不能出家”这一条,这里所谓的“负债者”是指:他的父亲或祖父借了债,或者他自己借了债,又或者父母拿他作抵押而借了东西,他欠着别人的这笔债,这就叫负债者。但如果是别的亲戚拿他作抵押去借了东西,那他不算负债者,因为那些亲戚没有权力拿他作抵押,所以这种情况可以让他出家,前面那种情况则不可以。如果他的血亲或族人说“我们来还债,请让他出家”,把债务揽到自己身上,或者有其他人看到他品行端正,说“请让他出家,我来还这笔债”,那就可以让他出家。如果这些人都没有,比丘应该告诉这样的护持者:“这位有善根的众生因为债务的障碍不能出家。”如果对方答应承担,就可以让他出家。如果他自己有合法的物品,说“我用这个来还”,也可以让他出家。但如果既没有亲戚等人出面承担,自己也没有财物,心想“先让他出家,然后靠乞食来还债”,那就不可以让他出家。如果让他出家了,犯恶作罪。即使他逃跑了,也应该把他带回来,交给债主。如果不交出来,全部债务就落在(让他出家的人)头上。不知情而让他出家,不犯。但如果知情,就应该把他带来,指给债主看。如果(授戒的长老)没有见到(逃跑者),债务就不落在头上。巴利
96.Na bhikkhave iṇāyikoti ettha iṇāyiko nāma yassa pitipitāmahehi vā iṇaṃ gahitaṃ hoti, sayaṃ vā iṇaṃ gahitaṃ hoti, yaṃ vā āthapetvā mātāpitūhi kiñci gahitaṃ hoti, so taṃ iṇaṃ paresaṃ dhāretīti iṇāyiko. Yaṃ pana aññe ñātakā āthapetvā kiñci gaṇhanti, so na iṇāyiko. Na hi te taṃ āthapetuṃ issarā, tasmā taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati, itaraṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace panassa ñātisālohitā ‘‘mayaṃ dassāma, pabbājetha na’’nti iṇaṃ attano bhāraṃ karonti, añño vā koci tassa ācārasampattiṃ disvā ‘‘pabbājetha naṃ, ahaṃ iṇaṃ dassāmī’’ti vadati, pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Tesu asati bhikkhunā tathārūpassa upaṭṭhākassāpi ārocetabbaṃ ‘‘sahetuko satto iṇapalibodhena na pabbajatī’’ti. Sace so paṭipajjati, pabbājetabbo. Sacepi attano kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ atthi, ‘‘etaṃ dassāmī’’ti pabbājetabbo. Sace pana neva ñātakādayo paṭipajjanti, na attano dhanaṃ atthi, ‘‘pabbājetvā bhikkhāya caritvā mocessāmī’’ti pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace pabbājeti dukkaṭaṃ. Palātopi ānetvā dātabbo. No ce deti, sabbaṃ iṇaṃ gīvā hoti. Ajānitvā pabbājayato anāpatti. Passantena pana ānetvā iṇasāmikānaṃ dassetabbo. Apassantassa gīvā na hoti.
如果负债的人去了别的地方,别人问他时,他说“我不欠任何人任何东西”,然后就出家了。债主来找他,到了那里,年轻比丘一看见债主就跑。债主于是走到长老面前说:“尊者,这个人是谁给他出家的?他拿了我这么多钱财跑了。”长老应该说:“近事男,他是在说‘我没有债务’的情况下由我给他出家的。我现在还能怎么办呢?你看我只有这钵和衣而已。”这是在这种情况下应该做的。但如果他跑了,长老就没有责任。巴利
Sace iṇāyiko aññaṃ desaṃ gantvā pucchiyamānopi ‘‘nāhaṃ kassaci kiñci dhāremī’’ti vatvā pabbajati, iṇasāmiko ca taṃ pariyesanto tattha gacchati, daharo taṃ disvā palāyati, so ca theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘ayaṃ bhante kena pabbājito, mama ettakaṃ nāma dhanaṃ gahetvā palāto’’ti vadati, therena vattabbaṃ ‘‘mayā upāsaka ‘aṇaṇo aha’nti vadanto pabbājito, kiṃ dāni karomi, passa me pattacīvaramatta’’nti ayaṃ tattha sāmīci. Palāte pana gīvā na hoti.
如果债主当着长老的面看见他,说“这是我的债务人”,长老就该回答:“你自己的债务人,你自己清楚。”这样长老就没有责任。即使债主说“这人已经出家了,现在能去哪儿呢”,长老也该说:“你自己清楚。”这样即使他逃走了,长老也没有责任。但如果长老说“现在他能去哪儿呢,就让他待在这里吧”,而那人却逃走了,长老就有责任。如果这个比丘是具足善根、具足行仪的人,长老就该说:“他是这样的人。”如果债主说“萨度”而放手,那就好。如果债主说“还一半吧”,就应当给。后来如果债主对僧团变得极为恭敬,即使他说“全部还吧”,也还是应当给。如果这个比丘在诵经、答问等方面很善巧,对比丘们有很大帮助,那么即使靠托钵乞食来筹钱,也还是应当把债还掉。巴利
Sace pana naṃ therassa sammukhāva disvā ‘‘ayaṃ mama iṇāyiko’’ti vadati, ‘‘tava iṇāyikaṃ tvameva jānāhī’’ti vattabbo. Evampi gīvā na hoti. Sacepi so ‘‘pabbajito ayaṃ idāni kuhiṃ gamissatī’’ti vadati, therena ‘‘tvaṃyeva jānāhī’’ti vattabbo. Evampissa palāte gīvā na hoti. Sace pana thero ‘‘kuhiṃ dāni ayaṃ gamissati, idheva acchatū’’ti vadati, so ce palāyati, gīvā hoti. Sace so sahetukasatto hoti vattasampanno, therena ‘‘īdiso aya’’nti vattabbaṃ. Iṇasāmiko ce ‘‘sādhū’’ti vissajjeti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘upaḍḍhupaḍḍhaṃ dethā’’ti vadati, dātabbaṃ. Aparena samayena atiārādhako hoti, ‘‘sabbaṃ dethā’’ti vuttepi dātabbameva. Sace pana uddesaparipucchādīsu kusalo hoti bahūpakāro bhikkhūnaṃ, bhikkhācāravattena pariyesitvāpi iṇaṃ dātabbamevāti.
97 比丘们,在这里“奴仆”有四种:家生的、买来的、战俘来的、自愿为奴的。其中,家生奴仆就是奴婢所生的儿子,生来就是奴仆。买来的奴仆,是指从父母那里买来的儿子,或者从主人那里买来的奴仆,付了钱让他履行奴仆的职责。这两种人都不能给他出家。如果要给他出家,应当先按照相应的情况使他脱离奴籍,不再算是奴仆,然后才能给他出家。巴利
97.Na bhikkhave dāsoti ettha cattāro dāsā – antojāto, dhanakkīto, karamarānīto, sāmaṃ dāsabyaṃ upagatoti. Tattha antojāto nāma jātidāso gharadāsiyā putto. Dhanakkīto nāma mātāpitūnaṃ santikā putto vā sāmikānaṃ santikā dāso vā dhanaṃ datvā dāsacārittaṃ āropetvā kīto. Ete dvepi na pabbājetabbā. Pabbājentena tattha tattha cārittavasena adāsaṃ katvā pabbājetabbā.
所谓“战俘奴”,是指有人到别国抢劫或诱骗,把别国的自由人带回来;或者在国内,国王下令“去抢”某个犯了罪的村庄,于是把那里的人也带回来。在这种情况下,所有男子都成了男奴,女子都成了女婢。这样的战俘奴,如果还住在把他带来的人那里,或者被关在牢里,或者被人看守着,就不可以让他出家。但如果他逃走了,到了逃去的地方,就可以让他出家。如果国王高兴地说“把战俘奴放了吧”,或者按照惯例解除了束缚,那就一定要让他出家。巴利
Karamarānīto nāma tiroraṭṭhaṃ vilopaṃ vā katvā upalāpetvā vā tiroraṭṭhato bhujissamānusakāni āharanti, antoraṭṭheyeva vā katāparādhaṃ kiñci gāmaṃ rājā ‘‘vilumpathā’’ti āṇāpeti, tato mānusakānipi āharanti. Tattha sabbe purisā dāsā, itthiyo dāsiyo. Evarūpo karamarānīto dāso yehi ānīto, tesaṃ santike vasanto vā bandhanāgāre baddho vā purisehi rakkhiyamāno vā na pabbājetabbo. Palāyitvā pana gato, gataṭṭhāne pabbājetabbo. Raññā tuṭṭhena ‘‘karamarānītake muñcathā’’ti vatvā vā sabbasādhāraṇena vā nayena bandhanā mokkhe kate pabbājetabbova.
自己主动成为奴仆的人,是指为了活命或为了得到保护,自己说“我是你的奴仆”,从而自愿进入奴仆身份的人。就像国王的象夫、马夫、牛夫、水牛夫等人一样,这样的奴仆不能让他出家。国王的种姓婢女所生的儿子,和大臣的儿子地位相似,这些人也不能让他出家。自由女子如果不检点,和种姓婢女混在一起生活,她们所生的儿子可以让他出家。如果她们自己呈报了文书,就不可以。佣工之子等群体所属的奴仆,如果没有得到他们主人的同意,也不能让他出家。在寺院里,由国王赐予、称作净人的奴仆,也不能让他出家。但如果先使他成为自由人,就可以让他出家。《大筏》中说:“把家生奴和买来的奴仆带来,说‘我们把他们送给比丘僧团做净人’,他们就像头上浇了酪浆一样,可以让他出家。”《库伦德》中则说:“‘我们给净人’是以如法的说法给予,无论用什么说法给予,都不能让他出家。”贫穷的人想依靠僧团生活,在寺院里做净人,这些人可以让他出家。如果一个人的父母都是奴仆,或者母亲是婢女而父亲不是奴仆,就不能让他出家。如果母亲不是婢女而父亲是奴仆,就可以让他出家。比丘的亲戚或护持者把奴仆交给他,说“请度这个人出家,他会为你们做事”,或者比丘自己有这样的奴仆,要先使他成为自由人,然后才能让他出家。主人把奴仆交出来,说“请度这个人出家,如果他喜欢出家生活,就不是奴仆;如果他还俗,就还是我的奴仆”,这种叫做“暂时”的,不能让他出家——这是《库伦德》中说的。没有主人的奴仆,也要先使他成为自由人,然后才能让他出家。如果不知情而让他出家或受了具足戒,后来才知道,就应该使他成为自由人。巴利
Sāmaṃ dāsabyaṃ upagato nāma jīvitahetu vā ārakkhahetu vā ‘‘ahaṃ te dāso’’ti sayameva dāsabhāvaṃ upagato. Rājūnaṃ hatthiassagomahiṃsagopakādayo viya, tādiso dāso na pabbājetabbo. Rañño vaṇṇadāsīnaṃ puttā honti amaccaputtasadisā, tepi na pabbājetabbā. Bhujissitthiyo asaṃyatā vaṇṇadāsīhi saddhiṃ vicaranti, tāsaṃ putte pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace sayameva paṇṇaṃ āropenti, na vaṭṭati. Bhaṭiputtakagaṇādīnaṃ dāsāpi tehi adinnā na pabbājetabbā. Vihāresu rājūhi ārāmikadāsā nāma dinnā honti, tepi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Bhujisse pana katvā pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Mahāpaccariyaṃ ‘‘antojātadhanakkītake ānetvā bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmike demāti denti, takkaṃ sīse āsittakasadisāva honti, te pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘ārāmikaṃ demāti kappiyavohārena denti, yena kenaci vohārena dinno hotu, neva pabbājetabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Duggatamanussā saṅghaṃ nissāya jīvissāmāti vihāre kappiyakārakā honti, etepi pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Yassa mātāpitaro dāsā, mātā eva vā dāsī, pitā adāso, taṃ pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yassa pana mātā adāsī, pitā dāso, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhussa ñātakā vā upaṭṭhākā vā dāsaṃ denti ‘‘imaṃ pabbājetha, tumhākaṃ veyyāvaccaṃ karissatī’’ti attanovāssa dāso atthi, bhujisso katova pabbājetabbo. Sāmikā dāsaṃ denti ‘‘imaṃ pabbājetha, sace abhiramissati, adāso vibbhamissati ce, amhākaṃ dāsova bhavissatīti ayaṃ tāvakāliko nāma, taṃ pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Nissāmikadāso hoti, sopi bhujisso katova pabbājetabbo. Ajānanto pabbājetvā vā upasampādetvā vā pacchā jānāti, bhujissaṃ kātumeva vaṭṭati.
为了说明这个道理,他们讲了这样一个故事:据说有一个良家婢女和一名男子一起从阿努拉德普勒城逃出来,住在罗诃那地方,生了一个儿子。这个儿子出家并受具足戒后,成了一个有惭耻心、对小事也谨慎不放逸的人。有一天,他问母亲:“近事女,您没有兄弟或姐妹吗?我从来没见过的亲戚一个也没有。”母亲说:“孩子,我本来是阿努拉德普勒城一户人家的婢女,和你父亲一起逃到这里住的。”这位持戒的比丘心想:“原来我的出家是不清净的啊!”生起了悚惧感,便向母亲问清那户人家的名字和家族,然后来到阿努拉德普勒城,站在那户人家的门口。即使人家说“尊者,请进来”,他也不进去。那家人出来问他:“尊者,有什么事吗?”他说:“你们家是不是有一个叫某某的婢女逃走了?”
“是的,尊者。”
“我是她的儿子。如果你们允许我,我才能得到清净的出家,你们本来是我的主人。”他们听了又欢喜又高兴,说:“尊者,您的出家是清净的!”于是让他成为自由人,安排他住在大寺,用四种资具供养照顾他。这位长老就依靠那户人家住着,最终证得了阿拉汉果。巴利
Imassa ca atthassa pakāsanatthaṃ idaṃ vatthuṃ vadanti – ekā kira kuladāsī ekena saddhiṃ anurādhapurā palāyitvā rohaṇe vasamānā puttaṃ paṭilabhi, so pabbajitvā upasampannakāle lajjī kukkuccako ahosi. Athekadivasaṃ mātaraṃ pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ upāsike tumhākaṃ bhātā vā bhaginī vā natthi, na kañci ñātakaṃ passāmī’’ti. ‘‘Tāta, ahaṃ anurādhapure kuladāsī, tava pitarā saddhiṃ palāyitvā idha vasāmī’’ti. Sīlavā bhikkhu ‘‘asuddhā kira me pabbajjā’’ti saṃvegaṃ labhitvā mātaraṃ tassa kulassa nāmagottaṃ pucchitvā anurādhapuraṃ āgamma tassa kulassa gharadvāre aṭṭhāsi. ‘‘Aticchatha bhante’’ti vuttepi nātikkami, te āgantvā ‘‘kiṃ bhante’’ti pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ itthannāmā dāsī palātā atthī’’ti? Atthi bhante. Ahaṃ tassā putto, sace maṃ tumhe anujānātha, pabbajjaṃ labhāmi, tumhe mayhaṃ sāmikāti . Te haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘suddhā bhante tumhākaṃ pabbajjā’’ti taṃ bhujissaṃ katvā mahāvihāre vasāpesuṃ catūhi paccayehi paṭijaggantā. Thero taṃ kulaṃ nissāya vasamānoyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti.
锻匠剃头者等事的讨论巴利
Kammārabhaṇḍuvatthādikathā
98-9 “锻匠光头”是指头光秃如同秤杆支点般平滑的人,也就是金匠的儿子,这里说的是五髻这个年轻男孩。“为剃发之事告知僧团”,意思是:我允许为了剃发之事向僧团请求许可。这里请求许可的方法是:把界内的比丘们召集起来,将想要出家的人带到那里,然后说三遍、两遍或一遍:“尊者,我为这个男孩的剃发之事告知僧团。”在这里,说“我为这个男孩的剃发之事告知僧团”,或者说“我为这个男孩的出家作沙门之事告知僧团”,或者说“我为这个男孩的出家之事告知僧团”,或者说“这个人想成为沙门”,或者说“这个人想出家”,这些说法都是可以的。巴利
98-9.Kammārabhaṇḍūti tulādhāramuṇḍako suvaṇṇakāraputto, pañcasikho taruṇadārakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṅghaṃ apaloketuṃ bhaṇḍukammāyāti saṅghaṃ bhaṇḍukammatthāya āpucchituṃ anujānāmīti attho. Tatrāyaṃ āpucchanavidhi – sīmāpariyāpanne bhikkhū sannipātetvā pabbajjāpekkhaṃ tattha netvā ‘‘saṅghaṃ bhante imassa dārakassa bhaṇḍukammaṃ āpucchāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā sakiṃ vā vattabbaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘imassa dārakassa bhaṇḍukammaṃ āpucchāmī’’tipi ‘‘imassa samaṇakaraṇaṃ āpucchāmī’’tipi ‘‘imassa pabbājanaṃ āpucchāmī’’tipi ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo hotukāmo’’tipi ‘‘ayaṃ pabbajitukāmo’’tipi vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.
如果那里是一个同类区域,确定有十位、二十位或三十位比丘居住,那么即使走到他们站立或坐着的地方,也应当按之前的方式请假。即使不带求出家者,也可以派年轻比丘或沙弥去,用“尊者,有一位求出家者,我们为他剃发之事请假”这样的方式,让他们代为请假,这也是可以的。巴利
Sace sabhāgaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, dasa vā vīsaṃ vā tiṃsaṃ vā bhikkhū vasantīti paricchedo paññāyati, tesaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ vā nisinnokāsaṃ vā gantvāpi purimanayeneva āpucchitabbaṃ. Pabbajjāpekkhaṃ vināva daharabhikkhū vā sāmaṇere vā pesetvāpi ‘‘eko bhante pabbajjāpekkho atthi tassa bhaṇḍukammaṃ āpucchāmā’’tiādinā nayena āpucchāpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
如果有比丘进入住处或树丛之类的地方睡觉,或者在做沙门该做的事,而想请假的人虽然到处找也没见到他们,心里就认为“我们已经向所有人都请过假了”,那么出家本来就是一件轻便的事,所以出家的人算是好好出家了,让他出家的人也没有犯戒。巴利
Sace keci bhikkhū senāsanaṃ vā gumbādīni vā pavisitvā niddāyanti vā samaṇadhammaṃ vā karonti, āpucchakā ca pariyesantāpi adisvā ‘‘sabbe āpucchitā amhehī’’ti saññino honti, pabbajjā nāma lahukaṃ kammaṃ, tasmā pabbajito supabbajitova pabbājentassāpi anāpatti.
如果那是一座大寺,住着几千位比丘,要把所有比丘都召集起来都很困难,更不用说按次序一一请假了。这种情况下,可以让他站在界内,或者到河边、海边等地方为他剃度出家。但如果他是刚剃头的人、还俗的人、尼乾陀等外道中的某一种人,或者头发只有两指长、不足两指长,那就不需要剪发,因此不用为剃发的事请假,也可以让这样的人出家。但如果头发超过两指长,哪怕只留一小撮发髻,就必须先为剃发的事请假,然后才能让他出家。优波离的事例,在《大分别》中已经说过了。巴利
Sace pana mahāvihāro hoti anekabhikkhusahassāvāso, sabbe bhikkhū sannipātetumpi dukkaraṃ, pageva paṭipāṭiyā āpucchituṃ, khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ vā ṭhatvā nadīsamuddādīni vā gantvā pabbājetabbo. Yo pana navamuṇḍo vā hoti vibbhantako vā nigaṇṭhādīsu aññataro vā dvaṅgulakeso vā ūnadvaṅgulakeso vā, tassa kesacchedanakiccaṃ natthi, tasmā bhaṇḍukammaṃ anāpucchitvāpi tādisaṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Dvaṅgulātirittakeso pana yo hoti antamaso ekasikhāmattadharopi, so bhaṇḍukammaṃ āpucchitvāva pabbājetabbo. Upālivatthu mahāvibhaṅge vuttanayameva.
100 所谓“蛇风病”,就是瘟疫。这种病一旦在哪里爆发,那一家的所有人畜都会死光。如果有人打破墙壁或屋顶逃出去,或者跑到别的村子等地方,就能活下来。在这里,父子们也是这样逃过一劫的。因此说:“父子们是剩余者。”巴利
100.Ahivātakarogenāti māribyādhinā; yatra hi so rogo uppajjati, taṃ kulaṃ dvipadacatuppadaṃ sabbaṃ nassati, yo bhittiṃ vā chadanaṃ vā bhinditvā palāyati, tirogāmādigato vā hoti, so muccati. Tathā cettha pitāputtā mucciṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pitāputtakā sesā hontī’’ti.
驱鸦者:如果有人左手拿着土块坐着,能够把飞来的乌鸦赶走,好让自己吃放在面前的食物,这种人就叫驱鸦者,可以允许他出家。巴利
Kākuḍḍepakanti yo vāmahatthena leḍḍuṃ gahetvā nisinno sakkoti āgatāgate kāke uḍḍāpetvā purato nikkhittaṃ bhattaṃ bhuñjituṃ, ayaṃ kākuḍḍepako nāma, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.
102 “短暂的”是指少量的;意思是只住几天。巴利
102.Ittaroti appamattako; katipāhameva vāso bhavissatīti attho.
103 “以少众”是指人数不足的众,也就是比丘僧团人数很少。“以不精通者”一直到“终生”这句:在这里,如果他找不到比自己年长的老师,那么即使他已经受达上六十年或七十年,也还是要在比他晚出家但精通的人面前,蹲坐着、合掌,说:“贤友,请你做我的老师,我依止您而住。”这样说三遍之后,就应该受依止。即使是请假入村的时候,也要蹲坐着、合掌,说:“老师,我请假入村。”这个方法适用于一切请假的情况。关于五法和六法中没有依止的人应该具备多少所闻,在《比丘尼教诫注释》中已经说过。因为没有那个,所以是少闻;因为有那个,所以是多闻,应该这样理解。其余部分按照前面所说的方法理解。巴利
103.Ogaṇenāti parihīnagaṇena; appamattakena bhikkhusaṅghenāti attho. Abyattena yāvajīvanti ettha sacāyaṃ vuḍḍhataraṃ ācariyaṃ na labhati, upasampadāya saṭṭhivasso vā sattativasso vā hotu, navakatarassāpi byattassa santike ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ācariyo me āvuso hohi, āyasmato nissāya vacchāmī’’ti evaṃ tikkhattuṃ vatvā nissayo gahetabbova. Gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchantenāpi ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmi ācariyā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Esa nayo sabbaāpucchanesu. Pañcakachakkesu cettha yattakaṃ sutaṃ nissayamuttakassa icchitabbaṃ, taṃ bhikkhunovādakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa natthitāya ca appassuto; atthitāya ca bahussutoti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva.
罗睺罗的故事巴利
Rāhulavatthukathā
105 向迦毗罗卫方向游行而去——这里有一段前后经过的说明。据说,苏托达那大王从菩萨出家那天起,就一直竖着耳朵听消息,想知道“我儿子出家时说‘我要成佛’,他到底成佛了没有”。他听到世尊精勤修行、证得正觉、转法轮等事情后,又听说“现在我儿子住在王舍城一带”,就命令一位大臣:“孩子啊,我老了,年纪大了,但愿我活着的时候能见到儿子。”那位大臣应诺说“好”,就带着一千人前往王舍城,礼拜世尊的双足后坐下。世尊为他说法,他生起信心,请求出家并受达上。于是世尊以“善来比丘”的方式让他受达上。他和随从们证得阿拉汉果后,就留在那里享受果定的快乐。国王又用同样的办法派了另外八位使者,他们也都和随从一起证得阿拉汉果,留在那里。对于“他们因如此这般缘故不回来”这一点,连一点消息都没有人向国王报告。巴利
105.Yenakapilavatthu tena cārikaṃ pakkāmīti ettha ayaṃ anupubbikathā. Suddhodanamahārājā kira bodhisattassa abhinikkhamanadivasato paṭṭhāya ‘‘mama putto buddho bhavissāmīti nikkhanto, jāto nu kho buddho’’ti pavattisavanatthaṃ ohitasotova viharati. So bhagavato padhānacariyañca sambodhiñca dhammacakkappavattanādīni ca suṇanto ‘‘idāni kira me putto rājagahaṃ upanissāya viharatī’’ti sutvā ekaṃ amaccaṃ āṇāpesi – ‘‘ahaṃ tāta vuḍḍho mahallako, sādhu me jīvantasseva puttaṃ dassehī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā purisasahassaparivāro rājagahaṃ gantvā bhagavato pāde vanditvā nisīdi. Athassa bhagavā dhammakathaṃ kathesi, so pasīditvā pabbajjañceva upasampadañca yāci. Tato naṃ bhagavā ehibhikkhūpasampadāya upasampādesi , so sapariso arahattaṃ patvā tattheva phalasamāpattisukhaṃ anubhavamāno vihāsi. Rājā teneva upāyena aparepi aṭṭha dūte pahiṇi, tepi sabbe saparisā tatheva arahattaṃ patvā tattheva vihariṃsu. ‘‘Iminā nāma kāraṇena te nāgacchantī’’ti rañño koci pavattimattampi ārocento natthi.
那时,国王想派一个名叫咖鲁达义的大臣去,此人与菩萨是同一天出生的。国王像之前那样请求他,他说:“如果我能出家,我就去让他见您。”国王便派他去,说:“即使你出家了,也要让我见到儿子。”他也带着一千人随行前往,同样和随从一起证得了阿拉汉果。有一天,当所有谷物都已收割完毕、农活都已放下、乡间百姓闲暇无事、陆生和水生的花都已盛开、道路适合行走的时候,他礼敬世尊,用大约六十首偈颂赞叹了旅途。世尊问:“这是为什么?”他回答说:“尊者,您的父亲苏托达那大王已经年迈,他派我来,说:‘趁我还活着,让我见见儿子。’尊者,恳请世尊摄受亲族,现在正是启程游化的时候。”世尊说:“既然如此,去通知僧团,让比丘们完成远行前的准备工作。”
“萨度,尊者。”长老照办了。世尊由来自鸯伽和摩揭陀的一万名良家子弟,以及来自迦毗罗卫的一万名比丘,总共两万名漏尽者围绕,从王舍城出发,前往距王舍城六十由旬的迦毗罗卫。他每天走一由旬,打算两个月到达,于是不紧不慢地踏上了游化之路。因此经中说:“他向迦毗罗卫方向游化而去。”巴利
Atha rājā bodhisattena saddhiṃ ekadivasaṃjātaṃ kāḷudāyiṃ nāma amaccaṃ pahiṇitukāmo purimanayeneva yāci, so ‘‘sace ahaṃ pabbajituṃ labhāmi, dassessāmī’’ti āha. Taṃ rājā ‘‘pabbajitvāpi me puttaṃ dassehī’’ti pahiṇi; sopi purisasahassaparivāro gantvā tatheva saparivāro arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So ekadivasaṃ sambhatesu sabbasassesu vissaṭṭhakammantesu janapadamanussesu pupphitesu thalajajalajapupphesu paṭipajjanakkhame magge bhagavantaṃ vanditvā saṭṭhimattāhi gāthāhi gamanavaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇesi. Bhagavā ‘‘kimeta’’nti pucchi. ‘‘Bhante tumhākaṃ pitā suddhodanamahārājā mahallakomhi, jīvantasseva me puttaṃ dassehī’’ti maṃ pesesi, sādhu bhante bhagavā ñātakānaṃ saṅgahaṃ karotu, kālo cārikaṃ pakkamitunti. Tena hi saṅghassa ārocehi, ‘‘bhikkhū gamiyavattaṃ pūressantī’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu bhante’’ti thero tathā akāsi. Bhagavā aṅgamagadhavāsīnaṃ kulaputtānaṃ dasahi sahassehi kapilavatthuvāsīnaṃ dasahīti sabbeheva vīsatisahassehi khīṇāsavehi parivuto rājagahā nikkhamitvā rājagahato saṭṭhiyojanikaṃ kapilavatthuṃ divase divase yojanaṃ gacchanto dvīhi māsehi pāpuṇissāmīti aturitacārikaṃ pakkāmi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘yena kapilavatthu tena cārikaṃ pakkāmī’’ti.
世尊这样离开后,伍达义长老从出发那天起,就在苏托达那大王的家里受用饭食。国王先供养长老,用香粉擦净他的钵,装满最好的食物,放在长老手里说:“请交给世尊。”长老也照这样做了。于是世尊在旅途中,一直享用国王供养的钵食。长老每天吃完饭,都会向国王报告:“今天世尊已经走到这里了。”他还讲说与佛陀功德有关的法义,让释迦族人对世尊生起信心。正因为这样,世尊把他列为第一,说:“比丘们,在我的比丘弟子中,最能令在家人生起信心的,就是咖鲁达义。”巴利
Evaṃ pakkante ca bhagavati udāyitthero nikkhantadivasato paṭṭhāya suddhodanamahārājassa gehe bhattakiccaṃ karoti. Rājā theraṃ parivisitvā pattaṃ gandhacuṇṇena ubbaṭṭetvā uttamabhojanassa pūretvā ‘‘bhagavato dehī’’ti therassa hatthe ṭhapeti. Theropi tatheva karoti. Iti bhagavā antarāmagge raññoyeva piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñji. Theropi ca bhattakiccāvasāne divase divase rañño āroceti ‘‘ajja bhagavā ettakaṃ āgato’’ti, buddhaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttāya ca kathāya sākiyānaṃ bhagavati saddhaṃ uppādesi. Teneva naṃ bhagavā ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kulappasādakānaṃ yadidaṃ kāḷudāyī’’ti etadagge ṭhapesi.
释迦族人听说世尊快要到了,也都聚在一起,说:“我们要去见一见亲族里最尊贵的人。”他们一边打量世尊住的地方,觉得榕树释迦园很幽静可爱,就让人把那里全部收拾布置好,然后手里拿着香、花等物去迎接。他们先派了打扮得漂漂亮亮的年幼城童和城女,接着又派了王子和公主,随后自己才跟上去,用香、花、香粉等供养世尊,把世尊迎到榕树园。在那里,世尊被两万漏尽者围绕,坐在铺设好的殊胜佛座上。释迦族人生来就傲慢,又固执于傲慢,他们心想:“悉达多太子比我们还年轻,是我们的弟弟、外甥、儿子、孙子。”于是对年幼的王子们说:“你们去礼拜,我们坐在后面。”巴利
Sākiyāpi kho anuppatte bhagavati ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātiseṭṭhaṃ passissāmā’’ti sannipatitvā bhagavato vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vīmaṃsamānā nigrodhasakkassa ārāmo ramaṇīyoti sallakkhetvā tattha sabbaṃ paṭijagganavidhiṃ kāretvā gandhapupphādihatthā paccuggamanaṃ karontā sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍite daharadahare nāgarikadārake ca dārikāyo ca paṭhamaṃ pahiṇiṃsu, tato rājakumāre ca rājakumārikāyo ca tesaṃ anantarā sāmaṃ gantvā gandhapupphacuṇṇādīhi pūjayamānā bhagavantaṃ gahetvā nigrodhārāmameva agamaṃsu. Tatra bhagavā vīsatisahassakhīṇāsavaparivuto paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīdi. Sākiyā mānajātikā mānathaddhā, te ‘‘siddhatthakumāro amhehi daharatarova amhākaṃ kaniṭṭho, bhāgineyyo, putto, nattā’’ti cintetvā daharadahare rājakumāre āhaṃsu – ‘‘tumhe vandatha, mayaṃ tumhākaṃ piṭṭhito nisīdissāmā’’ti.
当他们这样坐着时,世尊观察了他们的心意,心想:“我的亲族不肯礼拜我,来吧,我要让他们礼拜。”于是,世尊进入以神通为基础的第四禅,出定后以神通力升上空中,把脚上的尘土洒落在他们头上,就像在甘达姆巴树下显现双神变一样,示现了神通。国王看到这稀有之事,说道:“世尊,在您的诞生庆典那天,您被抱到婆罗门面前礼拜时,您的双脚翻转过来,落在婆罗门头顶上,我见到后便礼拜了您,这是我第一次礼拜。在播种庆典那天,您躺在阎浮树荫下的吉祥床上,我看到阎浮树荫没有移动,便礼拜了您的双足,这是我第二次礼拜。如今,我又见到这前所未见的神变,再次礼拜您的双足,这是我第三次礼拜。”巴利
Tesu evaṃ nisinnesu bhagavā tesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ oloketvā ‘‘na maṃ ñātī vandanti, handa ne vandāpayissāmī’’ti abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya iddhiyā ākāsaṃ abbhuggantvā tesaṃ sīse pādapaṃsuṃ okiramāno viya kaṇḍambamūle yamakapāṭihāriyasadisaṃ pāṭihāriyamakāsi. Rājā taṃ acchariyaṃ disvā āha – ‘‘bhagavā tumhākaṃ maṅgaladivase brāhmaṇassa vandanatthaṃ upanītānaṃ pāde vo parivattitvā brāhmaṇassa matthake patiṭṭhite disvāpi ahaṃ tumhe vandiṃ, ayaṃ me paṭhamavandanā. Vappamaṅgaladivase jambucchāyāya sirisayane nipannānaṃ vo jambucchāyāya aparivattanaṃ disvāpi pāde vandiṃ, ayaṃ me dutiyavandanā. Idāni imaṃ adiṭṭhapubbaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ disvāpi tumhākaṃ pāde vandāmi, ayaṃ me tatiyavandanā’’ti.
苏托达那大王礼拜世尊之后,释迦族里没有一个人还站着不拜,全都礼拜了。就这样,世尊让亲族们都行了礼,然后从空中降下来,坐在准备好的座位上。世尊坐下后,亲族聚会达到了最隆重的程度,所有人都一心一意地聚在一起。这时,大云降下莲花雨,红褐色的雨水往下倾流,发出声响,但没有任何人身上落下一滴。大家看到这个景象,都感到惊奇稀有。世尊说:“不是今天亲族聚会才降下莲花雨,过去也降过。”就着这个因缘,世尊讲了《韦桑德拉本生》。听完说法,所有人都起身礼拜,右绕之后离去。没有任何一个国王或大臣说了“明天请到我家受供”之后才离开的。巴利
Suddhodanamahārājena pana vandite bhagavati avanditvā ṭhito nāma ekasākiyopi nāhosi, sabbeyeva vandiṃsu. Iti bhagavā ñātayo vandāpetvā ākāsato oruyha paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisinne bhagavati sikhāppatto ñātisamāgamo ahosi, sabbe ekaggā sannipatiṃsu. Tato mahāmegho pokkharavassaṃ vassi, tambavaṇṇamudakaṃ heṭṭhā viravantaṃ gacchati. Kassaci sarīre ekabindumattampi na patati, taṃ disvā sabbe acchariyabbhutajātā ahesuṃ. Bhagavā ‘‘na idāneva mayhaṃ ñātisamāgame pokkharavassaṃ vassati, atītepi vassī’’ti imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā vessantarajātakaṃ kathesi. Dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sabbe uṭṭhāya vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkamiṃsu. Ekopi rājā vā rājamahāmatto vā ‘‘sve amhākaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā gato nāma natthi.
第二天,世尊在两万比丘的簇拥下,进入迦毗罗卫城乞食。没有人出来迎接,也没有人邀请他,或者接过他的钵。世尊站在城门的门槛石上,心里盘算:“过去诸佛在故乡城市里乞食时,是怎么走的呢?是不按顺序、专往有权势的人家去,还是次第挨家乞食呢?”接着他观察诸佛的做法,发现没有哪一尊佛是挑着人家乞食的,于是下定决心:“我现在也要继承这个传统、这个规矩,将来我的弟子们也学我的样子,圆满履行乞食的行仪。”于是世尊从城边第一家开始,一户接一户地依次乞食。
“圣者悉达多太子在乞食!”这个消息传开后,人们纷纷从四五层高楼宫殿的狮子窗里探出头来,争相观看。罗睺罗的母亲亚索特拉王后也心想:“听说圣者太子当年在这座城里,以盛大的王威,乘坐金轿等巡游,如今剃除了须发,身穿袈裟,手拿瓦钵在乞食,不知道还端不端庄?”她打开狮子窗向外望去,只见世尊以种种光色照亮了城中的街道,具足佛陀的威仪,光明赫赫。于是她从顶髻一直到脚掌,用八首名为“人狮偈”的偈颂赞叹世尊,然后来到国王面前,禀告说:“您的儿子在乞食。”
国王听了,心里震动,用手整理好衣袍,急急忙忙地出去,快步走到世尊面前站定,说道:“尊者,您为什么要让我们羞愧呢?为什么要乞食呢?难道您觉得这么多比丘得不到饭食吗?”世尊回答说:“大王,这是我们的传统做法。”国王说:“尊者,难道我们释迦族的大选王之王统不算王统吗?在那个王统里,连一个刹帝利种姓的人乞食都没有过啊。”世尊说:“大王,那是你的王统,而我们的王统是佛陀的王统,过去诸佛都是乞食的。”世尊就站在街道中间这样说——巴利
Bhagavā dutiyadivase vīsatibhikkhusahassaparivāro kapilavatthuṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi, na koci paccuggantvā nimantesi vā pattaṃ vā aggahesi. Bhagavā indakhīle ṭhito āvajjesi – ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho pubbe buddhā kulanagare piṇḍāya cariṃsu, kiṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā issarajanānaṃ gharāni agamaṃsu, udāhu sapadānacārikaṃ cariṃsū’’ti. Tato ekabuddhassapi uppaṭipāṭiyā gamanaṃ adisvā ‘‘mayāpi idāni ayameva vaṃso ayaṃ paveṇī paggahetabbā, āyatiñca me sāvakāpi mameva anusikkhantā piṇḍacāriyavattaṃ pūressantī’’ti koṭiyaṃ niviṭṭhagehato paṭṭhāya sapadānaṃ piṇḍāya carati. ‘‘Ayyo kira siddhatthakumāro piṇḍāya caratī’’ti catubhūmakādīsu pāsādesu sīhapañjaraṃ vivaritvā mahājano dassanabyāvaṭo ahosi. Rāhulamātāpi devī ‘‘ayyaputto kira imasmiṃyeva nagare mahatā rājānubhāvena suvaṇṇasivikādīhi vicaritvā idāni kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyavatthavasano kapālahattho piṇḍāya carati, ‘‘sobhati nu kho no vā’’ti sīhapañjaraṃ vivaritvā olokayamānā bhagavantaṃ nānāvirāgasamujjalāya sarīrappabhāya nagaravīthiyo obhāsetvā buddhasiriyā virocamānaṃ disvā uṇhīsato paṭṭhāya yāva pādatalā narasīhagāthāhi nāma aṭṭhahi gāthāhi abhitthavitvā rañño santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ putto piṇḍāya caratī’’ti rañño ārocesi. Rājā saṃviggahadayo hatthena sāṭakaṃ saṇṭhāpayamāno turitaturitaṃ nikkhamitvā vegena gantvā bhagavato purato ṭhatvā āha – ‘‘kiṃ bhante amhe lajjāpetha, kimatthaṃ piṇḍāya caratha, kiṃ ettakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ na sakkā bhattaṃ laddhunti evaṃsaññino ahuvatthā’’ti. Vaṃsacārittametaṃ mahārāja amhākanti. Nanu bhante amhākaṃ mahāsammatakhattiyavaṃso nāma vaṃso, tattha ca ekakhattiyopi bhikkhācāro nāma natthīti. Ayaṃ mahārāja vaṃso nāma tava vaṃso, amhākaṃ pana buddhavaṃso vaṃso nāma, sabbabuddhā ca piṇḍacārikā ahesunti antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhitova –
“ 要精勤努力,不要放逸,要好好修行善法。
依法而行的人,在这一世和下一世都能安乐地生活。”巴利
‘‘Uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyya, dhammaṃ sucaritaṃ care; Dhammacārī sukhaṃ seti, asmiṃ loke paramhi cā’’ti.
他说了这首偈颂。偈颂结束时,国王证得了入流果。巴利
Imaṃ gāthamāha. Gāthāpariyosāne rājā sotāpattiphalaṃ sacchākāsi.
“ 应行善法,勿行恶法;
行持正法的人,在这一世和下一世都能安住于安乐。巴利
‘‘Dhammaṃ care sucaritaṃ, na naṃ duccaritaṃ care; Dhammacārī sukhaṃ seti, asmiṃ loke paramhi cā’’ti.
他听完这首偈颂后,证得了一来果;听完《护法本生》后,证得了不来果;临终时,他躺在白伞盖下的吉祥卧榻上,就证得了阿拉汉果。对国王来说,并没有林居精勤修行这件事。巴利
Imaṃ pana gāthaṃ sutvā sakadāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāsi, dhammapālajātakaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāsi, maraṇasamaye setacchattassa heṭṭhā sirisayane nipannoyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Araññavāsena padhānānuyogakiccaṃ rañño nāhosi.
国王证得入流果后,接过世尊的钵,把世尊和随行大众一起请上大宫殿,用精美的嚼食和啖食供养。饮食结束后,除了罗睺罗的母亲以外,所有后宫眷属都来礼拜世尊。她虽然被侍从们劝道:“去礼拜圣太子吧”,却说:“如果我真有功德,圣太子自己会来;他来了,我就礼拜。”于是没有去。这时世尊让国王接过钵,与两位上首弟子一同前往公主的寝宫,说道:“公主随心礼拜时,什么都不要说。”然后坐在铺设好的座位上。她迅速赶来,抱住世尊的脚踝,用头顶触碰世尊的脚背,反复转动,随心礼拜。巴利
Sotāpattiphalañca sacchikatvā eva pana bhagavato pattaṃ gahetvā saparisaṃ bhagavantaṃ mahāpāsādaṃ āropetvā paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena parivisi. Bhattakiccāvasāne sabbaṃ itthāgāraṃ āgantvā bhagavantaṃ vandi ṭhapetvā rāhulamātaraṃ. Sā pana ‘‘gaccha ayyaputtaṃ vandāhī’’ti parijanena vuccamānāpi ‘‘sace mayhaṃ guṇo atthi, sayameva ayyaputto āgamissati , āgataṃ naṃ vandissāmī’’ti vatvā na agamāsi. Atha bhagavā rājānaṃ pattaṃ gāhāpetvā dvīhi aggasāvakehi saddhiṃ rājadhītāya sirigabbhaṃ gantvā ‘‘rājadhītā yathāruciyā vandamānā na kiñci vattabbā’’ti vatvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Sā vegena āgantvā gopphakesu gahetvā pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ sīsaṃ parivattetvā parivattetvā yathājjhāsayaṃ vandi.
国王对世尊讲述了公主对世尊所具有的慈爱、敬重等种种功德。世尊说:“大王,如今她智慧已经成熟,在你的保护下能守护好自己,这并不稀奇。过去她无人保护,在山脚下游荡,智慧还未成熟时,就已经能守护自己了。”说完,世尊便讲说了《月紧那罗本生》。巴利
Rājā rājadhītāya bhagavati sinehabahumānādiguṇasampattiṃ kathesi. Bhagavā ‘‘anacchariyaṃ mahārāja yaṃ idāni paripakke ñāṇe tayā rakkhiyamānā rājadhītā attānaṃ rakkhi, sā pubbe anārakkhā pabbatapāde vicaramānā aparipakke ñāṇe attānaṃ rakkhī’’ti vatvā candakinnarījātakaṃ kathesi.
就在同一天,难陀王子举行了剃发、加冠、新居落成、婚礼和白伞这五种大庆典。世尊让南达拿好钵,说了祝福的话,就从座位上起身离开了。国中第一美女看见王子正往外走,就伸长脖子望着他说:圣尊夫君,您可要快点回来啊。南达虽然想对世尊说请把钵拿回去,却不敢开口,就这样一路走到了寺院。世尊不顾南达心里不愿意,还是让他出家了。就这样,世尊来到迦毗罗卫城后,在第二天让南达出了家。巴利
Taṃdivasameva ca nandarājakumārassa kesavissajjanaṃ paṭṭabandho gharamaṅgalaṃ āvāhamaṅgalaṃ chattamaṅgalanti pañca mahāmaṅgalāni honti. Bhagavā nandaṃ pattaṃ gāhāpetvā maṅgalaṃ vatvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Janapadakalyāṇī kumāraṃ gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘tuvaṭaṃ kho ayyaputta āgaccheyyāsī’’ti vatvā gīvaṃ pasāretvā olokesi. Sopi bhagavantaṃ ‘‘pattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vattuṃ avisahamāno vihāraṃyeva agamāsi. Taṃ anicchamānaṃyeva bhagavā pabbājesi. Iti bhagavā kapilapuraṃ āgantvā dutiyadivase nandaṃ pabbājesi.
第七天,罗睺罗的母亲把王子打扮好,派他到世尊那里去,说:孩子,你看那位被两万沙门众围绕、肤色如金、形貌如梵天一样的沙门,他就是你的父亲。他曾经拥有巨大的财富,可自从他出家离开后,我们就再也没见过那些财富。去吧,向他讨要遗产。孩子,我将撑起华盖做转轮王,我需要钱财,把钱给我。因为儿子本来就是父亲财产的主人。罗睺罗王子一到世尊跟前,就感受到父亲的慈爱,心里欢喜,说道:沙门,您的身影真清凉啊。他还说了许多其他适合自己身份的话,然后站在一旁。世尊吃完饭,作了随喜祝福,就从座位上起身离开了。王子也跟着世尊后面走,一边走一边说:沙门,给我遗产!沙门,给我遗产!因此经中说:次第游行,来到迦毗罗卫……沙门,给我遗产。巴利
Sattame divase rāhulamātā kumāraṃ alaṅkaritvā bhagavato santikaṃ pesesi – ‘‘passa tāta etaṃ vīsatisahassasamaṇaparivutaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ brahmarūpavaṇṇaṃ samaṇaṃ, ayaṃ te pitā, etassa mahantā nidhayo ahesuṃ, tyassa nikkhamanato paṭṭhāya na passāma, gaccha naṃ dāyajjaṃ yāca, ahaṃ tāta kumāro chattaṃ ussāpetvā cakkavattī bhavissāmi, dhanena me attho, dhanaṃ me dehi, sāmiko hi putto pitusantakassā’’ti. Rāhulakumāro bhagavato santikaṃ gantvāva pitusinehaṃ paṭilabhitvā haṭṭhacitto ‘‘sukhā te samaṇa chāyā’’ti vatvā aññampi bahuṃ attano anurūpaṃ vadanto aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavā katabhattakicco anumodanaṃ katvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Kumāropi ‘‘dāyajjaṃ me samaṇa dehi, dāyajjaṃ me samaṇa dehī’’ti bhagavantaṃ anubandhi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anupubbena cārikaṃ caramāno yena kapilavatthu…pe… dāyajjaṃ me samaṇa dehī’’ti.
这时,世尊吩咐具寿舍利弗。世尊没有让王子回去,随从们也不敢阻拦跟着世尊走的王子。到了寺院后,世尊心想:“这孩子想要属于父亲的财富,可那是随顺轮回、充满过患的。不如我把在菩提树下证得的七种圣财给他,让他成为出世间遗产的主人吧。”于是吩咐具寿舍利弗。吩咐之后又说:“那么,舍利弗,你来让罗睺罗王子出家吧。”因为王子正在求取遗产,所以这话的意思是:为了让他获得出世间的遗产,你应当度他出家。巴利
Athakho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ āmantesīti bhagavā kumāraṃ na nivattāpesi, parijanopi bhagavatā saddhiṃ gacchantaṃ nivattetuṃ na visahati. Atha ārāmaṃ gantvā ‘‘yaṃ ayaṃ pitusantakaṃ dhanaṃ icchati, taṃ vaṭṭānugataṃ savighātakaṃ, handassa bodhimaṇḍe paṭiladdhaṃ sattavidhaṃ ariyadhanaṃ demi, lokuttaradāyajjassa naṃ sāmikaṃ karomī’’ti āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ āmantesi. Āmantetvā ca panāha – ‘‘tena hi tvaṃ sāriputta rāhulakumāraṃ pabbājehī’’ti. Yasmā ayaṃ dāyajjaṃ yācati, tasmā naṃ lokuttaradāyajjapaṭilābhāya pabbājehīti attho.
现在,世尊当初在波罗奈以三皈依开许了出家与达上。后来,世尊废止了达上,改为以依止师的身份来安立,并以白四甘马开许了达上。然而,出家既没有被废止,也没有被重新开许。因此,未来的比丘们会产生疑惑:“这种出家,过去和达上是一样的,那现在到底也应该像达上那样通过甘马仪式来完成,还是仍然通过三皈依来完成呢?”世尊知道这个情况后,想再次以三皈依来开许沙弥出家。于是,法将舍利弗明白了世尊的心意,想请世尊重新开许出家,便说道:“尊者,我该怎么让罗睺罗王子出家呢?”巴利
Idāni yā sā bhagavatā bārāṇasiyaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca anuññātā, tato yasmā upasampadaṃ paṭikkhipitvā garubhāve ṭhapetvā ñatticatutthena kammena upasampadā anuññātā, pabbajjā pana neva paṭikkhittā, na puna anuññātā, tasmā anāgate bhikkhūnaṃ vimati uppajjissati – ‘‘ayaṃ pabbajjā nāma pubbe upasampadāsadisā, kiṃ nu kho idānipi upasampadā viya kammavācāya eva kattabbā, udāhu saraṇagamanehī’’ti. Imañca panatthaṃ viditvā bhagavā puna tīhi saraṇagamanehi sāmaṇerapabbajjaṃ anujānitukāmo, tasmā dhammasenāpati taṃ bhagavato ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā bhagavantaṃ puna pabbajjaṃ anujānāpetukāmo āha – ‘‘kathāhaṃ bhante rāhulakumāraṃ pabbājemī’’ti.
当时,具寿舍利弗让罗睺罗王子出家:大目犍连长老为王子剃掉头发,给了他袈裟,并授了三皈依。大迦叶长老担任教诫师。不过,因为出家与达上都以戒师为根本,在这件事上戒师才是主导者,而不是教诫师,所以经中说:“当时,具寿舍利弗让罗睺罗王子出家。”巴利
Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto rāhulakumāraṃ pabbājesīti kumārassa mahāmoggallānatthero kese chinditvā kāsāyāni datvā saraṇāni adāsi. Mahākassapatthero ovādācariyo ahosi. Yasmā pana upajjhāyamūlakā pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca, upajjhāyova tattha issaro, na ācariyo, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmā sāriputto rāhulakumāraṃ pabbājesī’’ti.
净饭王听到“王子出家了”这个消息后,心里生起极大的震动,但他还是能把该说的话都说出来。这里要说明:出家人靠乞食过活,如果他对人说“我求一个恩惠”,对方回答“你求吧”,这话并不合适,也不是诸佛的习惯做法,所以经文里说:“乔达摩,诸如来已经超越了恩惠。”意思是:尊者,我求的是对您来说可以给、没有过失的事——您能给,又没有过失,而且我接受之后不会被有智慧的人责备,这就是我求的事。同样的情形,对难陀是这样,对罗睺罗就更严重了。据说,就像对菩萨一样,在吉祥日那天,相师们也为难陀和罗睺罗预言说“会成为转轮王”。于是国王心想:“我要看到儿子当转轮王的荣耀。”他满怀热望,却因为世尊出家而遭受了巨大的失望。后来他又想:“我要看到难陀当转轮王的荣耀。”于是又生起热望,可世尊也让难陀出了家。他忍受了那份痛苦之后,又想:“现在我要看到罗睺罗当转轮王的荣耀。”再次生起热望,世尊却也让罗睺罗出了家。因此,他心里生起了更大的痛苦:“现在家族血脉也断了,还谈什么转轮王的荣耀?”所以经文说:“同样的情形,对难陀是这样,对罗睺罗就更严重了。”不过要知道,国王后来证得了不来果。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘kumāro pabbajito’’ti sutvā uppannasaṃvegena hadayena athakho suddhodano sakkoti sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ. Tattha yasmā uñchācariyāya jīvato pabbajitassa avisesena ‘‘varaṃ yācāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘yācassū’’ti vacanaṃ appatirūpaṃ, na ca buddhānaṃ āciṇṇaṃ, tasmā ‘‘atikkantavarā kho gotama tathāgatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yañca bhante kappati yañca anavajjanti yaṃ tumhākañceva dātuṃ kappati, anavajjañca hoti, mama ca sampaṭicchanapaccayā viññūhi na garahitabbaṃ , taṃ yācāmīti attho. Tathā nande adhimattaṃ rāhuleti yatheva kira bodhisattaṃ evaṃ nandampi rāhulampi maṅgaladivase nemittakā ‘‘cakkavattī bhavissatī’’ti byākariṃsu. Atha rājā ‘‘puttassa cakkavattisiriṃ passissāmī’’ti ussāhajāto bhagavato pabbajjāya mahantaṃ icchāvighātaṃ pāpuṇi. Tato ‘‘nandassa cakkavattisiriṃ passissāmī’’ti ussāhaṃ janesi, tampi bhagavā pabbājesi. Iti tampi dukkhaṃ adhivāsetvā ‘‘idāni rāhulassa cakkavattisiriṃ passissāmī’’ti ussāhaṃ janesi, tampi bhagavā pabbājesi. Tenassa ‘‘idāni kulavaṃsopi pacchinno, kuto cakkavattisirī’’ti adhikataraṃ dukkhaṃ uppajji. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tathā nande adhimattaṃ rāhule’’ti. Rañño pana ito pacchā anāgāmiphalappatti veditabbā.
“萨度,尊者们!”他为什么这样说呢?据说他是这样想的:“像我这样,身为佛的弟子、法的弟子、僧的弟子,在自己最疼爱的儿子出家时,都受不了与亲人分离的痛苦,其他人面对儿孙出家,又怎么承受得了呢?所以,但愿别人先不要遭遇这样的痛苦。”于是他这样说了。世尊说:“国王是在讲导向出离的教法。”说完法谈之后,世尊制定了学处:“诸比丘,没有得到父母允许的儿子,不应让他出家。”巴利
Sādhu bhante ayyāti idaṃ kasmā āha? So kira cintesi – ‘‘yatra hi nāma ahampi buddhamāmako dhammamāmako saṅghamāmako samāno attano piyataraputte pabbājiyamāne ñātiviyogadukkhaṃ adhivāsetuṃ na sakkomi, aññe janā puttanattakesu pabbājitesu kathaṃ adhivāsessanti, tasmā aññesampi tāva evarūpaṃ dukkhaṃ mā ahosī’’ti āha. Bhagavā ‘‘sāsane niyyānikakāraṇaṃ rājā vadatī’’ti dhammakathaṃ katvā ‘‘na bhikkhave ananuññāto mātāpitūhi putto pabbājetabbo’’ti sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi.
这里,“父母”是指亲生父母。如果父母都还在,两个人都要征得同意。如果父亲已经去世,或者母亲已经去世,就征得还在世的那一方的同意。即使父母已经出家了,也一样要征得同意。征得同意时,应该自己亲自去请求同意,或者派别人去,或者就对那个人说:“你去,向父母请求同意之后再回来。”如果他说“我已经得到同意了”,就应该相信他的话,让他出家。如果父亲自己已经出家,也想让儿子出家,那也必须先征得母亲同意才能让他出家。如果母亲想让女儿出家,也必须先征得父亲同意才能让她出家。如果父亲不要妻儿,跑掉了,母亲把儿子交给比丘们说“请让他出家”,被问到“他父亲在哪里”时,她说“跑去玩‘心之游戏’了”,这种情况可以让他出家。如果母亲跟某个男人私奔了,父亲说“请让他出家”而把儿子交出来,这里也同样适用。如果父亲出门在外,母亲同意儿子出家,说“请让他出家”,被问到“他父亲在哪里”时,她说“你们管他父亲做什么?我来负责”,这种情况可以让他出家。这是《库伦德疏》里说的。巴利
Tattha mātāpitūhīti jananijanake sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sace dve atthi, dvepi āpucchitabbā. Sace pitā mato mātā vā, yo jīvati so āpucchitabbo. Pabbajitāpi āpucchitabbāva. Āpucchantena sayaṃ vā gantvā āpucchitabbaṃ, añño vā pesetabbo, so eva vā pesetabbo ‘‘gaccha mātāpitaro āpucchitvā ehī’’ti. Sace ‘‘anuññātomhī’’ti vadati, saddahantena pabbājetabbo. Pitā sayaṃ pabbajito puttampi pabbājetukāmo hoti, mātaraṃ āpucchitvāva pabbājetu. Mātā vā dhītaraṃ pabbājetukāmā, pitaraṃ āpucchitvāva pabbājetu. Pitā puttadārena anatthiko palāyi, mātā ‘‘imaṃ pabbājethā’’ti puttaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ deti, ‘‘pitāssa kuhi’’nti vutte ‘‘cittakeḷiyaṃ kīḷituṃ palāto’’ti vadati, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Mātā kenaci purisena saddhiṃ palātā hoti, pitā pana ‘‘pabbājethā’’ti deti, etthāpi eseva nayo. Pitā vippavuttho hoti, mātā puttaṃ ‘‘pabbājethā’’ti anujānāti, ‘‘pitā tassa kuhi’’nti vutte ‘‘kiṃ tumhākaṃ pitarā, ahaṃ jānissāmī’’ti vadati, pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
如果父母已经去世,孩子是在继母等人身边养大的,那么当他要出家时,亲属们可能会争吵或指责,所以为了避免争执,必须先征得同意才能让他出家。如果没有征得同意就让他出家,并不犯戒。小时候把他接来抚养的人,就算是他的父母,对他们也同样适用这个规则。儿子依靠自己生活,而不是依靠父母。即使他是国王,也还是必须先征得同意才能出家。如果已经得到父母允许出了家,后来他又还俗,哪怕还俗再出家一百次,每次回来时都还是要重新征得同意才能让他出家。如果父母这样说:“这人还俗回家后不给我们做事,出家后又不尽你们的义务,以后不用再问他了,他什么时候来,你们就什么时候让他出家。”像这样被父母放手之后,即使不再征得同意,也可以让他出家。巴利
Mātāpitaro matā, dārako cūḷamātādīnaṃ santike saṃvaddho, tasmiṃ pabbājiyamāne ñātakā kalahaṃ vā karonti, khiyyanti vā, tasmā vivādupacchedanatthaṃ āpucchitvāva pabbājetabbo. Anāpucchā pabbājentassa pana āpatti natthi. Daharakāle gahetvā posanakā mātāpitaro nāma honti, tesupi eseva nayo. Putto attānaṃ nissāya jīvati, na mātāpitaro. Sacepi rājā hoti, āpucchitvāva pabbājetabbo. Mātāpitūhi anuññāto pabbajitvā puna vibbhamati, sacepi satakkhattuṃ pabbajitvā vibbhamati, āgatāgatakāle punappunaṃ āpucchitvāva pabbājetabbo. Sace evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘ayaṃ vibbhamitvā gehaṃ āgato amhākaṃ kammaṃ na karoti, pabbajitvā tumhākaṃ vattaṃ na pūreti, natthi imassāpucchanakiccaṃ, āgatāgataṃ pabbājeyyāthā’’ti evaṃ nissaṭṭhaṃ puna anāpucchāpi pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.
如果有人在孩子还很小的时候就把他交出去,说“这孩子给你们了,你们想让他出家的时候就让他出家”,那么这孩子后来再来时,不用再征求同意就可以让他出家。但如果是在孩子很小的时候,父母已经同意说“尊者,请让这孩子出家”,后来孩子长大了,父母又不同意,那就不可以不经同意让他出家。有人和父母吵了架,跑来说“请让我出家”。如果对他说“先去征得同意再来”,他却说“我不去。你们要是不让我出家,我就烧掉精舍,或者拿刀砍你们,或者对你们的亲戚和护持者毁坏园林等等,给他们制造灾祸;或者从树上跳下来死掉;或者钻进盗贼堆里;或者跑到别的国家去”——那么为了保住他的命,就应该让他出家。如果他的父母后来跑来质问:“你们为什么让我们的儿子出家?”就把事情告诉他们,说:“我们是为了保住他才让他出家的,你们与儿子知晓(自行处理)。”如果他爬上树说“我要跳下去”,已经松开手脚,这时候让他出家也是应该的。巴利
Yopi daharakāleyeva ‘‘ayaṃ tumhākaṃ dinno, yadā icchatha, tadā pabbājeyyāthā’’ti evaṃ dinno hoti, sopi āgatāgato puna anāpucchāva pabbājetabbo. Yaṃ pana daharakāleyeva ‘‘imaṃ bhante pabbājeyyāthā’’ti anujānitvā pacchā vuḍḍhippattakāle nānujānanti, ayaṃ na anāpucchā pabbājetabbo. Eko mātāpitūhi saddhiṃ bhaṇḍitvā ‘‘pabbājetha ma’’nti āgacchati, ‘‘āpucchitvā ehī’’ti ca vutto ‘‘nāhaṃ gacchāmi, sace maṃ na pabbājetha, vihāraṃ vā jhāpemi, satthena vā tumhe paharāmi, tumhākaṃ ñātakaupaṭṭhākānaṃ vā ārāmacchedanādīhi anatthaṃ uppādemi, rukkhā vā patitvā marāmi, coramajjhaṃ vā pavisāmi, desantaraṃ vā gacchāmī’’ti vadati, taṃ jīvasseva rakkhaṇatthāya pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace panassa mātāpitaro āgantvā ‘‘kasmā amhākaṃ puttaṃ pabbājayitthā’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ tamatthaṃ ārocetvā ‘‘rakkhaṇatthāya naṃ pabbājayimha, paññāyatha tumhe puttenā’’ti vattabbā. ‘‘Rukkhā patissāmī’’ti āruhitvā pana hatthapāde muñcantaṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.
一个人即使独自去了外地,请求出家,如果他出发前已经征得了父母同意,就可以给他出家。如果没有征得同意,就应该派一个年轻比丘去替他征得同意,然后再给他出家——如果路途太远的话;也可以先给他出家,再让他和比丘们一起去见父母。不过《库伦德注》里说:“如果路途遥远,又要穿过大片荒野,心里想着‘我们去了以后再征得同意’,就可以给他出家。”如果父母有很多儿子,他们这样说:“尊者,这些孩子里您想度哪个出家,就度哪个吧。”那就先观察一下孩子们,然后随自己的意愿给其中哪一个出家。即使整个家族或整个村庄都已经允许了,说:“尊者,在这个家族里或这个村庄里,您想度哪个出家,就度哪个吧。”那也是随自己的意愿给哪一个出家。巴利
Ekopi videsaṃ gantvā pabbajjaṃ yācati, āpucchitvā ce gato, pabbājetabbo. No ce daharabhikkhuṃ pesetvā āpucchāpetvā pabbājetabbo, atidūrañce hoti; pabbājetvāpi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ pesetvā dassetuṃ vaṭṭati. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘sace dūraṃ hoti maggo ca mahākantāro, ‘gantvā āpucchissāmā’ti pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Sace pana mātāpitūnaṃ bahū puttā honti, evañca vadanti – ‘‘bhante etesaṃ dārakānaṃ yaṃ icchatha, taṃ pabbājeyyāthā’’ti. Dārake vīmaṃsitvā yaṃ icchati, so pabbājetabbo. Sacepi sakalena kulena vā gāmena vā anuññātaṃ hoti ‘‘bhante imasmiṃ kule vā gāme vā yaṃ icchatha, taṃ pabbājeyyāthā’’ti. Yaṃ icchati, so pabbājetabboti.
而所谓“他努力到何种程度”,也就是他能力所及的范围。巴利
Yāvatakevā pana ussahatīti yattake sakkoti.
学处罚业事例讲述巴利
Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathā
106 在十条学处里,违犯前五条是驱摈的事例,违犯后五条是惩罚的事例。巴利
106. Dasasu sikkhāpadesu purimānaṃ pañcannaṃ atikkamo nāsanavatthu , pacchimānaṃ atikkamo daṇḍakammavatthu.
107 不恭敬:比丘们不把他安立在上座的位置、有权威的位置上。行为不相应:不能共同生活,意思是生活方式不同。为无利而努力:想方设法让他们得不到利养。为损害:为了带来灾祸。为无住处:努力想着“怎样才能让他们不住在这个住处”。辱骂、诽谤:辱骂并且用恐吓来威胁。离间:搬弄是非来离间。作障碍:阻止说“不要进这里”。所住或所归之处:他住的地方或进入的地方;这两者都是指他自己的精舍和雨季分配给他的坐卧处。巴利
107.Appatissāti bhikkhū jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne issariyaṭṭhāne na ṭhapenti. Asabhāgavuttikāti samānajīvikā na bhavanti, visabhāgajīvikāti attho. Alābhāya parisakkatīti yathā lābhaṃ na labhanti; evaṃ parakkamati. Anatthāyāti upaddavāya. Avāsāyāti ‘‘kinti imasmiṃ āvāse na vaseyyu’’nti parakkamati. Akkosati paribhāsatīti akkosati ceva bhayadassanena ca tajjeti. Bhedetīti pesuññaṃ upasaṃharitvā bhedeti. Āvaraṇaṃ kātunti ‘‘mā idha pavisā’’ti nivāraṇaṃ kātuṃ. Yattha vā vasati yattha vā paṭikkamatīti yattha vasati vā pavisati vā; ubhayenāpi attano pariveṇañca vassaggena pattasenāsanañca vuttaṃ.
对入口之食作障碍,意思是阻止说“今天不要嚼,不要吃”,就这样拦着。比丘们,不应该对入口之食作障碍。在这里,无论是说“不要嚼,不要吃”,还是心想“我要阻止他吃东西”而把钵和袈裟收起来,在所有这些做法里都是恶作。不过,对于行为不端、不听教导的沙弥,执行了体罚之后,把粥、饭、钵或袈裟拿给他看,说“体罚做到这个程度,你就能得到这个”,这样说是可以的。因为世尊说的只是障碍性的体罚。但结集法的长老们说,按照所犯的过失,也可以让他去搬水、搬柴、搬沙等,所以那也是应该做的。而且这必须出于怜悯,心想“他会收敛、会停下来”,不能以“他会完蛋、会还俗”这类邪恶心态,打着“我在执行体罚”的旗号,让他躺在热石头上,或者把石块、砖头等放在他头上,或者让他进入水里。巴利
Mukhadvārikaṃ āhāraṃ āvaraṇaṃ karontīti ‘‘ajja mā khāda, mā bhuñjā’’ti evaṃ nivārenti. Na bhikkhave mukhadvāriko āhāro āvaraṇaṃ kātabboti ettha ‘‘mā khāda, mā bhuñjā’’ti vadatopi ‘‘āhāraṃ nivāressāmī’’ti pattacīvaraṃ anto nikkhipatopi sabbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ. Anācārassa pana dubbacasāmaṇerassa daṇḍakammaṃ katvā yāguṃ vā bhattaṃ vā pattacīvaraṃ vā dassetvā ‘‘ettake nāma daṇḍakamme āhaṭe idaṃ lacchasī’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Bhagavatā hi āvaraṇameva daṇḍakammaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi pana aparādhānurūpaṃ udakadāruvālikādīnaṃ āharāpanampi kātabbanti vuttaṃ, tasmā tampi kātabbaṃ. Tañca kho ‘‘oramissati viramissatī’’ti anukampāya, na ‘‘nassissati vibbhamissatī’’tiādinayappavattena pāpajjhāsayena ‘‘daṇḍakammaṃ karomī’’ti ca uṇhapāsāṇe vā nipajjāpetuṃ pāsāṇiṭṭhakādīni vā sīse nikkhipāpetuṃ udakaṃ vā pavesetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
没有事先请示的障碍等事缘的讲述巴利
Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthuādikathā
108 诸比丘,“不禀告戒师”在这里的意思是:如果已经三次对戒师说“你们的沙弥犯了这样的过错,请你们处罚他”,而戒师仍然不作处罚,那就适宜自己来处罚。即使戒师一开始就说“我的沙弥若有过失,你们作处罚”,那也适宜自己处罚。对沙弥是这样,对共住弟子和近住弟子也同样适宜作处罚。巴利
108.Nabhikkhave upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchāti ettha ‘‘tumhākaṃ sāmaṇerassa ayaṃ nāma aparādho, daṇḍakammamassa karothā’’ti tikkhattuṃ vutte, sace upajjhāyo daṇḍakammaṃ na karoti, sayaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sacepi āditova upajjhāyo vadati ‘‘mayhaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ dose sati tumhe daṇḍakammaṃ karothā’’ti kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Yathā ca sāmaṇerānaṃ evaṃ saddhivihārikantevāsikānampi daṇḍakammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
“引诱”的意思是:用“我们会给你钵、会给你衣”这样的话,为了让他们来服侍自己而把他们拉拢过来。诸比丘,不应引诱属于他人的众:在这里,不论是沙弥还是已受具足戒的人,甚至哪怕是破戒比丘,只要他属于别人的众,就不可以把他分裂出来拉走。但可以对他说明过患:“你因为依止破戒者而住,就像为了洗澡而来,却被涂了一身粪。”如果他自己明白过来,去请求戒师或依止师,那就可以给他。巴利
Apalāḷentīti ‘‘tumhākaṃ pattaṃ dassāma, cīvaraṃ dassāmā’’ti attano upaṭṭhānakaraṇatthaṃ saṅgaṇhanti. Na bhikkhave aññassa parisā apalāḷetabbāti ettha sāmaṇerā vā hontu upasampannā vā, antamaso dussīlabhikkhussāpi parassa parisabhūte bhinditvā gaṇhituṃ na vaṭṭati, ādīnavaṃ pana vattuṃ vaṭṭati ‘‘tayā nhāyituṃ āgatena gūthamakkhanaṃ viya kataṃ dussīlaṃ nissāya viharantenā’’ti. Sace so sayameva jānitvā upajjhaṃ vā nissayaṃ vā yācati, dātuṃ vaṭṭati.
诸比丘,我允许对具足十支的沙弥加以摈除。在这里,关于《棘刺学处》注释中所说的三种摈除,所指的就是剥夺身份这一种摈除。因此,如果有人犯了杀生等任何一条,就应当以剥夺身份的方式摈除他。比丘在杀生等事上有种种不同的犯戒程度,沙弥却不是这样。沙弥即使只是杀死一只小虫、弄破一个蚁卵,也就到了应当被摈除的地步,就在那时,他的皈依、依止师摄受和住所分配都当即失效,得不到僧团的利养,只剩下一个形相而已。如果他确实是过失累累,将来不能安住在防护中,就应当把他赶走。如果他是偶然失念犯了错,心想“我做错了”,愿意重新安住在防护中,那就不需要再作剥夺身份的处理。只需让他穿着原来的衣服,重新给他皈依、给他依止师即可;学处通过皈依本身就成立了。因为沙弥的皈依相当于比丘的达上甘马语,所以就像比丘有四遍清净戒一样,沙弥借此也就等于受持了十戒。即便如此,为了让他戒行坚固、将来能安住在防护中,还是应当再授一次。如果在前一次已经重新受了皈依,那么后一次他就能得到雨安居的利养。如果是在后一次才受的,那就需要先征得僧团同意,才能给予利养。巴利
Anujānāmi bhikkhave dasahaṅgehi samannāgataṃ sāmaṇeraṃ nāsetunti ettha kaṇṭakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttāsu tīsu nāsanāsu liṅganāsanāva adhippetā, tasmā yo pāṇātipātādīsu ekampi kammaṃ karoti, so liṅganāsanāya nāsetabbo. Yathā ca bhikkhūnaṃ pāṇātipātādīsu nānāāpattiyo honti, na tathā sāmaṇerānaṃ. Sāmaṇero hi kunthakipillikampi māretvā maṅguraṇḍakampi bhinditvā nāsetabbataṃyeva pāpuṇāti, tāvadevassa saraṇagamanāni ca upajjhāyaggahaṇañca senāsanaggāho ca paṭippassambhati, saṅghalābhaṃ na labhati, liṅgamattameva ekaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti. So sace ākiṇṇadosova hoti, āyatiṃ saṃvare na tiṭṭhati, nikkaḍḍhitabbo. Atha sahasā virajjhitvā ‘‘duṭṭhu mayā kata’’nti puna saṃvare ṭhātukāmo hoti, liṅganāsanakiccaṃ natthi. Yathānivatthapārutasseva saraṇāni dātabbāni, upajjhāyo dātabbo, sikkhāpadāni pana saraṇagamaneneva ijjhanti. Sāmaṇerānañhi saraṇagamanaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upasampadakammavācāsadisaṃ, tasmā bhikkhūnaṃ viya catupārisuddhisīlaṃ, imināpi dasasīlāni samādinnāneva honti, evaṃ santepi daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ āyatiṃ saṃvare patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ puna dātabbāni. Sace purimikāya puna saraṇāni gahitāni, pacchimikāya vassāvāsikaṃ lacchati. Sace pacchimikāya gahitāni, saṅghena apaloketvā lābho dātabbo.
偷盗方面,哪怕只是拿了一根草签那么小的东西;非梵行方面,在三种道中的任何一处有了违犯;妄语方面,即使只是出于开玩笑的心态说了假话,他就不再是沙弥,达到应当被摈灭的程度。但饮酒方面,比丘即使不知情,只要从种子开始酿成的酒,喝了就犯巴吉帝亚。沙弥如果知道而喝,就犯破戒;不知道则不犯。至于其余五条学处,即使犯了,也不应被摈灭,只应给予处罚。至于学处,无论重新授予还是不曾重新授予,都可以。但通过处罚加以惩戒之后,为了让他将来能安住于防护,还是必须重新授予。沙弥饮酒,如果是故意喝的,就是巴拉基格的事。这就是差别所在。巴利
Adinnādāne tiṇasalākamattenāpi vatthunā, abrahmacariye tīsu maggesu yattha katthaci vippaṭipattiyā, musāvāde hassādhippāyatāyapi musā bhaṇite assamaṇo hoti, nāsetabbataṃ āpajjati. Majjapāne pana bhikkhuno ajānitvāpi bījato paṭṭhāya majjaṃ pivantassa pācittiyaṃ. Sāmaṇero jānitvā pivanto sīlabhedaṃ āpajjati, na ajānitvā. Yāni panassa itarāni pañca sikkhāpadāni, tesu bhinnesu na nāsetabbo, daṇḍakammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sikkhāpade pana puna dinnepi adinnepi vaṭṭati. Daṇḍakammena pana pīḷetvā āyatiṃ saṃvare ṭhapanatthāya dātabbameva. Sāmaṇerānaṃ majjapānaṃ sacittakaṃ pārājikavatthu, ayaṃ viseso.
如果有人用毁谤的方式说佛陀的坏话,比如拿“阿拉汉、正自觉者”这些功德的反面来说;或者用毁谤的方式说法的坏话,比如拿“善说”这些功德的反面来说;或者用毁谤的方式说僧团的坏话,比如拿“善行道”这些功德的反面来说——总之就是在毁谤三宝、批评三宝、指责三宝,那么师长、戒师等人应当用“不要这样说”来劝阻他,并给他指出说坏话的过患,让他停下来。如果劝到第三次他还是不肯停,就应当以“棘刺灭摈”把他摈灭——这是《库伦德》里说的。不过《大注释》里说:“如果这样劝说时他能舍弃那种邪见,那就对他执行处罚,让他忏悔罪过。如果他不肯舍弃,还是照样坚持不放,那就应当以剥夺身份的灭摈把他摈灭。”这个说法是合理的。因为这里所说的,正是这种灭摈。巴利
Avaṇṇabhāsane pana arahaṃ sammāsambuddhotiādīnaṃ paṭipakkhavasena buddhassa vā, svākkhātotiādīnaṃ paṭipakkhavasena dhammassa vā, suppaṭipannotiādīnaṃ paṭipakkhavasena saṅghassa vā avaṇṇaṃ bhāsanto ratanattayaṃ nindanto garahanto ācariyupajjhāyādīhi ‘‘mā evaṃ avacā’’ti avaṇṇabhāsane ādīnavaṃ dassetvā nivāretabbo. Sace yāvatatiyaṃ vuccamāno na oramati, kaṇṭakanāsanāya nāsetabboti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sace evaṃ vuccamāno taṃ laddhiṃ nissajjati, daṇḍakammaṃ kāretvā accayaṃ desāpetabbo. Sace na nissajjati, tatheva ādāya paggayha tiṭṭhati, liṅganāsanāya nāsetabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ. Ayameva hi nāsanā idha adhippetāti.
对持有邪见的人,也是同样的处理方式。如果一个人执持常见或断见等某种邪见,经过师长等人教导劝诫后愿意放弃,那就对他施加处罚,让他忏悔罪过。只有不肯放弃的人,才应当将他摈灭。这里说到“污比丘尼者”,虽然已经被包含在“非梵行者”里面了,但为了说明这一点:非梵行者如果愿意今后好好守护戒行,可以给他授三皈依,然后让他受达上;而污比丘尼者,即使愿意今后好好守护戒行,连出家都不允许,更何况受达上。为了表明这个道理,所以把“污比丘尼者”单独列为第十条,应当这样理解。巴利
Micchādiṭṭhikepi eseva nayo. Sassatucchedānañhi aññataradiṭṭhiko sace ācariyādīhi ovadiyamāno nissajjati, daṇḍakammaṃ kāretvā accayaṃ desāpetabbo. Appaṭinissajjantova nāsetabboti. Bhikkhunidūsako cettha kāmaṃ abrahmacāriggahaṇena gahitova abrahmacāriṃ pana āyatiṃ saṃvare ṭhātukāmaṃ saraṇāni datvā upasampādetuṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhunidūsako āyatiṃ saṃvare ṭhātukāmopi pabbajjampi na labhati, pageva upasampadanti etamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhikkhunidūsako’’ti idaṃ visuṃ dasamaṃ aṅgaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
109 “年幼的”就是指年轻的。“摩利伽”是指身体粗壮的人。“象仆、马仆”是指管象的人和管马的人。巴利
109.Dahare dahareti taruṇe taruṇe. Moḷigalleti thūlasarīre. Hatthibhaṇḍe assabhaṇḍeti hatthigopake ca assagopake ca.
关于“般哒格比丘”这一条,这里有五种般哒格:被灌般哒格、嫉妒般哒格、手术般哒格、半月般哒格和无性般哒格。其中,如果有人用口含住他人的男根,因不净之物灌入而止息了热恼,这就是被灌般哒格。如果有人看见他人行淫,因生起嫉妒而止息了热恼,这就是嫉妒般哒格。如果有人通过手术被去除了睾丸,这就是手术般哒格。另有一种人,由于不善业果报的力量,在黑半月期间成为般哒格,到了白半月期间热恼就止息了,这就是半月般哒格。还有一种人,在结生时就以无性的状态出生,这就是无性般哒格。在这五种当中,被灌般哒格和嫉妒般哒格不被禁止出家,其余三种则被禁止。其中,半月般哒格在他成为般哒格的那个半月期间,出家被禁止——这是《库伦德》注中所说的。这里,针对凡是被禁止出家的人,才这样说:“未受具足戒者不应给予受具足戒,已受具足戒者应当灭摈。”他也应当以灭摈法来灭摈。此后凡是说“应当灭摈”的地方,也都是同样的道理。巴利
Paṇḍakobhikkhaveti ettha āsittapaṇḍako usūyapaṇḍako opakkamikapaṇḍako pakkhapaṇḍako napuṃsakapaṇḍakoti pañca paṇḍakā. Tattha yassa paresaṃ aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gahetvā asucinā āsittassa pariḷāho vūpasammati, ayaṃ āsittapaṇḍako. Yassa paresaṃ ajjhācāraṃ passato usūyāya uppannāya pariḷāho vūpasammati, ayaṃ usūyapaṇḍako. Yassa upakkamena bījāni apanītāni, ayaṃ opakkamikapaṇḍako. Ekacco pana akusalavipākānubhāvena kāḷapakkhe paṇḍako hoti, juṇhapakkhe panassa pariḷāho vūpasammati, ayaṃ pakkhapaṇḍako. Yo pana paṭisandhiyaṃyeva abhāvako uppanno, ayaṃ napuṃsakapaṇḍakoti. Tesu āsittapaṇḍakassa ca usūyapaṇḍakassa ca pabbajjā na vāritā, itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vāritā. Tesupi pakkhapaṇḍakassa yasmiṃ pakkhe paṇḍako hoti, tasmiṃyevassa pakkhe pabbajjā vāritāti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Yassa cettha pabbajjā vāritā, taṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo upasampanno nāsetabbo’’ti. Sopi liṅganāsaneneva nāsetabbo. Ito paraṃ ‘‘nāsetabbo’’ti vuttesupi eseva nayo.
贼住者事缘解说巴利
Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthukathā
110 “旧族子”是指一个原本古老、后来逐渐衰败的家族的儿子。母系亲族和父系亲族中,良家出身的人已经死尽、灭尽、不在了,所以叫“良家已尽者”。“未得”就是没有得到。“令增长”就是让它增长。“来吧”是表示催促的虚词。“被询问”是指被带到一边,被问到自己剃除须发、接受袈裟、皈依、请师、甘马语和依止法这些事情。“告知此事”是指他从自己出家开始,把事情原原本本说了出来。巴利
110.Purāṇakulaputtoti purāṇassa anukkamena pārijuññaṃ pattassa kulassa putto. Mātipakkhapitipakkhato kolaññā khīṇā vinaṭṭhā matā assāti khīṇakolañño. Anadhigatanti appattaṃ. Phātiṃkātunti vaḍḍhetuṃ. Iṅghāti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Anuyuñjiyamānoti ekamantaṃ netvā kesamassuoropanakāsāyapaṭiggahaṇasaraṇagamanaupajjhāyaggahaṇakammavācānissayadhamme pucchiyamāno. Etamatthaṃ ārocesīti etaṃ sayaṃ pabbajitabhāvaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya ācikkhi.
这里说的“贼住比丘”当中,贼住者有三种:相贼、共住贼、两者兼具的贼。其中,有人自己出家之后去到寺院,却不计算比丘的戒腊,不接受按戒腊长幼次序的礼拜,不用座位来推让,也不参加伍波萨他、自恣等集体活动。这个人只是偷了出家的外表形相,所以叫相贼。巴利
Theyyasaṃvāsako bhikkhaveti ettha tayo theyyasaṃvāsakā – liṅgatthenako, saṃvāsatthenako, ubhayatthenakoti. Tattha yo sayaṃ pabbajitvā vihāraṃ gantvā na bhikkhuvassāni gaṇeti, na yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati, na āsanena paṭibāhati, na uposathapavāraṇādīsu sandissati, ayaṃ liṅgamattasseva thenitattā liṅgatthenako nāma.
还有一种情况:有人虽然是被比丘们度化出家的沙弥,却跑到外地,撒谎说“我有十年戒腊”或者“我有二十年戒腊”,然后按比丘戒腊来算,接受按戒腊长幼排的礼拜,用座位来推辞,还参与伍波萨他、自恣等活动。这种人只是盗取了共住的身份,所以叫共住贼。因为在这里,计算比丘戒腊等一切行为表现,都应该理解为“共住”。即使有人舍了戒之后,心想“没人知道我”,照样这么去做,道理也是一样的。巴利
Yo pana bhikkhūhi pabbājito sāmaṇero samānopi videsaṃ gantvā ‘‘ahaṃ dasavasso vā vīsativasso vā’’ti musā vatvā bhikkhuvassāni gaṇeti, yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati, āsanena paṭibāhati, uposathapavāraṇādīsu sandissati, ayaṃ saṃvāsamattasseva thenitattā saṃvāsatthenako nāma. Bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko hi sabbopi kiriyabhedo imasmiṃ atthe ‘‘saṃvāso’’ti veditabbo. Sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya ‘‘na maṃ koci jānātī’’ti evaṃ paṭipajjantepi eseva nayo.
还有一种情况:有人自己出家之后,去到精舍里计算自己的比丘戒腊,接受按戒腊长幼次序的礼拜,用座位来推拒他人,在伍波萨他、自恣等集体活动中露面参与。这种人既偷了出家人的形相,又偷了共住的身份,所以叫“双贼”。这三种贼住者当中,还没受具足戒的,不应该给他授具足戒;已经受了具足戒的,应该把他灭摈驱逐;即使他以后再来请求出家,也不应该允许他出家。巴利
Yo pana sayaṃ pabbajitvā vihāraṃ gantvā bhikkhuvassāni gaṇeti, yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati, āsanena paṭibāhati, uposathapavāraṇādīsu sandissati, ayaṃ liṅgassa ceva saṃvāsassa ca thenitattā ubhayatthenako nāma. Ayaṃ tividhopi theyyasaṃvāsako anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo, puna pabbajjaṃ yācantopi na pabbājetabbo.
在这里,还应当知道这一段杂项内容,目的是为了不迷惑。巴利
Ettha ca asammohatthaṃ idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ –
“ 或因畏惧国王、饥馑、荒野、疾病、怨敌,
或为求得袈裟,于此披上僧服、现出家相。
只要他内心清净,就不接受共住;
尔时,此人还不名为贼住者。”巴利
‘‘Rājadubbhikkhakantāra-rogaveribhayehi vā; Cīvarāharaṇatthaṃ vā, liṅgaṃ ādiyatīdha yo. Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānaso; Theyyasaṃvāsako nāma, tāva esa na vuccatī’’ti.
这里详细说明:比如有人惹国王生气了,他心想“这样我就能保住性命”,就自己拿取出家相逃跑。有人看到后报告给国王。国王说:“如果他已经出家了,就不能对他做什么了。”于是对那人的怒气就平息了。这人想:“国王带来的恐惧已经平息了”,没有进入僧团,就以在家人的样子回来,这种情况应当准许他出家。又或者他想:“我是靠着佛教才活下来的,现在我要出家”,生起了紧迫感,就以那身出家相前来,但不肯接受客比丘的义务;不论比丘们问还是不问,他都如实说明自己的情况,请求出家,那就应当先去掉他的出家相,再让他出家。但如果他接受义务,表现出乐于出家的样子,那就按前面说过的全部程序来办,包括计算戒腊等各项规定,这种情况就不应当准许他出家。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ vitthāranayo – idhekaccassa rājā kuddho hoti, so ‘‘evaṃ me sotthi bhavissatī’’ti sayameva liṅgaṃ gahetvā palāyati. Taṃ disvā rañño ārocenti. Rājā ‘‘sace pabbajito, na taṃ labbhā kiñci kātu’’nti tasmiṃ kodhaṃ paṭivineti, so ‘‘vūpasantaṃ me rājabhaya’’nti saṅghamajjhaṃ anosaritvāva gihiliṅgaṃ gahetvā āgato pabbājetabbo. Athāpi ‘‘sāsanaṃ nissāya mayā jīvitaṃ laddhaṃ, handa dāni ahaṃ pabbajāmī’’ti uppannasaṃvego teneva liṅgena āgantvā āgantukavattaṃ na sādiyati, bhikkhūhi puṭṭho vā apuṭṭho vā yathābhūtamattānaṃ āvikatvā pabbajjaṃ yācati, liṅgaṃ apanetvā pabbājetabbo. Sace pana vattaṃ sādiyati, pabbajitālayaṃ dasseti, sabbaṃ pubbe vuttaṃ vassagaṇanādibhedaṃ vidhiṃ paṭipajjati, ayaṃ na pabbājetabbo.
在这里,有些人碰上饥荒,活不下去,就自己穿上出家人的样子,靠吃各种外道的施食过活。等饥荒过去了,他没有进入僧团,就直接换回在家人模样回来。这情况和前面说的完全一样。巴利
Idha panekacco dubbhikkhe jīvituṃ asakkonto sayameva liṅgaṃ gahetvā sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjanto dubbhikkhe vītivatte saṅghamajjhaṃ anosaritvāva gihiliṅgaṃ gahetvā āgatoti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva .
又有另一种人,想穿越一片大荒野,商队首领带着出家人们一起走。他心想:“这样商队首领就会带上我了。”于是自己也取了出家相,跟着商队首领一起穿过荒野。到了安全的地方以后,他没有进入僧团,就直接取了在家相回来。这一切都和前面说的一样。巴利
Aparo mahākantāraṃ nittharitukāmo hoti, satthavāho ca pabbajite gahetvā gacchati. So ‘‘evaṃ maṃ satthavāho gahetvā gamissatī’’ti sayameva liṅgaṃ gahetvā satthavāhena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā khemantaṃ patvā saṅghamajjhaṃ anosaritvāva gihiliṅgaṃ gahetvā āgatoti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva.
又有另一种情况:当疾病带来的恐惧出现时,他活不下去,就自己穿上出家人的标志,靠吃各种外道信徒的食物过活。等疾病恐惧平息后,他没有进入僧团中去,就换上在家人的样子回来了。其余一切都和前面说的一样。巴利
Aparo rogabhaye uppanne jīvituṃ asakkonto sayameva liṅgaṃ gahetvā sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjanto rogabhaye vūpasante saṅghamajjhaṃ anosaritvāva gihiliṅgaṃ gahetvā āgatoti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva.
另有一人,和一个仇人结了怨,那仇人怒气冲冲,想杀他,到处找他。他心想:“这样我才能平安。”于是自己取了出家的样子逃走了。仇人到处找他,问“他在哪里”,听说“他出家逃走了”,就想:“既然他出家了,就不能再对他做什么了。”于是对那人的怒气就平息了。那人知道“仇人对我的威胁已经平息了”,没有进入僧团,就直接取了在家人的样子回来了。这一切都和前面说的一样。巴利
Aparassa eko veriko kuddho hoti, ghātetukāmo naṃ vicarati, so ‘‘evaṃ me sotthi bhavissatī’’ti sayameva liṅgaṃ gahetvā palāyati. Veriko ‘‘kuhiṃ so’’ti pariyesanto ‘‘pabbajitvā palāto’’ti sutvā ‘‘sace pabbajito, na taṃ labbhā kiñci kātu’’nti tasmiṃ kodhaṃ paṭivineti. So ‘‘vūpasantaṃ me veribhaya’’nti saṅghamajjhaṃ anosaritvāva gihiliṅgaṃ gahetvā āgatoti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva.
又有另一种情况:一个人去了亲戚家,舍弃了学处,还俗成了在家人,他心里想:“这些袈裟留在这里会坏掉。如果我拿了这些袈裟回寺院,路上有人会把我当贼抓住。不如我把它们当作随身衣物穿在身上回去。”于是,为了带走袈裟,他穿好袈裟、披好袈裟,前往寺院。沙弥和年轻比丘们远远看见他走来,就迎上前去,向他行礼问讯。他不接受,如实表明自己的真实身份。如果比丘们说“我们现在不会放你走”,想强行让他重新出家,那就应当让他脱掉袈裟,再重新为他授出家戒。但如果他想“他们不知道我已经还俗了”,于是仍然承认自己是比丘,并按照前面所说的计算戒腊等一整套做法行事,那么这个人就不应当再为他授出家戒。巴利
Aparo ñātikulaṃ gantvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya gihi hutvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni idha vinassissanti, sacepi imāni gahetvā vihāraṃ gamissāmi, antarāmagge maṃ ‘coro’ti gahessanti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ kāyaparihāriyāni katvā gaccheyya’’nti cīvarāharaṇatthaṃ nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca vihāraṃ gacchati. Taṃ dūratova āgacchantaṃ disvā sāmaṇerā ca daharā ca abbhuggacchanti, vattaṃ dassenti. So na sādiyati, yathābhūtamattānaṃ āvikaroti. Sace bhikkhū ‘‘na dāni mayaṃ taṃ muñcissāmā’’ti balakkārena pabbājetukāmā honti, kāsāyāni apanetvā puna pabbājetabbo. Sace pana ‘‘nayime mama hīnāyāvattabhāvaṃ jānantī’’ti taṃyeva bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānitvā sabbaṃ pubbe vuttaṃ vassagaṇanādibhedaṃ vidhiṃ paṭipajjati, ayaṃ na pabbājetabbo.
还有一位大沙弥,回到亲戚家后还了俗,因干农活太辛苦,又想着:“现在我还是回去做沙门吧,长老们也不知道我已经还俗了。”于是拿起原来的衣钵回到精舍。他也不把这件事告诉比丘们,仍然自称是沙弥。这个人就是贼住者,不能出家。如果他在拿起衣钵的时候就想:“我不会告诉任何人”,即使到了精舍后说了,光凭拿起衣钵时的心态,就已经是贼住者了。如果他在拿起衣钵时想:“我到精舍时会说明”,但到了精舍后,被问“贤友,你去哪儿了?”时,他心想“现在他们不知道我”,就骗过去不说,在他放弃承当的那一刻,这个人也同样是贼住者。但如果他在拿起衣钵时就想:“我会说明”,到了精舍后也确实说了,这个人就可以再次出家。巴利
Aparo mahāsāmaṇero ñātikulaṃ gantvā uppabbajitvā kammantānuṭṭhānena ubbāḷho hutvā puna ‘‘dāni ahaṃ samaṇova bhavissāmi, theropi me uppabbajitabhāvaṃ na jānātī’’ti tadeva pattacīvaraṃ ādāya vihāraṃ āgacchati, nāpi tamatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āroceti, sāmaṇerabhāvaṃ paṭijānāti, ayaṃ theyyasaṃvāsakoyeva pabbajjaṃ na labhati. Sacepissa liṅgaggahaṇakāle evaṃ hoti, ‘‘nāhaṃ kassaci ārocessāmī’’ti vihārañca gato āroceti, gahaṇeneva theyyasaṃvāsako. Athāpissa ‘‘gahaṇakāle ācikkhissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, vihārañca gantvā ‘‘kuhiṃ tvaṃ āvuso gato’’ti vutto ‘‘na dāni maṃ ime jānantī’’ti vañcetvā nācikkhati, ‘‘nācikkhissāmī’’ti saha dhuranikkhepena ayampi theyyasaṃvāsakova. Sace panassa gahaṇakālepi ‘‘ācikkhissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, vihāraṃ gantvāpi ācikkhati, ayaṃ puna pabbajjaṃ labhati.
还有另一种情况:一个年轻的沙弥,或者虽然年纪大却很愚笨,他像前面说的那样还俗以后,不愿意在家里做放牛之类的活。亲属们就把那套袈裟重新给他穿上,把碗或钵塞到他手里,说“去吧,你还是去做沙门吧”,然后把他从家里赶出去。他来到寺院,比丘们不知道“这个人还俗后又自己出家了”,他自己也不知道“这样出家的人就叫贼住者”。如果为年满二十岁的他授具足戒,那他就是善受具足戒。但如果在还没受具足戒的时候,他听到正在进行的律藏裁决中说“这样出家的人就叫贼住者”,他就应该对比丘们说“我做过这样的事”,这样他还能重新出家。如果他想“现在没人知道”,而不去说明,那么在他放弃承当的那一刻,就成了贼住者。巴利
Aparo daharasāmaṇero mahanto vā pana abyatto, so purimanayeneva uppabbajitvā ghare vacchakarakkhaṇādīni kammāni kātuṃ na icchati, tamenaṃ ñātakā tāniyeva kāsāyāni acchādetvā thālakaṃ vā pattaṃ vā hatthe datvā ‘‘gaccha samaṇova hohī’’ti gharā nīharanti. So vihāraṃ gacchati, neva naṃ bhikkhū jānanti ‘‘ayaṃ uppabbajitvā puna sayameva pabbajito’’ti, nāpi sayaṃ jānāti, ‘‘yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotī’’ti. Sace taṃ paripuṇṇavassaṃ upasampādenti, sūpasampanno. Sace pana anupasampannakāleyeva vinayavinicchaye vattamāne suṇāti, ‘‘yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotī’’ti. Tena ‘‘mayā evaṃ kata’’nti bhikkhūnaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ, evaṃ puna pabbajjaṃ labhati. Sace ‘‘na dāni maṃ koci jānātī’’ti nāroceti, dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte theyyasaṃvāsako.
比丘舍弃了学处,没有脱掉出家相,不管有没有做过破戒的事,之后又按照前面说过的计年等一整套程序来做,就是贼住者。如果没有舍弃学处,还保持着出家相,行了淫法,之后又按照计年等一整套程序来做,就不是贼住者,只是重新得到出家而已。不过《暗夜注》里说这种人是贼住者,这个说法不能采纳。巴利
Bhikkhu sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya liṅgaṃ anapanetvā dussīlakammaṃ katvā vā akatvā vā puna sabbaṃ pubbe vuttaṃ vassagaṇanādibhedaṃ vidhiṃ paṭipajjati, theyyasaṃvāsako hoti. Sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya saliṅge ṭhito methunaṃ paṭisevitvā vassagaṇanādibhedaṃ vidhiṃ āpajjanto theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, pabbajjāmattaṃ labhati. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana eso theyyasaṃvāsakoti vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
有一位比丘,对袈裟还保有那份热忱,却换上白衣行了淫欲之事,之后又重新穿上袈裟,按照计年等种种规矩来行事,这个人也不算贼住,只是得到一次重新出家而已。但是,如果他舍弃了对袈裟的这份承担,换上白衣行了淫欲之事,之后又重新穿上袈裟,按照计年等种种规矩来行事,那就成了贼住。巴利
Eko bhikkhu kāsāye saussāhova odātaṃ nivāsetvā methunaṃ paṭisevitvā puna kāsāyāni nivāsetvā vassagaṇanādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ vidhiṃ āpajjati, ayampi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, pabbajjāmattaṃ labhati. Sace pana kāsāye dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā odātaṃ nivāsetvā methunaṃ paṭisevitvā puna kāsāyāni nivāsetvā vassagaṇanādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ vidhiṃ āpajjati, theyyasaṃvāsako hoti.
沙弥只要还保持出家相,即使犯了行淫等非沙门的行为,也不成为贼住者。即使他穿着袈裟时仍有心修行,脱掉袈裟去行淫欲之事,之后又重新穿上袈裟,也不成为贼住者。但是,如果他对袈裟放弃了担当,裸体或者穿白衣,通过行淫等行为成了非沙门,然后再穿上袈裟,那就成为贼住者。即使他想要还俗,把袈裟叠起来,或者用别的方式穿在家人的下衣,目的是试探“在家相对我合不合适?合不合适?”,这时候只要还在试探、尚未认可,就还算是在守护阶段。但一旦认可“合适”,然后再次接受出家相,就成为贼住者。穿白衣进行试探和认可的情况,道理也一样。巴利
Sāmaṇero saliṅge ṭhito methunādiassamaṇakaraṇadhammaṃ āpajjitvāpi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti. Sacepi kāsāye saussāhova kāsāyāni apanetvā methunaṃ paṭisevitvā puna kāsāyāni nivāseti, neva theyyasaṃvāsako hoti. Sace pana kāsāye dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā naggo vā odātanivattho vā methunasevanādīhi assamaṇo hutvā kāsāyaṃ nivāseti, theyyasaṃvāsako hoti. Sacepi gihibhāvaṃ patthayamāno kāsāvaṃ ovaṭṭikaṃ vā katvā aññena vā ākārena gihinivāsanena nivāseti ‘‘sobhati nu kho me gihiliṅgaṃ, na sobhatī’’ti vīmaṃsanatthaṃ, rakkhati tāva. ‘‘Sobhatī’’ti sampaṭicchitvā pana puna liṅgaṃ sādiyanto theyyasaṃvāsako hoti. Odātaṃ nivāsetvā vīmaṃsanasampaṭicchanesupi eseva nayo.
如果他在已经穿着的袈裟上面再穿上白衣,然后去试探或表示接受,那还是算守护。比丘尼也是同样的道理。她如果想着还俗,把袈裟当作在家人的下衣来穿,目的是试探“在家人的样子对我来说好不好看、合不合适”,这时候还是算守护。如果她表示“好看、合适”,就不算守护了。穿上白衣之后去试探或表示接受,道理也一样。不过,要是在已经穿着的袈裟上面再穿上白衣,不管是试探还是表示接受,都还是算守护。巴利
Sace pana nivatthakāsāyassa upari odātaṃ nivāsetvā vīmaṃsati vā sampaṭicchati vā, rakkhatiyeva. Bhikkhuniyāpi eseva nayo. Sāpi hi gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānā sace kāsāyaṃ gihinivāsanaṃ nivāseti, ‘‘sobhati nu kho me gihiliṅgaṃ, na sobhatī’’ti vīmaṃsanatthaṃ, rakkhati tāva. Sace ‘‘sobhatī’’ti sampaṭicchati, na rakkhati. Odātaṃ nivāsetvā vīmaṃsanasampaṭicchanesupi eseva nayo. Nivatthakāsāyassa pana upari odātaṃ nivāsetvā vīmaṃsatu vā sampaṭicchatu vā, rakkhatiyeva.
如果有年长出家人,不算戒腊,也不依律制,从一旁走过来,见大钵等器皿中饭团正被勺子舀起,便伸钵去接,像老鹰抓肉块那样拿了就走,这不算贼住。反之,若他算了比丘戒腊之后才拿,那就是贼住。巴利
Sace koci vuḍḍhapabbajito vassāni agaṇetvā pāḷiyampi aṭṭhatvā ekapassenāgantvā mahāpeḷādīsu kaṭacchunā ukkhitte bhattapiṇḍe pattaṃ upanāmetvā seno viya maṃsapesiṃ gahetvā gacchati, theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti. Bhikkhuvassāni pana gaṇetvā gaṇhanto theyyasaṃvāsako hoti.
自己本来就是沙弥,却在沙弥的排序中虚报戒腊来领取,不算贼住者。比丘在比丘的排序中虚报戒腊来领取,则应按物品价值予以处罚。巴利
Sayaṃ sāmaṇerova sāmaṇerapaṭipāṭiyā kūṭavassāni gaṇetvā gaṇhanto theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti. Bhikkhu bhikkhupaṭipāṭiyā kūṭavassāni gaṇetvā gaṇhanto bhaṇḍagghena kāretabboti.
已归向外道者解说巴利
Titthiyapakkantakakathā
这里,“外道离去者比丘”是指已经离开(佛教)、进入外道中的人,就叫外道离去者。这样的人不但不该给他受具足戒,连让他出家都不可以。对此的判断是这样的:一个已经受具足戒的比丘,心里想“我要成为外道”,就以自己现有的比丘形相前往外道的住处,每走一步都犯恶作罪。一旦接受了他们的形相标志,他就成为外道离去者。如果有人自己想“我要成为外道”,于是穿上苦行衣、草衣等,也照样成为外道离去者。但如果有人裸身洗澡时,看看自己,心想“我这邪命外道的模样挺好看,我要做邪命外道”,于是不拿袈裟,光着身子前往邪命外道的住处,每走一步都犯恶作罪。不过,如果他在半路上生起了惭愧心,把所犯的恶作罪忏悔了,就能脱免。即使已经走到他们的住处,或者被他们教导,或者自己心想“这些人的出家太苦了”而回头,也照样能脱免。巴利
Titthiyapakkantakobhikkhaveti ettha pana titthiyesu pakkanto paviṭṭhoti titthiyapakkantako. So na kevalaṃ na upasampādetabbo, atha kho na pabbājetabbopi. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – upasampanno bhikkhu titthiyo bhavissāmīti saliṅgeneva tesaṃ upassayaṃ gacchati, padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ. Tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte titthiyapakkantako hoti. Yopi sayameva ‘‘titthiyo bhavissāmī’’ti kusacīrādīni nivāseti, titthiyapakkantako hotiyeva. Yo pana naggo nhāyanto attānaṃ oloketvā ‘‘sobhati me ājīvakabhāvo, ājīvako bhavissāmī’’ti kāsāyāni anādāya naggova ājīvakānaṃ upassayaṃ gacchati, padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ. Sace panassa antarāmagge hirottappaṃ uppajjati, dukkaṭāni desetvā muccati. Tesaṃ upassayaṃ gantvāpi tehi vā ovadito attanā vā ‘‘imesaṃ pabbajjā atidukkhā’’ti nivattantopi muccatiyeva.
如果被问“你们的出家有什么殊胜之处?”他回答“拔除须发等”,并即使让人拔掉一根头发,或者采用蹲踞苦行等仪轨,或者穿上孔雀羽毛等服饰,执取那些外道的标志,或者生起“这种出家最殊胜”的想法而认同其殊胜,那就不能脱免,成为外道离去者。但如果是为了考察“外道的出家对我是否合适,是否不合适?”而穿上拘舍草衣等,或者结发髻,或者拿起担杖,只要他还没有接受,他的见解就还在守护他;一旦接受,就成了外道离去者。然而,衣服被夺的人披上拘舍草衣等,或者因为害怕国王惩罚等原因而执取外道标志,由于并没有真正归信那种见解,就不成为外道离去者。巴利
Sace pana ‘‘kiṃ tumhākaṃ pabbajjāya ukkaṭṭha’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘kesamassuluñcanādīnī’’ti vutto ekakesampi luñcāpeti, ukkuṭikappadhānādīni vā vattāni ādiyati, morapiñchādīni vā nivāseti, tesaṃ liṅgaṃ gaṇhāti, ‘‘ayaṃ pabbajjā seṭṭhā’’ti seṭṭhabhāvaṃ vā upagacchati, na muccati, titthiyapakkantako hoti. Sace pana ‘‘sobhati nu kho me titthiyapabbajjā, nanu kho sobhatī’’ti vīmaṃsanatthaṃ kusacīrādīni vā nivāseti, jaṭaṃ vā bandhati, khārikājaṃ vā ādiyati, yāva na sampaṭicchati, tāva naṃ laddhi rakkhati, sampaṭicchitamatte titthiyapakkantako hoti. Acchinnacīvaro pana kusacīrādīni nivāsento rājabhayādīhi vā titthiyaliṅgaṃ gaṇhanto laddhiyā abhāvena neva titthiyapakkantako hoti.
这里说的“外道离去者”,是由已经受达上的比丘说的。所以,沙弥即使以沙门的样子去了外道的处所,仍然可以再得出家和受达上,这是《库伦德》里说的。而前面说的“贼住者”,是由未受达上的人说的;所以,已经受达上的人即使虚报戒腊,也不会成为非沙门。即使犯了巴拉基格,却仍然保持沙门的样子和精进,计算比丘戒腊等,也不成为贼住者。巴利
Ayañca titthiyapakkantako nāma upasampannabhikkhunā kathito, tasmā sāmaṇero saliṅgena titthāyatanaṃ gatopi puna pabbajjañca upasampadañca labhatīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Purimo pana theyyasaṃvāsako anupasampannena kathito; tasmā upasampanno kūṭavassaṃ gaṇentopi assamaṇo na hoti. Liṅge saussāho pārājikaṃ āpajjitvā bhikkhuvassādīni gaṇentopi theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti.
畜生道的事解说巴利
Tiracchānagatavatthukathā
111 “厌患那伽之生”:在这里,虽然他在那一世中因善果报而享受着类似天界的权势与成就,但因为他是由不善果报结生的,所以当他和同类行淫以及放逸沉睡时,那伽的身体就会显现出来,成为在水中游动、吃青蛙的身体,因此他厌患那伽之生。“羞惭”就是羞愧。“厌恶”就是厌恶自己的身体。“那位比丘出去之后”:就是那位比丘出去的时候;或者,意思是那位比丘的出去。“放逸而沉睡”:当那位比丘还没出去时,他因为害怕泄漏而不敢放失正念,但当他出去之后,就因为放逸而沉睡了。“发出泄漏声”:因恐惧而舍弃沙门想,发出怪异的大声。巴利
111.Nāgayoniyāaṭṭīyatīti ettha kiñcāpi so pavattiyaṃ kusalavipākena devasampattisadisaṃ issariyasampattiṃ anubhoti, akusalavipākapaṭisandhikassa pana tassa sajātiyā methunapaṭisevane ca vissaṭṭhaniddokkamane ca nāgasarīraṃ pātubhavati udakasañcārikaṃ maṇḍūkabhakkhaṃ, tasmā so tāya nāgayoniyā aṭṭīyati. Harāyatīti lajjati. Jigucchatīti attabhāvaṃ jigucchati. Tassa bhikkhuno nikkhanteti tasmiṃ bhikkhusmiṃ nikkhante. Atha vā tassa bhikkhuno nikkhamaneti attho. Vissaṭṭho niddaṃ okkamīti tasmiṃ anikkhante vissarabhayena satiṃ avissajjitvā kapimiddhavaseneva niddāyanto nikkhante satiṃ vissajjitvā vissaṭṭho nirāsaṅko mahāniddaṃ paṭipajji. Vissaramakāsīti bhayavasena samaṇasaññaṃ pahāya virūpaṃ mahāsaddamakāsi.
你们确实是:这里的“你们确实是”就是“tumhe kho attha”,是把“a”音省略后说出来的。你们这些龙,因为不能证得禅那、观、道、果,所以在这个法和律中属于不能成长的法,不能成为成长的法——这就是这里的简要含义。“与同类”:就是与雌龙。然而,当与人类女性等其他种类行淫时,那时就像天子一样。在这里,依据在生存中反复显现自身的情况,而说了“两种缘”。而龙在五个时刻显现自身:结生时、蜕皮时、与同类行淫时、放逸沉睡时、死时。巴利
Tumhe khotthāti tumhe kho attha; akārassa lopaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Tumhe kho nāgā jhānavipassanāmaggaphalānaṃ abhabbattā imasmiṃ dhammavinaye aviruḷhidhammā attha, viruḷhidhammā na bhavathāti ayamettha saṅkhepattho. Sajātiyāti nāgiyā eva. Yadā pana manussitthiādibhedāya aññajātiyā paṭisevati, tadā devaputto viya hoti. Ettha ca pavattiyaṃ abhiṇhaṃ sabhāvapātukammadassanavasena ‘‘dve paccayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nāgassa pana pañcasu kālesu sabhāvapātukammaṃ hoti – paṭisandhikāle, tacajahanakāle, sajātiyā methunakāle, vissaṭṭhaniddokkamanakāle, cutikāleti.
“诸比丘,畜生趣者”:在这里,不管是龙,还是金翅鸟童子等中的任何一种,甚至包括帝释天王在内,凡是属于非人的种类,在这个意思里都应理解为“畜生趣者”。这种人不能给他授具足戒,也不能让他出家;如果已经受了具足戒,也应当灭摈。巴利
Tiracchānagato bhikkhaveti ettha nāgo vā hotu supaṇṇamāṇavakādīnaṃ vā aññataro, antamaso sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ upādāya yo koci amanussajātiyo, sabbova imasmiṃ atthe tiracchānagatoti veditabbo. So neva upasampādetabbo, na pabbājetabbo, upasampannopi nāsetabboti.
杀母者等事例的解说巴利
Mātughātakādivatthukathā
112 112. 在杀母者等事例中——“令其离开”,意思是让他出走、离去、被驱逐。“诸比丘,杀母者”这一句:如果有人故意夺走人类女性所生的亲生母亲的生命,而他自己也是人类,这个人就因为无间杀母业而成为杀母者,他的出家与受达上都被禁止。但是,如果被杀害的是人类女性、但不是亲生母亲,而是养母、大母或小母,或者是亲生母亲但不是人类女性,那么他的出家不被禁止,也不构成无间业。如果自己投生为畜生,杀害了身为人类女性的母亲,他也不构成无间业,但因为属于畜生道,他的出家被禁止。其余内容浅显易懂。杀父者也是同样的道理。即使他是妓女所生,不知道“这是我的父亲”,但如果他杀害了那个因与之结合而使他出生的人,他仍然被算作杀父者,并且触犯无间业。巴利
112. Mātughātakādivatthūsu – nikkhantiṃ kareyyanti nikkhamanaṃ niggamanaṃ apavāhanaṃ kareyyanti attho. Mātughātako bhikkhaveti ettha yena manussitthibhūtā janikā mātā sayampi manussajātikeneva satā sañcicca jīvitā voropitā, ayaṃ ānantariyena mātughātakakammena mātughātako, etassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca paṭikkhittā. Yena pana manussitthibhūtāpi ajanikā posāvanikā mātā vā mahāmātā vā cūḷamātā vā janikāpi vā na manussitthibhūtā mātā ghātitā, tassa pabbajjā na vāritā, na ca ānantariko hoti. Yena sayaṃ tiracchānabhūtena manussitthibhūtā mātā ghātitā, sopi ānantariko na hoti, tiracchānagatattā panassa pabbajjā paṭikkhittā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Pitughātakepi eseva nayo. Sacepi hi vesiyā putto hoti, ‘‘ayaṃ me pitā’’ti na jānāti, yassa sambhavena nibbatto, so ce anena ghātito, pitughātakotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, ānantariyañca phusati.
114 杀阿拉汉的人,也要按照人类阿拉汉的情况来理解。因为在人类当中,哪怕是一个还没出家、已经断尽烦恼的男孩或女孩,如果有人故意夺走他的生命,这个人就是杀阿拉汉的人,会触犯无间业,也被禁止出家。但如果杀的是非人出身的阿拉汉,或者是人类出身的其他圣者,就不构成无间业,出家也不被禁止,不过这个业仍然很重。畜生即使杀了人类阿拉汉,也不构成无间业,但这个业很重——这是这里的判定标准。“他们被带去杀害”,意思是他们被带去处死,被带去杀死。至于圣典里说的“sacā ca mayaṃ”,它的意思就是“sace mayaṃ”(如果我们)。因为本来应该说“sace”的地方,这里却用了“sacā ca”这个不变词。或者应该读作“sace ca”。其中“sace”是表示假设的不变词,“ca”只是用来补足句子。也有读作“sacajja mayaṃ”的,意思是“sace ajja mayaṃ”(如果我们今天)。巴利
114. Arahantaghātakopi manussaarahantavaseneva veditabbo. Manussajātiyañhi antamaso apabbajitampi khīṇāsavaṃ dārakaṃ dārikaṃ vā sañcicca jīvitā voropento arahantaghātakova hoti, ānantariyañca phusati, pabbajjā cassa vāritā. Amanussajātikaṃ pana arahantaṃ manussajātikaṃ vā avasesaṃ ariyapuggalaṃ ghātetvā ānantariyo na hoti, pabbajjāpissa na vāritā, kammaṃ pana balavaṃ hoti. Tiracchāno manussaarahantampi ghātetvā ānantariyo na hoti, kammaṃ pana bhāriyanti ayamettha vinicchayo. Te vadhāya onīyantīti vadhatthāya onīyanti, māretuṃ nīyantīti attho. Yaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sacā ca maya’’nti vuttaṃ, tassa sace mayanti ayamevattho. ‘‘Sace’’ti hi vattabbe ettha ‘‘sacā ca’’ iti ayaṃ nipāto vutto. ‘‘Sace ca’’ icceva vā pāṭho. Tattha saceti sambhāvanatthe nipāto; ca iti padapūraṇamatte. ‘‘Sacajja maya’’ntipi pāṭho. Tassa sace ajja mayanti attho.
115 115. 在“诸比丘,污比丘尼者”这一句里,如果有人在三种途径中的某一种上玷污了一位已受达上的比丘尼,这个人就叫作“污比丘尼者”。他的出家与受达上都被禁止。但如果只是通过身体接触使她失去戒德,那么他的出家与受达上并不被禁止。即使是用暴力强迫她穿上白衣,在她不愿意的情况下玷污她,这个人仍然是污比丘尼者。但如果用暴力强迫她穿上白衣后,在她愿意的情况下玷污她,这个人就不是污比丘尼者。为什么?因为当她同意处于在家身份的那一刻起,她就已经不是比丘尼了。然而,如果后来玷污一位已经一度毁坏戒律的比丘尼,或者对在学尼、沙弥尼作不净行,这个人既不是污比丘尼者,也能得到出家与受达上。巴利
115.Bhikkhunidūsako bhikkhaveti ettha yo pakatattaṃ bhikkhuniṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ dūseti, ayaṃ bhikkhunidūsako nāma. Etassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca vāritā. Yo pana kāyasaṃsaggena sīlavināsaṃ pāpeti, tassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca na vāritā. Balakkārena odātavatthavasanaṃ katvā anicchamānaṃyeva dūsentopi bhikkhunidūsakoyeva. Balakkārena pana odātavatthavasanaṃ katvā icchamānaṃ dūsento bhikkhunidūsako na hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā gihibhāve sampaṭicchitamatteyeva sā abhikkhunī hoti. Sakiṃ sīlavipannaṃ pana pacchā dūsento sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu ca vippaṭipajjanto neva bhikkhunidūsako hoti, pabbajjampi upasampadampi labhati.
在“诸比丘,破僧者”这一句里,如果有人像提婆达多那样,把法说成非法、把律说成非律,并通过四种僧甘马中的任何一种来分裂僧团,这个人就叫作“破僧者”。他的出家与受达上都被禁止。巴利
Saṅghabhedakobhikkhaveti ettha yo devadatto viya sāsanaṃ uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ katvā catunnaṃ kammānaṃ aññataravasena saṅghaṃ bhindati, ayaṃ saṅghabhedako nāma. Etassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca vāritā.
“出佛身血者”一语中,如果有人像提婆达多那样,以嗔恨心、杀害心,在如来还活着的身体上,哪怕只弄出像小苍蝇吸血那么一点点血,这个人就叫“出佛身血者”。他的出家与受达上都被禁止。但如果有人像吉瓦咖那样,为了治病,用刀切开,取出腐肉和血,让病人舒服起来,那么这个人能生起很多功德。巴利
Lohituppādako bhikkhaveti etthāpi yo devadatto viya duṭṭhacittena vadhakacittena tathāgatassa jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanakamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeti, ayaṃ lohituppādako nāma. Etassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca vāritā. Yo pana rogavūpasamanatthaṃ jīvako viya satthena phāletvā pūtimaṃsañca lohitañca nīharitvā phāsuṃ karoti, bahuṃ so puññaṃ pasavatīti.
双性人事项的解说巴利
Ubhatobyañjanakavatthukathā
116 116. “诸比丘,双性人”是指:由于既有能生出女性特征的业,也有能生出男性特征的业,所以这个人同时具有两种性征,因此称为双性人。“作”是指用男性性征与女人行淫。“令作”是指教唆他人,让他在自己的女性性征上行淫。这种人分为两种:女性双性人和男性双性人。巴利
116.Ubhatobyañjanako bhikkhaveti itthinimittuppādanakammato ca purisanimittuppādanakammato ca ubhato byañjanamassa atthīti ubhatobyañjanako. Karotīti purisanimittena itthīsu methunavītikkamaṃ karoti. Kārāpetīti paraṃ samādapetvā attano itthinimitte kārāpeti, so duvidho hoti – itthiubhatobyañjanako, purisaubhatobyañjanakoti.
在这里,女性双性人的女性特征明显,男性特征隐蔽;男性双性人的男性特征明显,女性特征隐蔽。女性双性人若对女人行男人之事,她的女性特征就隐蔽,男性特征就明显;男性双性人若对男人充当女人,他的男性特征就隐蔽,女性特征就明显。女性双性人自己能够受孕,也能让他人受孕;男性双性人自己不能受孕,却能让他人受孕。这就是他们之间的差别。《库伦德》中则说:“如果结生时是男性特征,于相续中生起女性特征;如果结生时是女性特征,于相续中生起男性特征。”关于这里的详细抉择次第,应当从《法集论注·殊胜义论》中了解。但在这里应当知道:这两种双性人都不能出家,也不能受达上。巴利
Tattha itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthinimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, purisanimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisanimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ, itthinimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthīsu purisattaṃ karontassa itthinimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hoti, purisanimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisānaṃ itthibhāvaṃ upagacchantassa purisanimittaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hoti, itthinimittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Itthiubhatobyañjanako sayañca gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti, parañca gaṇhāpeti. Purisaubhatobyañjanako pana sayaṃ na gaṇhāti, paraṃ gaṇhāpetīti, idametesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ pavatte itthiliṅgaṃ nibbattati, yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ pavatte purisaliṅgaṃ nibbattatī’’ti . Tattha vicāraṇakkamo vitthārato aṭṭhasāliniyā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāya veditabbo. Imassa pana duvidhassāpi ubhatobyañjanakassa neva pabbajjā atthi, na upasampadāti idamidha veditabbaṃ.
关于没有依止师等情形的事项解说巴利
Anupajjhāyakādivatthukathā
117 “那时”是指世尊还没有制定这条学处的那段时间。“没有依止师”是指完全没有请一位依止师,彻底没有依止师。这样受具足戒的人,在法和利养两方面都得不到摄受,只会退失,不会增长。“诸比丘,没有依止师的人不应受具足戒”,意思是:没有请依止师、没有依止师的人,不应给他受具足戒。如果给他受了,就犯恶作罪。这是说明从学处制定之后开始,这样给人受戒就犯这个罪;但甘马本身并不会失效。有人说甘马会失效,这种说法不能采纳。在“由僧团”“由依止师”等句子里,一直到“两性人依止师”为止,也都应该按同样的道理来理解。巴利
117.Tenakho pana samayenāti yena samayena bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṃ apaññattaṃ hoti, tena samayena. Anupajjhāyakanti upajjhaṃ agāhāpetvā sabbena sabbaṃ upajjhāyavirahitaṃ. Evaṃ upasampannā neva dhammato na āmisato saṅgahaṃ labhanti, te parihāyantiyeva, na vaḍḍhanti. Na bhikkhave anupajjhāyakoti upajjhaṃ agāhāpetvā nirupajjhāyako na upasampādetabbo. Yo upasampādeyya āpatti dukkaṭassāti sikkhāpadapaññattito paṭṭhāya evaṃ upasampādentassa āpatti hoti; kammaṃ pana na kuppati. Keci kuppatīti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Saṅghena upajjhāyenātiādīsupi ubhatobyañjanakupajjhāyapariyosānesu eseva nayo.
无钵等事论巴利
Apattakādivatthukathā
118 “以手受食而行乞”是指:凡是能在手中得到的食物,他们就是为了这个而四处行乞。就像外道那样——比如那些名叫邪命外道的出家人,他们把汤和菜肴混在一起,直接放在手心里托着吃。犯恶作罪:这样给人授具足戒的人,就犯了这条罪,但甘马本身不会失效。无衣等情形也是同样的道理。巴利
118.Hatthesu piṇḍāya carantīti yo hatthesu piṇḍo labbhati, tadatthāya caranti. Seyyathāpi titthiyāti yathā ājīvakanāmakā titthiyā; sūpabyañjanehi missetvā hatthesu ṭhapitapiṇḍameva hi te bhuñjanti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ upasampādentasseva āpatti hoti, kammaṃ pana na kuppati. Acīvarakādivatthūsupi eseva nayo.
所谓“借来的”,就是通过请求“请先借给我们,等我们完成达上再说”而拿来使用的;意思是只在这段时间内临时用。因为用这样的钵、衣或钵衣来给人授达上,授戒者本人就会犯戒,但甘马本身不会失效。所以,应当用完整齐全的钵和衣来授达上。如果他本人没有,而他的戒师、依止师愿意给他,或者别的比丘以无所牵挂的心舍出来,那就应当把堪受持的钵和衣给他。不过,对于想出家的人,即使是用借来的钵和衣,也可以让他出家;在同类情形下,凭信任取来之后让他出家,也是可以的。巴利
Yācitakenāti ‘‘yāva upasampadaṃ karoma, tāva dethā’’ti yācitvā gahitena; tāvakālikenāti attho. Īdisena hi pattena vā cīvarena vā pattacīvarena vā upasampādentasseva āpatti hoti, kammaṃ pana na kuppati, tasmā paripuṇṇapattacīvarova upasampādetabbo. Sace tassa natthi, ācariyupajjhāyā cassa dātukāmā honti, aññe vā bhikkhū nirapekkhehi nissajjitvā adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ pattacīvaraṃ dātabbaṃ. Pabbajjāpekkhaṃ pana paṇḍupalāsaṃ yācitakenāpi pattacīvarena pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati, sabhāgaṭṭhāne vissāsena gahetvāpi pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.
如果他是带着还没烧制的钵和可以做衣的布来的,那么在他烧制钵、缝制衣服的这段时间里,对住在精舍里的他,可以给未经手触的团食,可以让他用钵进食;午饭前,可以给他和沙弥同等份的食物。但卧坐处的分配、筹食、指定食、邀请食等则不适用。午饭后,也可以给他和沙弥同等份的油、蜜、糖等药品。如果他生病了,可以为他准备药物,并且可以像照顾沙弥一样,做一切照料的事。巴利
Sace pana apakkaṃ pattaṃ cīvarūpagāni ca vatthāni gahetvā āgato hoti, yāva patto paccati, cīvarāni ca kariyanti, tāva vihāre vasantassa anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapātaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭati, thālake bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, purebhattaṃ sāmaṇerabhāgasamako āmisabhāgo dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Senāsanaggāho pana salākabhattauddesabhattanimantanādīni ca na vaṭṭanti. Pacchābhattampi sāmaṇerabhāgasamo telamadhuphāṇitādibhesajjabhāgo vaṭṭati. Sace gilāno hoti, bhesajjamassa kātuṃ vaṭṭati, sāmaṇerassa viya ca sabbaṃ paṭijagganakammanti.
关于断手等情形(的判定)的讨论巴利
Hatthacchinnādivatthukathā
119 119. 关于断手等情形:断手,是指某人的手掌、手腕或手肘等任何一处,一只手或两只手被砍断。断脚,是指某人的脚尖、脚踝或小腿等任何一处,一只脚或两只脚被砍断。断手脚,是指按上面所说的方式,在两手两脚这四肢当中,有两处、三处或全部都被砍断。断耳,是指某人的耳根或耳垂处,一只耳朵或两只耳朵被砍断。但如果是在耳孔处裂开,而且还能缝合,就可以先把耳朵缝合好,再让他出家。断鼻,是指某人的鼻梁、鼻尖或一侧鼻翼等任何一处,鼻子被砍断。但如果鼻子的伤口还能接合,就把它处理好、让它愈合妥当之后,再让他出家。断耳鼻,则按耳和鼻两方面综合理解。断指,是指看不到指甲残留,一根或多根手指被砍断。但如果还看得出像线头那么一点点的指甲残留,就可以让他出家。断拇指,是指在四根拇指当中,按前面所说的方式,一根或多根拇指在指节处被砍断。断筋,是指名为“筋”的粗大肌腱在前面或后面被砍断;只要其中有一根被砍断,他就会用脚尖走路,或用脚跟走路,或者根本无法把脚稳稳地踩在地上。巴利
119. Hatthacchinnādivatthūsu – hatthacchinnoti yassa hatthatale vā maṇibandhe vā kappare vā yattha katthaci eko vā dve vā hatthā chinnā honti. Pādacchinnoti yassa aggapāde vā gopphakesu vā jaṅghāya vā yattha katthaci eko vā dve vā pādā chinnā honti. Hatthapādacchinnoti yassa vuttappakāreneva catūsu hatthapādesu dve vā tayo vā sabbe vā hatthapādā chinnā honti. Kaṇṇacchinnoti yassa kaṇṇamūle vā kaṇṇasakkhalikāya vā eko vā dve vā kaṇṇā chinnā honti. Yassa pana kaṇṇāviddhe chijjanti, sakkā ca hoti saṅghāṭetuṃ, so kaṇṇaṃ saṅghāṭetvā pabbājetabbo. Nāsacchinnoti yassa ajapadake vā agge vā ekapuṭe vā yattha katthaci nāsā chinnā hoti. Yassa pana nāsikā sakkā hoti sandhetuṃ, so taṃ phāsukaṃ katvā pabbājetabbo. Kaṇṇanāsacchinno ubhayavasena veditabbo. Aṅgulicchinnoti yassa nakhasesaṃ adassetvā ekā vā bahū vā aṅguliyo chinnā honti. Yassa pana suttatantumattampi nakhasesaṃ paññāyati, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Aḷacchinnoti yassa catūsu aṅguṭṭhakesu aṅguliyaṃ vuttanayeneva eko vā bahū vā aṅguṭṭhakā chinnā honti. Kaṇḍaracchinnoti yassa kaṇḍaranāmakā mahānhārū purato vā pacchato vā chinnā honti; yesu ekassapi chinnattā aggapādena vā caṅkamati, mūlena vā caṅkamati, na vā pādaṃ patiṭṭhāpetuṃ sakkoti.
蹼手者,是指手指像蝙蝠的翼膜那样连在一起。想给他出家的人,应该把他指缝之间切开,把中间的皮全部去掉,弄平整之后再给他出家。如果有人有六根手指,想给他出家的人,应该把多出来的那根手指切掉,弄平整之后再给他出家。巴利
Phaṇahatthakoti yassa vaggulipakkhakā viya aṅguliyo sambaddhā honti; etaṃ pabbājetukāmena aṅgulantarikāyo phāletvā sabbaṃ antaracammaṃ apanetvā phāsukaṃ katvā pabbājetabbo. Yassapi cha aṅguliyo honti, taṃ pabbājetukāmena adhikaaṅguliṃ chinditvā phāsukaṃ katvā pabbājetabbo.
由于胸部、背部或肋部突出而身体佝偻的,就是驼背者。但如果他某些肢节只是稍微有点弯曲,那就可以让他出家。因为只有大丈夫才身如梵天一般正直,其余众生没有哪个不是驼背的。巴利
Khujjoti yo urassa vā piṭṭhiyā vā passassa vā nikkhantattā khujjasarīro. Yassa pana kiñci kiñci aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ īsakaṃ vaṅkaṃ, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Mahāpuriso eva hi brahmujjugatto, avaseso satto akhujjo nāma natthi.
侏儒,是指小腿侏儒、腰部侏儒或两者兼具的侏儒。小腿侏儒的人,从腰以下下半身短小,上半身则发育完整。腰部侏儒的人,从腰以上上半身短小,下半身则发育完整。两者兼具的侏儒,上下两部分身体都短小;因为短小,他的身体就像某些众生那样圆滚滚的,像一只大肚子瓮。这三种人皆不宜令其出家。巴利
Vāmanoti jaṅghavāmano vā kaṭivāmano vā ubhayavāmano vā. Jaṅghavāmanassa kaṭito paṭṭhāya heṭṭhimakāyo rasso hoti, uparimakāyo paripuṇṇo. Kaṭivāmanassa kaṭito paṭṭhāya uparimakāyo rasso hoti, heṭṭhimakāyo paripuṇṇo. Ubhayavāmanassa ubhopi kāyā rassā honti, yesaṃ rassattā bhūtānaṃ viya parivaṭumo mahākucchighaṭasadiso attabhāvo hoti, taṃ tividhampi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
“瘿病者”,是指脖子上长了一个像瓮一样的肿块的人。这里只是举一个例子说明而已;实际上,不论身体哪个部位长了肿块,都不应让他出家。其中的判定标准,应当依照“诸比丘,不得让患五种病的人出家”等处所说的方式来理解。至于被烙印、被鞭打、被刺字的人,该怎么说,已经在“诸比丘,不得让被烙印者出家”等文中说过了。巴利
Galagaṇḍīti yassa kumbhaṇḍaṃ viya gale gaṇḍo hoti. Desanāmattameva cetaṃ, yasmiṃ kismiñci pana padese gaṇḍe sati na pabbājetabbo. Tattha vinicchayo – ‘‘na bhikkhave pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭho pabbājetabbo’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Lakkhaṇāhatakasāhatalikhitakesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘na bhikkhave lakkhaṇāhato’’tiādīsu vuttameva.
“象脚”是指脚掌肥厚。如果一个人的脚又粗又大,还长了疙瘩,皮肤粗糙,就不应该给他出家。但如果还没有变得那么粗糙,还可以这样处理:把脚包扎起来,放进水坑里,再填满水和沙子,让血管显露出来,小腿变得像油筒一样,能够这样让它萎缩下去,那就可以把他的脚弄成这样之后,再给他出家。如果后来脚又长回去了,授戒师即使在给他授具足戒时,也应当照样处理过之后,再给他授具足戒。巴利
Sīpadīti bhārapādo vuccati. Yassa pādo thūlo hoti sañjātapiḷako kharo, so na pabbājetabbo. Yassa pana na tāva kharabhāvaṃ gaṇhāti, sakkā hoti upanāhaṃ bandhitvā udakaāvāṭe pavesetvā udakavālikāya pūretvā yathā sirā paññāyanti, jaṅghā ca telanāḷikā viya hoti, evaṃ milāpetuṃ sakkā, tassa pādaṃ īdisaṃ katvā taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace puna vaḍḍhati, upasampādentenāpi tathā katvāva upasampādetabbo.
患恶疾者:若因痔疮、瘘管、胆病、痰病、咳嗽、痨病等任何一种疾病而长期病痛缠身,患的是治不好的病,令人厌恶、不喜,此人不应被授具足戒。巴利
Pāparogīti arisabhagandarapittasemhakāsasosādīsu yena kenaci rogena niccāturo atekiccharogo jeguccho amanāpo; ayaṃ na pabbājetabbo.
“污损僧众者”,就是有人因为自己长得难看而让僧众蒙羞。比如:个子太高,肚脐跟别人头顶一样高;个子太矮,像两边都缩着的小矮人;肤色太黑,像烧过的田里留下的焦树桩;肤色太白,像用酸奶之类擦过的光滑铜器;太瘦,血肉很少,身体像只剩骨头、筋和皮;太胖,肉很沉重;肚子太大,像个大鬼;头太大,像把箩筐顶在头上站着;头太小,跟身体完全不搭,小得离谱;头尖得像锤子顶,像一团棕榈果;头尖得像山峰,往上越来越细;头长得像竹节,像大竹节一样;头一边高一边低,像手肘弯、像山坡,四个方向总有一边歪斜;头上有疮、头腐烂,或者头发像耳垢,被虫子咬得一块一块,像田里稀稀拉拉的庄稼,东一撮西一撮竖着;头上没毛,或者头发又粗又硬,像棕榈纤维;因为天生白发而满头白,或者头发天生是铜色,像火烧过一样;头上长旋,头发旋得像牛身上的旋毛那样朝上竖;眉毛和头发连成一片,额头像被网罩住一样。巴利
Parisadūsakoti yo attano virūpatāya parisaṃ dūseti; atidīgho vā hoti aññesaṃ sīsappamāṇanābhippadeso, atirasso vā ubhayavāmanabhūtarūpaṃ viya, atikāḷo vā jhāpitakhette khāṇuko viya, accodāto vā dadhitakkādīhi pamajjitamaṭṭhatambalohavaṇṇo, atikiso vā mandamaṃsalohito aṭṭhisirācammasarīro viya, atithūlo vā bhāriyamaṃso, mahodaro vā mahābhūtasadiso, atimahantasīso vā pacchiṃ sīse katvā ṭhito viya, atikhuddakasīso vā sarīrassa ananurūpena atikhuddakena sīsena samannāgato, kūṭakūṭasīso vā tālaphalapiṇḍisadisena sīsena samannāgato, sikharasīso vā uddhaṃ anupubbatanukena sīsena samannāgato, nāḷisīso vā mahāveḷupabbasadisena sīsena samannāgato, kappasīso vā pabbhārasīso vā catūsu passesu yena kenaci passena oṇatena sīsena samannāgato, vaṇasīso vā pūtisīso vā kaṇṇikakeso vā pāṇakehi khāyitakedāre sassasadisehi tahiṃ tahiṃ uṭṭhitehi kesehi samannāgato, nillomasīso vā thūlathaddhakeso vā tālahīrasadisehi kesehi samannāgato, jātipalitehi paṇḍarasīso vā pakatitambakeso vā ādittehi viya kesehi samannāgato, āvaṭṭasīso vā gunnaṃ sarīre āvaṭṭasadisehi uddhaggehi kesāvaṭṭehi samannāgato, sīsalomehi saddhiṃ ekābaddhabhamukalomo vā jālabaddhena viya nalāṭena samannāgato.
眉毛连成一片的,或者眉毛光秃秃的,或者眉毛像猴子一样的;或者眼睛太大的,或者眼睛太小的,或者眼睛像在水牛皮上用锥子尖扎出来的洞一样;或者两眼不对称,一只大一只小;或者眼眶不对称,一只朝上一只朝下,眼眶这样不对称的;或者斜眼,或者深眼窝,瞳孔像深井里的星星一样;或者眼睛凸出,瞳孔像螃蟹一样凸出来;或者耳朵像大象,耳廓很大;或者耳朵像老鼠、耳朵像蝙蝠,耳廓很小;或者只有耳孔,没有耳廓,只有耳孔而已;或者耳朵没有穿孔,但如果是希腊族人,就不算污损僧众,因为他天生就是这样;或者耳朵有耳瘘,耳朵经常腐臭;或者耳朵长瘤,耳朵经常流脓;或者耳朵像木槌,耳朵像喂牛料的竹筒口;或者眼睛太红,但如果是蜜黄色的眼睛,那就可以出家;或者没有睫毛的眼睛、或者流泪的眼睛、或者眼睛有花翳(白内障)的、或者得了眼炎的眼睛。巴利
Sambaddhabhamuko vā nillomabhamuko vā makkaṭabhamuko vā atimahantakkhi vā atikhuddakakkhi vā mahiṃsacamme vāsikoṇena paharitvā katachiddasadisehi akkhīhi samannāgato, visamakkhi vā ekena mahantena ekena khuddakena akkhinā samannāgato, visamacakkalo vā ekena uddhaṃ ekena adhoti evaṃ visamajātehi akkhicakkalehi samannāgato, kekaro vā gambhīrakkhi vā yassa gambhīre udapāne udakatārakā viya akkhitārakā paññāyanti; nikkhantakkhi vā yassa kakkaṭakasseva akkhitārakā nikkhantā honti; hatthikaṇṇo vā mahatīhi kaṇṇasakkhalikāhi samannāgato, mūsikakaṇṇo vā jaṭukakaṇṇo vā khuddikāhi kaṇṇasakkhalikāhi samannāgato, chiddamattakaṇṇo vā yassa vinā kaṇṇasakkhalikāhi kaṇṇachiddamattameva hoti; aviddhakaṇṇo vā yonakajātiko pana parisadūsako na hoti; sabhāvoyeva hi so tassa kaṇṇabhagandariko vā niccapūtinā kaṇṇena samannāgato, gaṇḍakaṇṇo vā sadāpaggharitapubbena kaṇṇena samannāgato, ṭaṅkitakaṇṇo vā gobhattanāḷikāya aggasadisehi kaṇṇehi samannāgato, atipiṅgalakkhi vā madhupiṅgalaṃ pana pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Nippakhumakkhi vā assupaggharaṇakkhi vā pupphitakkhi vā akkhipākena samannāgatakkhi vā.
鼻子特别大,或者鼻子特别小,或者鼻子扁塌,或者鼻子歪向一边、鼻梁中间没有隆起;或者鼻子很长,舌头像鹦鹉嘴一样,能够舔到自己的鼻子;或者鼻子经常流鼻涕。巴利
Atimahantanāsiko vā atikhuddakanāsiko vā cipiṭanāsiko vā majjhe appatiṭṭhahitvā ekapasse ṭhitavaṅkanāsiko vā, dīghanāsiko vā sukatuṇḍasadisāya jivhāya lehituṃ sakkuṇeyyāya nāsikāya samannāgato, niccapaggharitasiṅghāṇikanāso vā.
或者嘴特别大,嘴巴的形状像蚱蜢、青蛙那样大得离谱,但嘴本身却像葫芦一样极小;或者嘴裂开、或者嘴歪斜;或者嘴唇大,双唇厚得像锅沿一样;或者嘴唇薄,薄得像鼓皮,包不住牙齿;或者下唇大、或者上唇薄、或者下唇薄、或者上唇大;或者嘴唇有缺口;或者嘴像羊嘴、或者嘴像烧焦的样子、或者嘴像贝壳,嘴唇外面白、里面特别红;或者嘴臭得像尸体一样。巴利
Mahāmukho vā yassa paṭaṅgamaṇḍūkasseva mukhanimittaṃyeva mahantaṃ hoti, mukhaṃ pana lābusadisaṃ atikhuddakaṃ, bhinnamukho vā vaṅkamukho vā mahāoṭṭho vā ukkhalimukhavaṭṭisadisehi oṭṭhehi samannāgato, tanukaoṭṭho vā bhericammasadisehi dante pidahituṃ asamatthehi oṭṭhehi samannāgato, mahādharoṭṭho vā tanukauttaroṭṭho vā tanukaadharoṭṭho vā mahāuttaroṭṭho vā oṭṭhachinnako vā eḷamukho vā uppakkamukho vā saṅkhatuṇḍako vā bahisetehi anto atirattehi oṭṭhehi samannāgato, duggandhakuṇapamukho vā.
牙齿特别大的,或者牙齿像骰子一样整齐的;或者像阿修罗的牙,牙齿向下或向上突出到嘴唇外面。但如果能用嘴唇盖住,只在说话时才露出来、不说话时不露出来,这样的人可以让他出家。牙齿腐臭的,或者没有牙齿的;但如果牙缝间有像松鼠牙那样细小的牙齿,这样的人可以让他出家。巴利
Mahādanto vā aṭṭhakadantasadisehi dantehi samannāgato asuradanto vā heṭṭhā vā upari vā bahinikkhantadanto, yassa pana sakkā hoti oṭṭhehi pidahituṃ kathentasseva paññāyati no akathentassa, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Pūtidanto vā niddanto vā yassa pana dantantare kalandakadanto viya sukhumadanto hoti, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.
下巴特别大,像牛下巴一样;或者下巴很长;或者下巴扁平,短得像缩进里面一样;或者下巴裂开;或者下巴歪斜;或者没有胡须;或者脸长得像比丘尼;或者脖子很长,像鹤的脖子;或者脖子很短,像缩进里面一样;或者脖子裂开;或者肩膀塌陷;或者没有手、只有一只手、手特别短、手特别长;或者胸口裂开、后背裂开;或者身上长疥疮、长痒疹、长癣,或者皮肤像蜥蜴一样,身上的皮屑像蜥蜴那样往下掉。以上这些都是就丑陋形相而作的详细说明。至于这里的判定标准,应当依照“诸比丘,勿以五种病……”那里所说的方式来了知。巴利
Mahāhanuko vā gohanusadisena hanunā samannāgato, dīghahanuko vā cipiṭahanuko vā antopaviṭṭhena viya atirassena hanukena samannāgato, bhinnahanuko vā vaṅkahanuko vā nimmassudāṭhiko vā bhikkhunisadisamukho dīghagalo vā bakagalasadisena galena samannāgato, rassagalo vā antopaviṭṭhena viya galena samannāgato, bhinnagalo vā bhaṭṭhaaṃsakūṭo vā ahattho vā ekahattho vā atirassahattho vā atidīghahattho vā bhinnauro vā bhinnapiṭṭhi vā kacchugatto vā kaṇḍugatto vā daddugatto vā godhāgatto vā, yassa godhāya viya gattato cuṇṇāni patanti, sabbañcetaṃ virūpakaraṇaṃ sandhāya vitthārikavasena vuttaṃ. Vinicchayo panettha ‘‘na bhikkhave pañcahi ābādhehī’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
臀部塌陷,或者臀部特别大,或者臀肉高高隆起像灶台顶一样;或者大腿粗壮,或者膝盖内弯,或者膝盖特别大,或者两膝相碰,或者小腿很长,或者小腿像棍子一样;或者身体畸形,或者跛脚,或者小腿肚向上吊起。这又分两种:小腿肚向下垂,或者小腿肚向上耸。或者小腿粗大,或者小腿肚肥厚,或者脚很大,或者脚跟很大,或者脚背高突,或者小腿从脚掌中间长出来,或者脚弯曲。这又分两种:脚向内翻,或者脚向外翻。或者手指像瘤节一样,或者手指像姜芽一样,或者指甲发黑,或者指甲黑烂。所有这些,都是污染僧团的人。像这样污染僧团的人,不应该给他出家。巴利
Bhaṭṭhakaṭiko vā mahāānisado vā uddhanakūṭasadisehi ānisadamaṃsehi accuggatehi samannāgato, mahāūruko vā vātaṇḍiko vā mahājāṇuko vā saṅghaṭṭanajāṇuko vā dīghajaṅgho vā yaṭṭhisadisajaṅgho vikaṭo vā paṇho vā ubbaddhapiṇḍiko vā, so duvidho heṭṭhā oruḷhāhi vā upari āruḷhāhi vā mahatīhi jaṅghapiṇḍikāhi samannāgato, mahājaṅgho vā thūlajaṅghapiṇḍiko vā mahāpādo vā mahāpaṇhi vā piṭṭhikapādo vā pādavemajjhato uṭṭhitajaṅgho vaṅkapādo vā so duvidho – anto vā bahi vā parivattapādo gaṇṭhikaṅguli vā siṅgiveraphaṇasadisāhi aṅgulīhi samannāgato, andhanakho vā kāḷavaṇṇehi pūtinakhehi samannāgato, sabbopi esa parisadūsako. Evarūpo parisadūsako na pabbājetabbo.
所谓盲者,可能是天生眼盲,也可能是因为花等外物而损坏了视力。凡是双眼或单眼看不见的人,都不应让他出家。不过,《大帕查利》中说,单眼瞎的人称为盲,双眼瞎的人则归入盲类。《大义注》中说,天生瞎的人称为盲。因此,两种说法按各自的道理都能成立。所谓曲手者,就是手弯曲、脚弯曲或手指弯曲;只要在手、脚等这些部位上发现有任何弯曲,这个人就叫做曲手者。所谓跛者,包括膝盖前突的人、小腿折断的人、因为脚掌中间挛缩而脚呈团状的人、用脚背中间行走的人、因为脚尖挛缩而用脚背前端行走的人、完全用脚尖行走的跛者、用脚跟行走的跛者、用脚外侧行走的跛者、用脚内侧行走的跛者,以及因为踝骨以上折断而用整个脚背行走的跛者。所有这些人都是跛者,不应让他出家。巴利
Kāṇoti pasannandho vā hotu pupphādīhi vā upahatapasādo. Yo dvīhi vā ekena vā akkhinā na passati, so na pabbājetabbo. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ekakkhikāṇo kāṇoti vutto, dviakkhikāṇo andhena saṅgahito. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ jaccandho andhoti vutto, tasmā ubhayampi pariyāyena yujjati. Kuṇīti hatthakuṇī vā pādakuṇī vā aṅgulikuṇī vā; yassa etesu hatthādīsu yaṃkiñci vaṅkaṃ paññāyati, so kuṇī nāma. Khañjoti natajāṇuko vā bhinnajaṅgho vā majjhe saṅkuṭitapādattā kuṇḍapādako vā piṭṭhipādamajjhena caṅkamanto agge saṅkuṭitapādattā kuṇḍapādako vā piṭṭhipādaggena caṅkamanto aggapādeneva caṅkamanakhañjo vā paṇhikāya caṅkamanakhañjo vā pādassa bāhirantena caṅkamanakhañjo vā pādassa abbhantarantena caṅkamanakhañjo vā gopphakānaṃ upari bhaggattā sakalena piṭṭhipādena caṅkamanakhañjo vā; sabbopesa khañjoyeva, so na pabbājetabbo.
所谓半身不遂,是指一个人有一只手、一只脚或半边身体不能正常活动。所谓行动断绝,是指那种只能靠凳子爬行的人。所谓老弱,是指因为年老而衰弱,连给自己染衣等事情都做不了。但如果有人虽然年纪大却还有力气,能够照顾自己,那就可以让他出家。所谓全盲,是指生下来就看不见的人。所谓哑,是指说不出话的人;即使能发出声音,但如果不能完整说出皈依文,这种口齿不清的人也不应该让他出家。但如果能完整说出皈依文,那就可以让他出家。巴利
Pakkhahatoti yassa eko hattho vā pādo vā aḍḍhasarīraṃ vā sukhaṃ na vahati. Chinniriyāpathoti pīṭhasappi vuccati. Jarādubbaloti jiṇṇabhāvena dubbalo attano cīvararajanādikammaṃ kātumpi asamattho. Yo pana mahallakopi balavā hoti, attānaṃ paṭijaggituṃ sakkoti, so pabbājetabbo. Andhoti jaccandho vuccati. Mūgoti yassa vacībhedo nappavattati; yassāpi pavattati, saraṇagamanaṃ pana paripuṇṇaṃ bhāsituṃ na sakkoti, tādisaṃ mammanampi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yo pana saraṇagamanamattaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ bhāsituṃ sakkoti, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati.
所谓聋人,就是完全听不到任何声音的人。但如果能听到大声,就可以允许他出家。盲人、哑巴等,则是根据同时具有两种缺陷来说的。凡是出家被禁止的人,受达上也同样被禁止。如果僧团给他们授达上,那么所有像手被砍断这类的人虽然都算是受了达上,但主持仪式的僧团以及戒师、依止师却无法从罪过中解脱。而且后面还会说到:“诸比丘,有一种人还不适合被接纳,如果僧团接纳了他,有的人是善巧接纳,有的人是错误接纳。”这段话的意思,在相关出处那里就会说明。巴利
Badhiroti yo sabbena sabbaṃ na suṇāti. Yo pana mahāsaddaṃ suṇāti, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. Andhamūgādayo ubhayadosavasena vuttā. Yesañca pabbajjā paṭikkhittā, upasampadāpi tesaṃ paṭikkhittāva. Sace pana te saṅgho upasampādeti, sabbepi hatthacchinnādayo sūpasampannā, kārakasaṅgho pana ācariyupajjhāyā ca āpattito na muccanti. Vakkhati ca – ‘‘atthi bhikkhave puggalo appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, ekacco suosārito, ekacco duosārito’’ti tassattho āgataṭṭhāneyeva āvi bhavissatīti.
依止无惭者之事解说巴利
Alajjīnissayavatthukathā
120 “依止无惭者而住”这句话,是以属格来表达宾格的意思;意思是依止无惭的人而住。“直到我知其与比丘同类”的意思是:直到我知道给予依止的比丘与诸比丘同类、具有惭耻。“同类”在这里指具有惭耻的状态。因此,新到一个地方的人,即使听到有人说“来吧,比丘,接受依止”,也应当先观察给予依止者四五天的惭耻表现,然后才能接受依止。巴利
120.Alajjīnaṃ nissāya vasantīti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ; alajjipuggale nissāya vasantīti attho. Yāva bhikkhusabhāgataṃ jānāmīti nissayadāyakassa bhikkhuno bhikkhūhi sabhāgataṃ lajjibhāvaṃ yāva jānāmīti attho. Tasmā navaṃ ṭhānaṃ gatena ‘‘ehi bhikkhu, nissayaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vuccamānenāpi catūhapañcāhaṃ nissayadāyakassa lajjibhāvaṃ upaparikkhitvā nissayo gahetabbo.
如果新比丘从比丘们那里听说“这位长老是有惭耻心的人”,就在他到来的当天就想接受依止,而长老却说“先等一等,住下来你就会知道”,观察了几天他的行为之后才给予依止,这是可以的。按常例,前往接受依止的地方,应当在当天就接受,连一天也不能拖延。如果初夜时戒师没有空,没得到机会,心里想着“天亮时我再接受”就躺下,结果天亮了也不知道,这不算犯。但如果躺下时没有作“我要接受”的意念,到天亮时就犯恶作。前往以前没去过的地方,住了两三天后想离开,可以不受依止而住。但如果心里打算“我要住七天”而生了留恋,那就应当接受依止。如果长老说“住七天何必受依止”,那么从被拒绝的时候起,就算得到了通融。巴利
Sace ‘‘thero lajjī’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ santike sutvā āgatadivaseyeva gahetukāmo hoti, thero pana ‘‘āgamehi tāva, vasanto jānissasī’’ti katipāhaṃ ācāraṃ upaparikkhitvā nissayaṃ deti, vaṭṭati. Pakatiyā nissayaggahaṇaṭṭhānaṃ gatena tadaheva gahetabbo, ekadivasampi parihāro natthi. Sace paṭhamayāme ācariyassa okāso natthi, okāsaṃ alabhanto ‘‘paccūsasamaye gahessāmī’’ti sayati, aruṇaṃ uggatampi na jānāti, anāpatti. Sace pana ‘‘gaṇhissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ akatvā sayati, aruṇuggamane dukkaṭaṃ. Agatapubbaṃ ṭhānaṃ gatena dve tīṇi divasāni vasitvā gantukāmena anissitena vasitabbaṃ. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ vasissāmī’’ti ālayaṃ karontena pana nissayo gahetabbo. Sace thero ‘‘kiṃ sattāhaṃ vasantassa nissayenā’’ti vadati, paṭikkhittakālato paṭṭhāya laddhaparihāro hoti.
关于村民等依止处事的讨论巴利
Gamikādinissayavatthukathā
121 “应当做依止”的意思是:应当做的依止,即我应当接受的依止;意思就是应当受持。所谓“没有得到依止的人”,是指与自己一同在旅途上的人当中,如果没有给予依止的人,那就叫没有得到依止。像这样没有得到依止时,即使没有依止也可以走很多天。如果进入某个以前曾经受过依止并住过的住处,哪怕只住一夜,也必须受持依止。如果在半路上休息,或者为了寻找商队而住几天,不算犯戒。但在雨安居期间,必须固定住在一处,并且要受持依止。如果是乘船出行的人,即使雨安居到了,在得不到依止的情况下,也不算犯戒。巴利
121.Nissayakaraṇīyoti karaṇīyanissayo, karaṇīyo mayā nissayo; gahetabboti attho. Nissayaṃ alabhamānenāti attanā saddhiṃ addhānamaggappaṭipannesu nissayadāyake asati nissayaṃ na labhati nāma. Evaṃ alabhantena anissitena bahūnipi divasāni gantabbaṃ. Sace pubbepi nissayaṃ gahetvā vutthapubbaṃ kañci āvāsaṃ pavisati, ekarattaṃ vasantenāpi nissayo gahetabbo. Antarāmagge vissamanto vā satthaṃ pariyesanto vā katipāhaṃ vasati, anāpatti. Antovasse pana nibaddhavāsaṃ vasitabbaṃ, nissayo ca gahetabbo. Nāvāya gacchantassa pana vassāne āgatepi nissayaṃ alabhantassa anāpatti.
当病人请求时,就应当由那位病人请求之后,不依赖而住。如果病人被人说“你来请求我”,他却因为傲慢而不请求,那就应当离开。巴利
Yāciyamānenāti tena gilānena yāciyamānena anissitena vasitabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘yācāhi ma’’nti vuccamānopi gilāno mānena na yācati, gantabbaṃ.
“得安乐”是指因为获得止与观而安乐。这种回避的做法,入流者、一来者、不来者、阿拉汉都得不到;已经得到稳固的定或观的人,也得不到;至于那些舍弃了业处的愚痴凡夫,就更不用说了。可是,如果有人止或观还很薄弱,他就能得到这种回避,而自恣的摄受也只开许给这种人。所以,这个人向导师自恣之后,即使导师离开了,也应该这样作意:“等有合适的能给予依止的人来了,我就依止他而住。”这样作意之后,在还没有依止的情况下,可以住到下一个阿沙荼月圆日。但如果阿沙荼月里导师还没来,就应该前往能得到依止的地方。巴利
Phāsuhotīti samathavipassanānaṃ paṭilābhavasena phāsu hoti. Imañhi parihāraṃ neva sotāpanno na sakadāgāmī anāgāmī arahanto labhanti; na thāmagatassa samādhino vā vipassanāya vā lābhī, vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhāne pana bālaputhujjane kathāva natthi. Yassa kho pana samatho vā vipassanā vā taruṇo hoti, ayaṃ imaṃ parihāraṃ labhati, pavāraṇasaṅgahopi etasseva anuññāto. Tasmā iminā puggalena ācariye pavāretvā gatepi ‘‘yadā patirūpo nissayadāyako āgacchissati, tassa nissāya vasissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā puna yāva āsāḷhīpuṇṇamā, tāva anissitena vatthuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana āsāḷhīmāse ācariyo nāgacchati, yattha nissayo labbhati, tattha gantabbaṃ.
122 “也以姓氏来宣告”的意思是:我允许先说出像“大迦叶的求达上者”这样的姓氏,然后再作宣告。巴利
122.Gottenapi anussāvetunti mahākassapassa upasampadāpekkhoti evaṃ gottaṃ vatvā anussāvetuṃ anujānāmīti attho.
123 “两人同一宣告”是指两人一起作宣告,即一位为这个人宣说、另一位为另一个人宣说;我允许由两位戒师,或由一位戒师在同一时刻宣说甘马语,这样来授具足戒。巴利
123.Dve ekānussāvaneti dve ekato anussāvane; ekena ekassa aññena itarassāti evaṃ dvīhi vā ācariyehi ekena vā ekakkhaṇe kammavācaṃ anussāventehi upasampādetuṃ anujānāmīti attho.
我允许把两个人或三个人放在一起念诵同一段甘马语,但必须由同一位和尚主持。也就是说,按照前面说的方式,把两个或三个人集中到一处来念诵甘马语,而念诵甘马语这件事,我允许由同一位和尚来做。所以,应该由一位戒师给两个人或三个人念诵。或者,由两位或三位戒师各自分别给其中一人念诵,也就是在同一时间完成两遍或三遍甘马语。不过,如果戒师不同、和尚也不同,比如帝萨长老给须摩那长老的共住弟子念诵,须摩那长老给帝萨长老的共住弟子念诵,而他们彼此凑够人数,这是可以的。但如果和尚不同而戒师是同一个人,那么因为“不得由不同和尚”这条规定已被禁止,就不可以。这条禁止正是针对这种情况说的。巴利
Dve tayo ekānussāvane kātuṃ tañca kho ekena upajjhāyenāti dve vā tayo vā jane purimanayeneva ekato anussāvane kātuṃ anujānāmi; tañca kho anussāvanakiriyaṃ ekena upajjhāyena anujānāmīti attho. Tasmā ekena ācariyena dve vā tayo vā anussāvetabbā. Dvīhi vā tīhi vā ācariyehi visuṃ visuṃ ekena ekassāti evaṃ ekappahāreneva dve tisso vā kammavācā kātabbā. Sace pana nānācariyā nānupajjhāyā honti, tissatthero sumanattherassa saddhivihārikaṃ, sumanatthero tissattherassa saddhivihārikaṃ anussāveti, aññamaññañca gaṇapūrakā honti, vaṭṭati. Sace pana nānāupajjhāyā honti, eko ācariyo hoti, ‘‘natveva nānupajjhāyenā’’ti paṭikkhittattā na vaṭṭati. Idaṃ sandhāya hi esa paṭikkhepo.
达上仪轨解说巴利
Upasampadāvidhikathā
126 首先应当让他执取和尚。这里说,因为审察可责与不可责的事,所以叫“和尚”(upajjhā),即执取他为和尚。要让他说出“尊者,请做我的和尚”这样的话之后,再让他执取。“他们肢体僵硬”,意思是他们的身体变得僵直。“凡是所生的”,是指在你身上所生起、已产生、存在的,当在僧团中被问到时,应当回答“有”等等。“请救拔我”,意思是请把我拉上来、救度我。巴利
126.Paṭhamaṃupajjhaṃ gāhāpetabboti ettha vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhā, taṃ upajjhaṃ; ‘‘upajjhāyo me bhante hohī’’ti evaṃ vadāpetvā gāhāpetabbo. Vitthāyantīti vitthaddhagattā honti. Yaṃ jātanti yaṃ tava sarīre jātaṃ nibbattaṃ vijjamānaṃ, taṃ saṅghamajjhe pucchante santaṃ atthīti vattabbantiādi. Ullumpatu manti uddharatu maṃ.
关于四依止等的解说巴利
Cattāronissayādikathā
128 “即刻”是指刚受完具足戒之后。“应当量影”是指应当量一人的身高或两人的身高,也就是量影子。“应当说明季节的量”是指应当说明“这是雨季、凉季、热季”这样的季节情况。在这里,季节本身就是季节的量。如果雨季等还没有圆满,就应当记下这个季节还差几天才圆满,然后说明那剩余日数的部分。或者应当这样说明季节的情况:“这是某某季节,它是圆满的或是不圆满的。”应当说明日分:“这是上午”或“这是下午”。“总集”是指把这一切汇总在一起,应当这样教导:如果被问到“你得到什么?你的影量是多少?季节是什么?日分是什么?”时,你应当回答:“我得到这个——雨季、凉季或热季,我的影量是这样,季节是这样,日分是这样。”巴利
128.Tāvadevāti upasampannasamanantarameva. Chāyā metabbāti ekaporisā vā dviporisā vāti chāyā metabbā. Utuppamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabbanti ‘‘vassāno hemanto gimho’’ti evaṃ utuppamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ettha ca utuyeva utuppamāṇaṃ. Sace vassānādayo aparipuṇṇā honti, yattakehi divasehi yassa yo utu aparipuṇṇo, te divase sallakkhetvā so divasabhāgo ācikkhitabbo. Atha vā ‘‘ayaṃ nāma utu, so ca kho paripuṇṇo vā aparipuṇṇo vā’’ti evaṃ utuppamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pubbaṇho vā sāyanho vā’’ti evaṃ divasabhāgo ācikkhitabbo. Saṅgītīti idameva sabbaṃ ekato katvā ‘‘tvaṃ kiṃ labhasi, kā te chāyā, kiṃ utuppamāṇaṃ, ko divasabhāgo’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘idaṃ nāma labhāmi – vassaṃ vā hemantaṃ vā gimhaṃ vā, ayaṃ me chāyā, idaṃ utuppamāṇaṃ, ayaṃ divasabhāgoti vadeyyāsī’’ti evaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ.
129 “舍弃”是指丢掉。“给第二次”的意思是:我允许从戒场返回住处时再给一次,并告知四种不应做的事。“黄叶”是指颜色变黄的叶子。“从束缚处脱落”是指从叶柄处掉落。“不能再变绿”是指不可能再恢复绿色。“大石”是指巨大的石头。巴利
129.Ohāyāti chaḍḍetvā. Dutiyaṃ dātunti upasampadamāḷakato pariveṇaṃ gacchantassa dutiyakaṃ dātuṃ anujānāmi, cattāri ca akaraṇīyāni ācikkhitunti attho. Paṇḍupalāsoti paṇḍuvaṇṇo patto. Bandhanā pavuttoti vaṇṭato patito. Abhabbo haritatthāyāti puna harito bhavituṃ abhabbo. Puthusilāti mahāsilā.
130 只要还没得到和合,在尚未获得能对他作举罪甘马的和合期间,与他共同受用、以及举行伍波萨他、自恣等界内共住,都无犯。其余各处依照《大分别》所说,因为容易理解,所以很清楚。巴利
130.Alabbhamānāya sāmaggiyā anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāseti yāva tassa ukkhepanīyakammakaraṇatthāya sāmaggī na labbhati, tāva tena saddhiṃ sambhoge ca uposathapavāraṇādikaraṇabhede saṃvāse ca anāpattīti. Sesaṃ sabbattha mahāvibhaṅge vuttānusārena suviññeyyattā pākaṭamevāti.